674-2005 Bid Opportunity
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
List of Contents
Section 00000
Page 1
Section Title
Pages
Division 16 - Electrical
16010
Electrical General Requirements
16106
Installation of Cables in Trenches and in Ducts
16107
Direct Buried Underground Cable Ducts
16111
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings
16122
Wires and Cables
16131
Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes, Cabinets and CSTE's
16132
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings
16141
Wiring Devices
16151
Wire and Box Connectors - 0-1000 V
16191
Fastenings and Supports
16192
Mechanical Equipment Connections
16193
Miscellaneous Apparatus and Appliances
16195
Work in Existing Building
16421
Service Entrance Board
16426
Secondary Switchgear (120/208V & 347/600V)
16432
Instrument Transformers
16440
Disconnect Switches - Fused and Non-Fused Up to 1000
16450
Grounding - Secondary
16461
Dry Type Transformers up to 600 V Primary
16471
Panelboards Breaker Type
16475
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
16477
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
16478
Fuses - Low Voltage
16485
Contactors
16496
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters - Class "A"
16505
Lighting Equipment
16519
Exit Lights
16536
Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting
16610
Uninterruptible Power System
16622
Power Generation Diesel
16627
Automatic Load Transfer Equipment
16692
Lightning Protection
16723
Fire Alarm Systems (Addressable, Two Stage)
16746
Voice and Data Communications Pathway
16747
Voice and Data Communications Cabling
16761
Intercom System
16800
Electric Heating
16811
Motor Starters to 600 V
16902
P2000 Integrated Security Management System
16920
Closed Circuit TV (CCTV) System
END
V
24
4
2
6
7
4
5
5
1
2
3
2
3
6
4
2
2
4
4
4
7
3
2
2
2
5
2
4
16
13
7
2
29
8
18
3
2
4
38
6
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.1
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 1
General
.1
This Section covers items common to Sections of Division 16.
This section supplements requirements of Division 1.
.2
All drawings and all sections of the specifications shall apply
to and form an integral part of this section.
1.2
Time/Date Sensitive Electronic Equipment and Software
.1
1.3
All time/date sensitive electronic equipment and software
provided on this project shall be year 2000 compatible and shall
be based on the use of full, unabbreviated, unambiguous discrete
time and date codes.
Codes and Standards
.1
Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1 except
where specified otherwise.
.2
Do overhead and underground systems in accordance with CSA
C22.3No.1 except where specified otherwise.
.3
Abbreviations for electrical terms: to CSA Z85.
.4
The electrical installation shall comply with the requirements
of the Electrical Supply Authority, the latest edition of the
Canadian Electrical Code, with all Provincial and Municipal Laws,
Rules and Ordinances, and to the satisfaction of those persons
having jurisdiction over same.
.5
Notify the Contract Administrator of any discrepancies or
conflictions with any regulation in accordance with B4. Failing
such notification, meet all such requirements without change to
the contract price.
.6
In no instance shall the standard established by these
specifications and drawings be reduced by any of the codes, rules
or ordinances.
1.4
Care, Operation and Start-up
.1
Upon completion of the project, demonstrate the operation of all
equipment in the presence of the City of Winnipeg, or his
representative, and the Contract Administrator. Obtain signed
certification from the City of Winnipeg that such equipment was
shown to be fully operational and that all necessary operating
instructions have been provided.
.2
Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service
Contract Administrator to supervise start-up of installation,
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 2
check, adjust, balance, calibrate, test and commission components
as specified in subsequent sections.
.3
Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits
as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that
operating personnel are conversant with all aspects of its care
and operation.
.4
Carefully examine all plans and specifications pertaining to
this Contract and become familiar with all details. Visit the
site and determine all factors affecting this section of the work
and include all costs for same in Bid Submission.
1.5
Voltage Ratings
.1
Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235.
.2
Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and
equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal
operating limits established by above standard. Equipment to
operate in extreme operating conditions established in above
standard without damage to equipment.
1.6
Permits, Fees and Inspection
.1
Submit to Electrical Inspection Department and Supply Authority
necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination
and approval prior to commencement of work.
.2
Pay all associated fees for inspection of the work by
authorities having jurisdiction.
.3
Notify Contract Administrator of changes required by Electrical
Inspection Department prior to making changes.
.4
Furnish Certificates of Acceptance from authorities having
jurisdiction on completion of work to Contract Administrator.
Copies to be included in Maintenance Manuals.
1.7
Materials and Equipment
.1
Provide materials and equipment in accordance with Div. 1.
.2
Equipment and material to be CSA certified or certified by an
equivalent recognized certifying agency to meet Canadian
Standards. Where there is no alternative to supplying equipment
which is certified, obtain special approval from local Electrical
Inspection Department or authority having jurisdiction.
.3
Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 3
.4
Submit for Contract Administrator's approval, a duplicate list
of makes and types of all equipment and materials for this
project, prior to placing of orders for same. This shall be done
within fourteen (14) days of the award of the project contract to
the General Contractor in order to avoid delays in delivery and
completion.
.5
Any material or equipment ordered or installed without the
Contract Administrator's prior approval shall, if so directed by
the Contract Administrator, be removed and replaced with approved
material or equipment without a change in the contract price.
.6
Equipment Installation:
.1
Provide minimum 1000mm (39.4") clearance and access space
at all equipment access doors/panels, breakers, switches,
controls, etc.
.2
Equipment to be located away from pipe shafts and all fluid
piping.
.3
Equipment and cable shall not restrict and/or interfere
with necessary access space required to safely service mechanical
equipment (ventilation fans, filters, etc.) which are existing
and/or to be installed under this contract.
.4
Prior to equipment installation, confirm proposed
installation location with Consultant.
.5
Provide scaled drawings for approval, showing layouts of
electrical rooms. Drawings shall include dimensions of actual
equipment being used and dimensioned locations of equipment.
Submit these scaled drawings with shop drawings of electrical
distribution equipment. Submit these scaled drawings with shop
drawings of electrical distribution equipment.
1.8
Responsibility
.1
Be responsible for any damage caused the City of Winnipeg, or
their Contractors due to improperly carrying out this work.
.2
Install all components of this work promptly and where
applicable, in advance of concrete pouring, or similar
construction. Provide and set in the proper sequence of
construction, all sleeves, hangers, inserts, etc. and arrange for
all necessary openings, where required to accommodate the
electrical installation.
.3
Work shall be arranged in co-operation with other divisions of
this specification in such a manner that it doesn't interfere
with the progress of the project. In areas where ducts or pipes
must be installed along with conduit or cable, co-operate with
other divisions so that the finished job will represent the most
efficient use of the space.
.4
In no case proceed with any work in uncertainty. Obtain, from
the Contract Administrator, any clarification necessary and
thoroughly understand all portions of the work to be performed.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.9
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 4
Electric Motors, Equipment and Controls
.1
Supplier and installer responsibility is indicated in Motor
Schedule on electrical drawings, or in this specification and
related mechanical responsibility is indicated in Mechanical
Equipment Schedule on mechanical drawings.
.2
Control wiring and conduit is specified in Division 16 except
for conduit, wiring and connections below 50V which are related
to temperature control systems specified in Division 15 and/or
shown on mechanical drawings.
1.10
Finishes
.1
Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust
resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of
finish enamel.
.1
Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment green" finish
to EEMAC Y1-1-1955.
.2
Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light
grey to EEMAC 2Y-1-1958.
.2
Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched
or marred during shipment or installation, to match original
paint.
.3
Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks, and
fastenings to prevent rusting.
1.11
Workmanship and Materials
.1
The installation shall consist of material and equipment
specified unless as provided herein. Electrical equipment
provided under this contract shall be built in accordance with
EEMAC standards and shall be C.S.A. certified (or certified by an
equivalent recognized certifying agency to meet Canadian
Standards) and/or locally approved. All equipment supplied under
this contract shall be new and the best of its respective kind
and of uniform pattern throughout.
.2
Any material or equipment ordered or installed without the
Contract Administrator's prior approval shall, if so directed by
the Contract Administrator, be removed and replaced with approved
material or equipment without a change to the contract.
.3
Replace inferior work if so ordered by Contract Administrator
without a change to the contract.
.4
Retain same foreman or superintendent on the job until
completed, unless otherwise directed by the Contract
Administrator.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.5
1.12
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 5
All tradesmen shall carry all tools on their person at all
times. Any tool not in use shall be under lock and key in an area
authorized by the Contract Administrator.
Cleanliness and Cleaning
.1
This division shall maintain a clean tidy job site. All boxes,
crates, and construction debris due to this portion of the work
shall be neatly piled outside the construction area and shall be
removed at least weekly during the construction period. All
construction areas shall be kept clear of debris.
.2
Before the project will be accepted by the City of Winnipeg, all
lighting fixtures, lamps, lens, panelboards, switches,
receptacles, cover plates, and other electrical equipment shall
be clean and free of dust, plaster, paint, etc. Any equipment
which is scratched or damaged shall be replaced or refinished if
so designated by the Contract Administration.
1.13
Modifications
.1
1.14
Locations of all light fixtures, convenience receptacles,
outlets, switches, telephone or similar outlets, fire alarm
stations, bells, etc. are subject to modification by the Contract
Administrator, who reserves the right to move these up to 3000 mm
from the position shown, without change to the contract price,
provided notice is given before the related work has commenced.
Request for Substitutes
.1
1.15
Applications for approval of substitutes, or alternate
materials, or methods, as substitutions for those specified or
shown, shall be submitted in accordance with B6.
Engineering Observations
.1
Contractor's work will be observed periodically by the City of
Winnipeg, and/or Contract Administrator or their representatives,
solely for purpose of determining general quality of work, and
not for any other purpose. Guidance will be offered to Contractor
in interpretation of plans and specifications to assist him to
carry out work. Observation and directives given to Contractor
does not relieve Contractor and his agents, servants and
employees of their responsibility to erect and install work in
all its parts in a safe and workmanlike manner, and in accordance
with plans and specifications, nor impose upon the City of
Winnipeg, and/or Contract Administrator or their representatives,
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 6
any responsibility to supervise or oversee erection or
installation of any work.
.2
1.16
Contractor shall notify Contract Administrator for a final
distribution inspection prior to energizing distribution system.
All distribution equipment shall be left with covers removed to
allow a thorough inspection.
Guarantee
.1
Guarantee the satisfactory operation of all work and equipment
supplied and installed as a part of this section of the
specifications.
.2
Replace forthwith, at no additional material or labour cost, any
part which may fail, or prove defective within a period of twelve
(12) calendar months after the final acceptance of the complete
installation, provided that such failure is not due to improper
usage, or ordinary wear and tear.
.3
No certificate given, payment made, partial or entire use of the
equipment by the City of Winnipeg or their representative shall
be construed as acceptance of defective workmanship or materials.
.4
This general guarantee shall not act as a waiver of any
specified guarantee or special equipment guarantees covering a
greater length of time.
1.17
Identification of Equipment
.1
Identify electrical equipment with nameplates and labels as
follows and as indicated in other specification sections.
.2
Nameplates:
.1
Lamacoid 3mm thick plastic engraving sheet, shall be white
with black letters or as directed, mechanically attached with
self tapping screws. Nameplates for equipment fed from emergency
power or from emergency UPS power (increase nameplate size as
required to suit wording) shall be white with red letters.
NAMEPLATE SIZES
Size 1
10 x 50mm
1 line
3mm high letters
Size 2
12 x 70mm
1 lines
5mm high letters
Size 3
12 x 70mm
2 lines
3mm high letters
Size 4
20 x 90mm
1 line
8mm high letters
Size 5
20 x 90mm
2 lines
5mm high letters
Size 6
25 x 100mm
1 line
12mm high letters
Size 7
25 x 100mm
2 lines
6mm high letters
_________________________________________________________
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 7
.3
Labels:
.1
Embossed plastic labels with 6mm high letters unless
specified otherwise.
.4
Fabrication details of all nameplates labels and wording on
nameplates and labels to be approved by Contract Administrator
prior to manufacture.
.5
Allow an average of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate and
label.
.6
Room names and numbers used shall be actual room names and
numbers that will be used on the project. Division 16 to
co-ordinate and confirm with trades involved.
.7
Identification to be English.
.8
Co-ordinate names of equipment and systems with Division 15 to
ensure that identical names are used.
.9
Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate
system and/or voltage characteristics.
.10
Nameplates for disconnects, starters and contactors: Indicate
equipment being controlled and voltage.
.11
Nameplates for terminal cabinets and pull boxes: Indicate system
and voltage.
.12
Nameplates for transformers: Indicate capacity, primary and
secondary voltages.
.13
Nameplates for control devices: indicate equipment controlled.
.14
Adjacent to each breaker in CDP type panelboards, provide and
mount lamacoid nameplates identifying the respective load and
location.
.15
To match existing where applicable.
.16
All convenience receptacles shall have a lamacoid size 1 plate
on which the panel and circuit number from which it is fed, is
indicated. The identification shall be mechanically secured to
the coverplate on the appropriate outlet. Pressure indented
adhesive strip nameplates are not acceptable and shall not be
used.
.17
All non-patient care receptacles in patient care areas shall
have a "Housekeeping" lamacoid near top of cover plate.
.18
All receptacles fed from a UPS shall have a "UPS" lamacoid near
top of cover plate.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.18
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 8
Wiring Identification
.1
Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings on
both ends of phase conductors of feeders (coloured plastic tapes)
and branch circuit wiring (numbered wire markers). Conductor
marker identification shall correspond with panel or terminal
board directory information.
.2
Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
.3
Colour Code: To CSA C22.1.
.4
Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched
throughout system. Colour coding used shall be documented by
individual systems in Maintenance Manuals.
.5
Insulated grounding conductors shall have a green finish and
shall be used only as a grounding conductor.
1.19
Conduit, Outlet Boxes and Cable Identification
.1
Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cable.
.2
Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable
enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 15m intervals.
.3
Colours: 25mm wide prime colour and 20mm wide auxiliary colour.
Up to 250V (normal power)
Up to 600V (normal power)
Up to 250V (emergency power)
Up to 600V (emergency power)
Telephone
Other communication systems
Fire alarm
Emergency voice
Other security systems
Control
Fibre optic
Prime
yellow
yellow
yellow & red
yellow & red
green
green
red
red
red
blue
orange
Auxiliary
green
green
blue
blue
yellow
.4
Other conduit systems as directed on site; all conduit systems
shall be identified.
.5
Color outlet box covers to color designated and show circuit
numbers in black felt marker on inside of covers.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.20
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 9
Wiring Terminations
.1
1.21
Lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring to be
suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.
Manufacturers and CSA Certification Labels (or equivalent)
.1
1.22
Visible and legible after equipment is installed.
Warning Signs
.1
As specified and to meet requirements of Electrical Inspection
Department and Contract Administrator.
.2
Decal signs, minimum size 175 x 250mm.
1.23
Single Line Electrical Diagrams
.1
Provide single line electrical diagrams under plexiglass as
follows:
.1
Electrical distribution system: Locate in main electrical
room or as designated by the City of Winnipeg's representative.
.2
Provide fire alarm riser diagram, plan and zoning of building
under plexiglass at fire alarm control panel.
.3
At each remote annunciator provide a small scale floor plan c/w
room numbers. Device tags shall utilize the as-built room
numbers.
.4
Drawings: 600 x 900mm minimum size.
1.24
Location of Outlets
.1
Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150mm
horizontal clearance between boxes.
.2
Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing
distance does not exceed 3000mm, and information is given before
installation.
.3
Locate light switches on latch side of doors. Locate disconnect
devices in mechanical and elevator machine rooms on latch side of
door.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.25
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 10
Load Balance
.1
Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads
(lighting) operating at time of acceptance. Adjust branch circuit
connections as required to obtain best balance of current between
phases and record changes.
.2
Measure phase voltage at loads and adjust transformer taps to
within 2% of rated voltage of equipment.
.3
Submit, at completion of work, report listing phase and neutral
currents on panelboards, dry-core transformers and motor control
centres, operating under normal load. State hour and date on
which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test.
Provide copy of report in all maintenance manuals.
1.26
Conduit and Cable Installation
.1
Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete.
Sleeves through concrete: Schedule 40 steel pipe, sized for free
passage of conduit, and protruding 50mm each side.
.2
If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors,
remove before conduit installation.
.3
Install cables, conduit and fittings to be embedded or plastered
over, neatly and close to building structure so furring can be
kept to minimum.
.4
Arrange for holes through exterior wall and roof to be flashed
and made weatherproof.
1.27
Field Quality Control
.1
Conduct and pay for following tests:
.1
Power distribution system including phasing, voltage,
grounding and load balancing.
.2
Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.
.3
Lighting and its control.
.4
Motors, heaters, and associated control equipment including
sequenced operation of systems where applicable.
.5
Systems: Fire alarm system, security system, communication
systems.
.6
Any other electrical systems.
.2
Furnish manufacturer's certificate or letter confirming that
entire installation as it pertains to each system has been
installed to manufacturer's instructions.
.3
All circuits shall be tested to ensure that the circuit numbers
are correct and that the proper neutral conductors have been
provided and installed.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 11
.4
Insulation resistance testing:
.1
Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350V with a
500V instrument.
.2
Megger 350V - 600V circuits, feeders and equipment with a
1000V instrument.
.3
Check resistance to ground before energizing.
.5
Advise Contract Administrator of dates and times for all testing
with sufficient advance notice to allow Contract Administrator to
make arrangements to attend.
.6
Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to
conduct tests during and at conclusion of project.
.7
Submit test results for Contract Administrator's review.
.8
Insert test results and supplier's certifications in Maintenance
Manuals.
1.28
Co-ordination Study
.1
Submit a complete Short Circuit and Time-Current Coordination
Study for the breakers and fuses provided under this contract as
well as for the existing upstream breakers and fuses affecting
the distributions in this contract. If any existing breakers must
be adjusted for proper coordination, other breakers affected must
be included in the study and adjusted as required for proper
coordination. Hydro protective devices to be included in the
study.
.1
For the new distributions include all existing upstream
overcurrent protection.
.2
Drawings of existing distributions are not available. Visit
site to obtain information.
.3
Curves shall be plotted on a standard log-log scale as time
versus current values on a common 600 Volt base. It shall be the
responsibility of the Division 16 contractor to provide
time-current curves of all breakers, fuses, etc.
.4
The study shall:
.1
Select settings and characteristics for the protective
devices in order to achieve maximum selectivity between
devices during fault conditions (ie. the device nearest the
fault will operate first, thus minimizing the interruption)
and to provide proper protection for all distribution
equipment, transformers, cable, etc.
.2
Determine the fault currents at critical points in the
power system under the worst case conditions in order to
ensure the adequacy of the electrical equipment and
protective devices. Motor contribution is to be taken into
account.
.3
Include all breakers in CDP type panelboards. Breaker
settings shall be listed in the study for all breakers with
adjustable trips.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 12
.5
In addition to the curves for the protective devices, each
drawing shall show and include proper protection and coordination
for:
.1
Transformer inrush points.
.2
Transformer full load currents.
.3
Transformer damage curves (single phase and three
phase).
.4
Cable damage curves.
.5
The largest motor or motors likely to present
coordination problems.
.6
All required breaker settings shall be listed in table form
including breaker details such as breaker type, trip rating, etc.
All breakers with adjustable trips shall be included in this
list.
.7
Maximum available short circuit currents shall be listed
for each bus. This listing shall also include the interrupting
rating of the protective devices actually supplied in the
contract.
.8
In all cases use actual values for transformer impedance,
cable types, cable sizes, cable lengths, available utility fault
current, etc.
.9
Identification names and numbers for breakers and
distribution in the study shall match the identification shown on
the contract documents.
.10 The short circuit and coordination study shall be done by a
Professional Engineer licensed in the Province of Manitoba and
the study shall be signed and sealed by the Professional
Engineer.
.11 Ground fault curves shall be plotted on the same drawings
as overcurrent curves to ensure proper coordination.
.12 Where there is a generator set, the study shall include the
generator breakers.
.13 Where there is equipment such as power factor correction
panels with incoming breakers include these breakers in the
study.
.14 As a minimum, the study shall be bound in a 3-ring loose
leaf binder and shall include:
.1
A title sheet listing the study name, project name,
project number, date, engineering company that prepared the
study (including address and phone number), the engineers
seal and signature, etc.
.2
Table of Contents.
.3
Purpose of the study.
.4
The criteria for determining proper selective
coordination, protection, adequacy, etc. (eg. describe when
coordination is achieved, minimum/maximum tripping times and
current values, separation between curves, safety margins,
damage curves, etc.).
.5
Summary stating that proper selective coordination,
proper protection, adequacy of the equipment for the maximum
available short circuit currents, etc. was achieved and
listing any areas of compromise, potential problems,
marginal adequacies, etc.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 13
.6
Drawings of the breaker curves showing proper
selective coordination, protection, adequacies, etc. On each
drawing, include a single line diagram of the distribution
for the curves shown on the drawing, breaker settings, etc.
.7
Maximum available short circuit currents at each bus.
.15 The study shall be started immediately on award of contract
and shall be submitted as a shop drawing for review in advance of
distribution shop drawings. A minimum of 6 copies shall be
submitted.
.16 In cases such as primary breaker protection for
transformers provide breakers with fully adjustable solid state
trips (fully adjustable LSIG setting) for transformers 30 kVa and
larger in order to allow proper coordination. Costs for this
shall be included in the Bid Submission price.
.17 All breakers shall be set per the curves in the
coordination study.
.18 The Short Circuit and Time-Current Coordination Study
(revised to as-built conditions) shall be included in the
Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
.2
A certified testing agency normally engaged in field service
equipment testing shall be engaged and shall test all the circuit
breaker settings for coordination verification as follows (to
include new and existing breakers that require adjustment of
settings):
.1
Verification of coordination testing shall consist of:
.1
Testing of all circuit breaker solid state relays with
the breaker manufacturer's test kit to verify at least 3
points on each time-current characteristic. One point shall
be tested at the breakpoint of the characteristic at the
high end and another point shall be tested at the breakpoint
of the characteristic at the low end. The other points shall
be tested along the straight line of the characteristic.
.2
Ductor (contact resistance) testing and meggar
(insulation) testing of all breakers including moulded case
breakers in CDP type panels, air circuit breakers, other
breakers with solid state trips, high voltage breakers, etc.
.2
The report shall be bound in a 3-ring loose leaf binder,
similar to the Short Circuit and Time-Coordination Study, with
title sheet, table of contents, purpose, test criteria, test
equipment used, summary and test data. The test data shall list
all devices in table form with both the actual tested values and
the required values listed. All test values shall fall within +/10% of the required values. Necessary corrective action shall be
taken to correct any problems and then re-tested until the
equipment passes all required tests. Compare test results to the
time current coordination study and confirm that the curves as
actually tested provide the required coordination. After all
tests and analysis has been completed successfully, the summary
in the final report shall clearly state that all equipment has
successfully passed all tests and is in good operating condition.
The test report shall be certified by the testing agency and
shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer responsible
for the testing. A minimum of 6 copies shall be submitted.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 14
.3
The breaker co-ordination test report shall be included in
the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
.3
1.29
Acceptable Supplier of Service:
.1
Manengco Engineering
.2
J.R. Stephenson Mfg. Ltd.
.3
Siemens
.4
Schneider
.5
Cutler Hammer
Drawings
.1
Carefully examine all drawings and specifications relating to
all work, and all electrical work indicated thereon shall be
considered as a part of the work by this section unless indicated
otherwise. Prior to the date of the last addendum report at once
to the Contract Administrator, any defect, discrepancy, omission
or interference affecting the work of this section, or the
guarantee of same.
.2
Install all equipment as shown or as specified and in accordance
with manufacturer's approved shop drawings.
.3
The drawings accompanying these specifications are intended to
show the general arrangement and extent of the work to be carried
out, but the exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be
determined as the work progresses. The location of equipment,
outlets, etc., as given on the drawings are approximately
correct, but it shall be understood that they are subject to such
modifications as may be found necessary or desirable at the time
of installation to meet any structural or architectural
requirements. Such changes shall be implemented as directed by
the Contract Administrator, without additional charge.
.4
Electrical drawings do not show all structural and other
details. Architectural and structural conditions shall govern,
and this Section shall make without charge, changes or additions
to accommodate these conditions. Check all architectural plans,
elevations and details for location of electrical devices,
equipment and equipment to be connected.
.5
Where drawings indicate the general location and route to be
followed by conduit, cable, etc., these locations must be
governed by job conditions. Where the required conduit, cable, an
boxes are not shown on drawings or only shown diagrammatically,
they shall be installed to conserve maximum head room and
interfere as little as possible with free use of space through
which they pass. Maximum clearance above floor shall be
maintained under all suspended conduit and equipment, unless
otherwise shown on the drawings, or approved by the Contract
Administrator.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 15
.6
Submit a complete set of drawings for the proposed installation
to the Inspection Department having jurisdiction and receive
written approval before installation or fabrication of any
equipment. No extra compensation will be allowed for any changes
or rearrangement of any electrical apparatus or materials
necessary due to failure to receive this approval.
.7
Provide the Electric Utility with three copies of a drawing
showing the main distribution and the proposed method of metering
for approval prior to the manufacture of equipment.
1.30
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
.1
Submit shop drawings, produce detailed data and samples in
accordance with previous sections, as specified herein, and to
Contract Administrator's satisfaction.
.2
Indicate details of construction, dimensions, capacities,
weights and electrical performance characteristics of equipment
or material.
.3
Where applicable, include actual wiring, single line and
schematic diagrams. Include all technical data and full details
of each component.
.4
Include wiring drawings or diagrams showing interconnection with
work of other sections.
.5
Shop drawings of all equipment must be submitted to the Contract
Administrator for review in sufficient time to enable him to
retain them for at least ten (10) working days.
.6
One print and one reproducible sepia of each shop drawing shall
be submitted.
.7
Cross out or eradicate all non-related items.
.8
Bind each system separately eg. P.A., CCTV, Nurse Call,
Intercom, Fire Alarm, etc. One common binder from one supplier
will not be acceptable.
.9
Shop drawing submission shall include a photocopy of all
applicable specification sections showing a complete compliance/
non-compliance listing. Refer to spec. detail sheet "Shop Drawing
Compliance List Sample" for example.
.10
Division 16 shall check all shop drawings and make necessary
changes, or cause the supplier to make necessary changes, prior
to submission to the Contract Administrator. Shop drawings will
be reviewed by the Contract Administrator and if re-submission is
required, Division 16 shall ensure that the supplier's drawings
have been changed to comply before returning them to the Contract
Administrator for review again.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 16
.11
Review of the shop drawings by the Contract Administrator shall
not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors and
omissions therein.
.12
Each drawing submission to bear the following signed stamp, and
shall include name of project, equipment supplier, and clause
number equipment is specified under.
CONTRACTORS CERTIFICATION
This drawing has been reviewed by
(firm name)
.
All dimensions have been checked and found
compatible with the contract drawings and all
capacities, quantities, sizes, and other data
contained in the contract documents have been
listed by the supplier on this drawing and
have been checked by the undersigned and found
correct.
Date
Per:
.13
Clearly show division of responsibility. No item, equipment or
description of work shall be indicated to be supplied or work to
be done "By Others" or "By Purchaser". Any item, equipment or
description of work shown on shop drawings shall form part of
contract, unless specifically noted to the contrary.
.14
Provide field dimensions required by electrical suppliers and
sub-subcontractors. In cases where fabrication is required prior
to field dimensions being available, check all related drawings
and obtain clarification from Contract Administrator if
necessary.
.15
Main distribution and utility metering shop drawings must be
approved by local utility prior to submission to Contract
Administrator.
.16
Incomplete submissions will be returned for updating and
re-submittal without Contract Administrator's review.
1.31
Mounting Heights
.1
Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centre
line of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise.
.2
If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated,
verify before proceeding with installation.
.3
Install electrical equipment at following heights unless
indicated otherwise.
.1
Local switches: 1220mm.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 17
.2
Wall receptacles:
.1
General: 400mm.
.2
Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 200mm.
.3
Above top of counters or counter splashback: 175mm.
.4
In mechanical rooms: 915mm.
.3
Panelboards, annunciators etc.: 2000mm to top.
.4
Voice/data and interphone outlets: 400mm.
.5
Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets: 1500mm.
.6
Fire alarm stations: 1370mm.
.7
Fire alarm bells: 2290mm.
.8
End-of-line resistors: 1830mm.
.9
Television outlets: 400mm.
.10 Wall mounted speakers: 2100mm
.11 Clocks: 2100mm.
.12 Door bell pushbuttons: 1500mm.
.13 Nurse call and receptacles at bed locations: 1525mm.
.14 As per Architectural elevations.
.15 Heights as above or at bottom of nearest block or brick
course.
.16 Heights to match existing where applicable.
1.32
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into
operation and maintenance manuals specified.
.2
Include in operations and maintenance data:
.1
Details of design elements, construction features,
component function and maintenance requirements, to permit
effective start-up, operation, maintenance, repair, modification,
extension, and expansion of any portion or feature of the
electrical installation.
.2
Technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins,
component illustrations, exploded views, technical descriptions
of items, and parts lists. Advertising or sales literature alone
is not acceptable.
.3
Wiring and schematic diagrams and performance curves.
.4
Names and addresses of local suppliers.
.5
Copy of reviewed shop drawings.
.3
Provide five (5) complete, hard-backed, D-ring loose leaf
Maintenance Manuals. These shall consist of typewritten or
printed instructions for operating and maintaining all systems
and equipment provided under this section of the specification.
Manuals shall also contain shop drawings, wiring diagrams, test
results and manufacturer's brochures on all equipment, together
with typed index tab sheets.
.4
As work progresses, record on one (1) set of drawings, installed
conduit layout as well as any approved changes and deviations
from the original contract and/or working drawings, including
outlets, equipment and panel locations. At completion of work,
submit to the Contract Administrator, at the contractor's costs,
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 18
reproducible Record Drawings in ACAD format. The contract shall
not be considered complete and no final payment shall be made
until these drawings are accepted by the Contract Administrator.
(Provide separate drawings for each system in order not to
"crowd" drawings.)
1.33
Temporary Lighting and Power
.1
1.34
All temporary and construction lighting and power work and costs
for same are not included as part of the scope of the work of
this section. Refer to such clauses in other sections of the
specification.
Testing
.1
Test all circuits and wires for continuity, insulation
resistance and high impedance grounds. Those circuits which test
non-continuous, with an insulation resistance less than 2 Megohms
or with high impedance grounds shall be replaced.
.2
All empty conduits shall be left with an insulated #14 AWG fish
wire.
.3
Test all panels under full load and make necessary reconnection
of single phase loads from one leg or phase to another to balance
the load on legs or phases as nearly as possible. Test results,
test values measured, date of each measurement, company name and
signature of person making each measurement shall be neatly
recorded. Record all changes on Record Drawings.
.4
Test all required ground rods for ground resistance, with
standard test equipment.
.5
Keep a record of all final tests, bind, and turn over
typewritten results to the Contract Administrator as a part of
the maintenance manual. All final test values measured, date of
each measurement, company name and signature of person making
each measurement shall be neatly recorded. After all tests have
been successfully completed, each test report shall contain a
summary which clearly states that all results were satisfactory.
.6
Upon completion of the work and adjustments of all equipment,
all systems shall be tested in the presence of the Contract
Administrator to demonstrate that all equipment furnished and
installed or connected as a part of this section of the contract
shall function electrically in the required manner as determined
by the Contract Administrator.
.7
All circuits shall be tested to ensure that the circuit numbers
are correct and that the proper neutral conductors have been
provided and installed.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.8
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 19
Voltage tests shall be conducted and transformer taps adjusted
or other corrective measures carried out as directed by the
Contract Administrator. Refer also to 4.1 Care, Operation and
Start-Up.
.9
.1
Carry out on-site testing and commissioning of all high
voltage and low voltage switchgear including:
.1
Visual inspection
.2
Operational tests
.3
Meggar tests
.4
Contact resistance tests
.5
Phasing checks
.6
Metering
.7
Relay operation
.8
Fluid levels
.9
Hi-pot tests
.2
Submit a report that includes test results, observations,
summary, etc. Test report to clearly state that all results are
acceptable.
1.35
Cutting and Patching
.1
Cutting, patching and repairs to existing surfaces required as a
result of the removal and/or relocation of existing equipment and
piping, and/or installation of new equipment and piping in
existing building(s) to be included by Div. 16 - Electrical in
Bid Submission price. Division 16 - Electrical to employ and pay
appropriate Subcontractor whose work is involved, for carrying
out work described above.
.2
Perform all cutting and patching required for installing
electrical systems.
.3
Division 16 shall retain services of Contractor to carry out
actual work involved in cutting wall openings, floor openings and
the like, and in patching up after installation has been
completed.
.4
Division 16 shall mark all openings required for conduits,
cables, ducts, and the like.
.5
Cutting to be 'neat' sizes. Patch all edges such as cover
plates, etc. Hide cut edges.
.6
If, in the opinion of Contract Administrator, cutting of holes
has been improperly performed (i.e. too large for conduits or
cables) Division 16 - Electrical to do all patching as per
original specifications and all costs will be borne by him.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.36
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 20
Excavation and Backfilling
.1
Excavate and backfill as required for underground electrical
services as indicated. Provide protective materials around and
over services and be present at all times during excavation and
backfilling to supervise work. Backfilling shall restore the
excavated area to the original condition and shall include
sodding or asphalt repair where required.
.2
Work to be in accordance with the current CSA Bulletin.
.3
Include all costs for excavation and backfilling, for any
underground electrical installation unless otherwise indicated.
1.37
Fireproofing
.1
Where cables or conduits pass through floors, block or concrete
walls and fire rated walls, seal openings with 3 M Brand 7900
Series Fire Barrier System or equivalent, to maintain fire
rating.
.2
Fireproofing of electrical cables, conduits, trays, etc. passing
through fire barriers shall conform to local codes and inspection
authorities.
1.38
Access Doors
.1
Provide and install access doors where electrical equipment
requiring access is built-in. Access doors to be 2.5mm (12 ga.)
steel, approximately 300mm x 300mm (12" x 12") minimum or as
approved, finished prime coat only, with concealed hinges, anchor
straps, plaster lock and without screws, all equal to Milcor
manufacturer. All locks to be flush type, screwdriver operated.
Where it is necessary for persons to enter through door, doors to
be at least 600mm x 600mm.
.2
In applied tile or exposed glazed or unglazed structural tile,
access doors shall take the tile and be sized and located to suit
tile patterns. In masonry walls access doors to be sized and
located to suit masonry unit sizes. In removable acoustic tile
ceilings, no access doors are required.
.3
Access doors located in fire rated ceilings or walls shall be
approved fire rated doors and frames.
.4
Co-ordinate access door types, locations, etc. with Contract
Administrator.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.39
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 21
Security Fasteners and Hardware
.1
Refer to other sections of the specifications for Security
Fasteners. Division 16 to install security fasteners required for
Division 16 work.
.2
This shall also include security tamperproof screws that are
exposed such as in light fixtures, coverplates, system devices,
outlet covers, etc.
.3
Refer to other sections of the specifications for security
hardware.
1.40
Protection
.1
Protect exposed live equipment during construction for personnel
safety.
.2
Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 120 VOLTS", or with an
appropriate voltage in English.
.3
Arrange for installation of temporary doors for rooms containing
electrical distribution equipment. Keep these doors locked except
when under direct supervision of electrician.
1.41
Scheduling of Work
.1
Existing buildings will remain in use during construction.
Arrange work so that interruption of services is kept to a
minimum. Obtain permission from the City of Winnipeg prior to
cutting into electrical services. Where deemed necessary by
Contract Administrator, temporary electrical shall be installed
and/or work shall be carried out at night and on weekends.
.2
Contractor to maintain continuous and adequate all existing
electrical systems and other services during entire time of this
contract. Provide temporary conduit, wire, equipment, etc. where
necessary to meet this requirement.
1.42
Examination of Documents and Site
.1
Carefully examine all plans and specifications pertaining to
this contract and become familiar with all details. Visit the
site and determine all factors affecting this section of the
work; include all costs for same in Bid Submission.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.43
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 22
Demolition of Existing Electrical
.1
Remove all unnecessary existing electrical equipment, wiring,
fixtures, in those portions of the existing building which are
being remodelled or demolished. All devices/fixtures, etc. are
not necessarily shown on the plans. The City of Winnipeg shall
select from the materials and/or equipment remaining that which
he wishes to retain, and the remainder shall be removed from the
site. Any electrical equipment in remodelled sections or in
structures removed or altered, adjacent to new work, necessary
for the operation of existing building, shall be relocated as
necessary. All existing equipment re-used shall be made good and
guaranteed. Power interruptions to be kept to a minimum and shall
be at a time suitable to the building occupant. Refer to
Architectural plans for demolition areas/phasing.
.2
Drawings do not show all electrical requiring removal to
accommodate renovations such as receptacles, switches, lights,
starters, motors, nurse call systems, components, heaters, etc.
Division 16 shall visit site, refer to architectural and
electrical drawings and include all costs for demolition.
.3
Refer to Specification Section 16195 - Work in Existing
Building.
1.44
Spare Parts
.1
The Contractor shall submit 15 calendar days after award of
Contract a list of spare parts that the Contractor considers
essential / important / useful to the operation of the systems
described herein. This list shall be in addition to any
spares/consumables called for in the Contract Documents and those
which are required up to practical completion and hand over.
.2
Each spare part listed shall include the manufacturer's/
supplier's price including all mark-ups, delivery and packaging.
The prices shall remain valid for 12 months following handover of
the project.
.3
These spare parts may or may not be ordered during the Contract
period. The Contractor shall only include these items in the
Contract sum if specifically instructed to do so.
.4
Any spare parts listed shall be completely interchangeable with
those specified in the Contract Documents and included in the
works.
.5
Any spares ordered shall be delivered to the specified client's
representative complete with all documents/instructions.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.45
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
Page 23
CASH ALLOWANCES
.1
Refer to Contract Documents for UPS system cash allowance. All
overhead, profit, labour, material, etc. for the installation of
the UPS system shall be included in the Div. 16 price. Refer to
16610.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Installation of
Cables in Trenches
and in Ducts
Section 16106
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Section 03300
.2
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.3
Concrete Encased Duct Bank
and Manholes
Section 16105
.4
Direct Buried Underground
Cable Ducts
Section 16107
.5
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.6
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Cable Protection
.1
2.2
38 x 140 mm planks pressure treated with coloured, napthenate or
5% pentachlorophenol solution, water repellent preservative.
Markers
.1
Concrete type cable markers: 600 x 600 x 100 mm with words:
"cable", "joint" or "conduit" and name of electrical system
impressed in top surface, with arrows to indicate change in
direction of cable and duct runs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Direct Burial of Cables
.1
After sand bed specified in Section 02223 - Excavating,
Trenching and Backfilling, is in place, lay cables maintaining 75
mm clearance from each side of trench to nearest cable. Do not
pull cable into trench.
.2
Provide offsets for thermal action and minor earth movements.
Offset cables 150 mm for each 60 m run, maintaining minimum cable
separation and bending radius requirements.
.3
Underground cable splices not acceptable.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Installation of
Cables in Trenches
and in Ducts
Section 16106
Page 2
.4
Minimum permitted radius at cable bends for rubber, plastic or
lead covered cables, 8 times diameter of cable; for metallic
armoured cables, 12 times diameter of cables or in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
.5
Maintain 150mm minimum separation between cables of different
circuits. Maintain 300 mm horizontal separation between low and
high voltage cables. When low voltage cables cross high voltage
cables maintain 300 mm vertical separation with low voltage
cables in upper position. At crossover, maintain 75mm minimum
vertical separation between low voltage cables and 150mm between
high voltage cables. Maintain 300mm minimum lateral and vertical
separation for fire alarm and control cables when crossing other
cables, with fire alarm and control cables in upper position.
Install treated planks on lower cables 0.6 m in each direction at
crossings.
.6
After sand protective cover specified is in place, install
continuous row of overlapping 38 x 140 mm pressure treated planks
as indicated to cover length of run.
3.2
Cable Installation in Ducts
.1
Install cables as indicated in ducts.
.2
Do not pull spliced cables inside ducts.
.3
Install multiple cables in duct simultaneously.
.4
Use CSA approved lubricants of type compatible with cable jacket
to reduce pulling tension.
.5
To facilitate matching of colour coded multiconductor control
cables reel off in same direction during installation.
.6
Before pulling cable into ducts and until cables properly
terminated, seal ends of lead covered cables with wiping solder;
seal ends of non-leaded cables with moisture seal tape.
.7
After installation of cables, seal duct ends with duct sealing
compound.
3.3
Markers
.1
Mark cable every 150 m along cable runs and changes in
direction.
.2
Mark underground splices.
.3
Where markers are removed to permit installation of additional
cables, reinstall existing markers.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
3.4
Installation of
Cables in Trenches
and in Ducts
Section 16106
Page 3
Field Quality Control
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical
General Requirements.
.2
Perform tests using qualified personnel. Provide necessary
instruments and equipment.
.3
Check phase rotation and identify each phase conductor of each
feeder.
.4
Check each feeder for continuity, short circuits and grounds.
Ensure resistance to ground of circuits is not less than 50
megohms.
.5
Pre-acceptance tests.
.1
After installing cable but before terminating, perform
insulation resistance test with 1000 V megger on each phase
conductor. For mineral insulated (M.I.) cable co-ordinate meggar
voltage rating with manufacturer.
.2
Check insulation resistance after each termination to
ensure that cable system is ready for acceptance testing.
.6
Acceptance Tests
.1
Ensure that terminations and accessory equipment are
disconnected.
.2
Ground shields, ground wires, metallic armour and
conductors not under test.
.3
High Potential (Hipot) Testing.
.1
Conduct hipot testing at 100% of original factory test
voltage in accordance with IPCEA recommendations.
.4
Leakage Current Testing.
.1
Raise voltage in steps from zero to maximum values as
specified by IPCEA for type of cable being tested.
.2
Hold maximum voltage for specified time period by
IPCEA.
.3
Record leakage current at each step.
.7
Provide Contract Administrator with list of test results showing
location at which each test was made, circuit tested and result
of each test and include copies in Maintenance Manuals.
.8
Remove and replace entire length of cable if cable fails to meet
any of test criteria.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Direct Buried
Underground
Cable Ducts
Section 16107
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Excavation and Backfilling
Section 02223
.2
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.3
Wire and Cables
Section 16122
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PVC Ducts and Fittings
.1
Rigid PVC ducts for direct burial: with expanded flange ends,
with minimum wall thickness at any point of 3.0 mm. Nominal
length: 3 m plus or minus 12 mm.
.2
Rigid PVC split ducts.
.3
Rigid PVC couplings, reducers, bell end fittings, plugs, caps,
adaptors as required to make complete installation.
.4
Rigid PVC 90 deg. and 45 deg. bends as required.
.5
Rigid PVC 5 deg. angle couplings as required.
.6
Expansion joints every 100 m and as required.
2.2
Solvent Weld Compound
.1
2.3
Solvent weld compound for PVC duct joints.
Fibreglass Ducts
.1
Fibreglass reinforced epoxy underground cable duct: watertight
self-extinguishing type.
.2
Couplings, reducers, plugs, caps, adaptors, and supports as
required to make a complete installation.
.3
Expansion joints every 100 m and as required.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.4
Direct Buried
Underground
Cable Ducts
Section 16107
Page 2
Plastic Polyethylene Pipe
.1
2.5
Flexible plastic polyethylene pipe with approved couplings and
fittings required to make a complete installation.
Cable Pulling Equipment
.1
2.6
6 mm stranded nylon pull rope tensile strength 5 kN.
Markers
.1
Concrete type cable markers: as indicated, with words: "cable",
"joint" or "conduit" and name of electrical system impressed in
top surface, with arrows to indicate change in direction of duct
runs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install duct in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Clean inside of ducts before laying.
.3
Ensure full, even support every 1.5 m throughout duct length.
.4
Slope ducts with 1 to 400 minimum slope.
.5
During construction, cap ends of ducts to prevent entrance of
foreign materials.
.6
Pull through each duct wooden mandrel not less than 300 mm long
and of diameter 6 mm less than internal diameter of duct,
followed by stiff bristle brush to remove sand, earth and other
foreign matter. Pull stiff bristle brush through each duct
immediately before pulling-in cables.
.7
In each duct install pull rope continuous throughout each duct
run with 3 m spare rope at each end.
.8
Install markers as required.
.9
Clearly show locations on Record Drawings c/w dimensions from
building, curbs, property lines, etc.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Conduits, Conduit
Fastenings and
Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
1.2
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
Location of Conduit
.1
Drawings do not indicate all conduit runs. Those indicated are
in diagrammatic form only.
.2
Produce layout sketches of conduit runs through mechanical and
electrical service areas in order to pre-avoid any conflict with
other construction elements and to determine the most efficient
route to run conduit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Conduits
.1
Rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit.
.2
Epoxy coated conduit: with zinc coating and corrosion resistant
epoxy finish inside and outside.
.3
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): with couplings. Minimum size
shall be 19mm.
.4
Rigid pvc conduit.
.5
Flexible metal conduit and liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.
.6
FRE conduit: Size 75 mm and above.
2.2
Conduit Fastenings
.1
One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm and
smaller. Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50 mm.
.2
Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel Work.
.3
U channel type supports for two or more conduits at 1500 mm oc.
(Surface mounted or suspended).
.4
Six mm dia. galv. threaded rods to support suspended channels.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.3
Conduits, Conduit
Fastenings and
Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
Page 2
Conduit Fittings
.1
Fittings for raceways: to CSA C22.2 No. 18.
.2
Fittings: manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating:
same as conduit.
.3
Factory "ells" where 90 deg. bends are required for 25 mm and
larger conduits.
.4
Steel set screw connectors and couplings. Insulated throat
liners on connectors.
.5
Raintight connectors and fittings c/w O-rings for use on
weatherproof or sprinklerproof enclosures. Raintight couplings to
be used for surface conduit installations exposed to moisture or
sprinkler heads.
.6
Explosion proof in hazardous areas to meet requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4
Expansion Fittings for Rigid Conduit
.1
Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly
suitable for 100 or 200 mm linear expansion.
.2
Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper
suitable for linear expansion and 19 mm deflection in all
directions.
.3
Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to
panel.
2.5
Fish Cord
.1
Polypropylene c/w 3m spare length at each conduit end.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and
cause minimum interference in spaces through which they pass.
.2
Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service
rooms.
.3
Use rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit where specified.
.4
Use epoxy coated conduit in corrosive areas.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Conduits, Conduit
Fastenings and
Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
Page 3
.5
Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) except where specified
otherwise.
.6
Use rigid pvc conduit or FRE duct for underground installations.
.7
Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors in dry
areas, connection to recessed incandescent fixtures without a
prewired outlet box, connection to surface or recessed
fluorescent fixtures, transformers and equipment subject to
vibration or movement. Provide a separate insulated grounding
conductor within flexible conduit.
.8
Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors
or vibrating equipment in damp, wet or corrosive locations.
.9
Install conduit sealing fittings in hazardous areas. Fill with
compound.
.10
Conduit stubs from floor slabs where exposed to damage to be
rigid galv. steel.
.11
The conduit sizes as shown or indicated are the minimum
acceptable and shall not be reduced without the approval of the
Contract Administrator.
.12
Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more
than 1/10th of its original diameter.
.13
Mechanically bend steel conduit over 19 mm dia.
.14
Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to
draw conduits up tight.
.15
Install fish cord in empty conduits.
.16
Run a minimum of 2-25 mm spare conduits up to ceiling space and
2-25 mm spare conduits down to ceiling space from each flush
panel. Terminate these conduits in 152 x 152 x 102 mm junction
boxes in ceiling space or in case of an exposed concrete slab,
terminate each conduit in surface type box.
.17
Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked
section. Do not use liquids to clean out conduits.
.18
Dry conduits out before installing wire.
.19
Conduit to be sized as per Canadian Electrical Code or as shown
on drawings. Note that the sizes of branch circuit conductors
scheduled and/or specified on the drawings are minimum sizes and
must be increased as required to suit length of run and voltage
drop in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code. Where conductor
sizes are increased to suit voltage drop requirements, increase
the conduit size to suit.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Conduits, Conduit
Fastenings and
Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
Page 4
.20
Running threads will not be permitted; proper couplings shall be
used.
.21
Not less than 900mm (3'-0") of flexible conduit (and of
sufficient length to allow the lighting fixture to be relocated
to any location within a 6 ft. (1.8m) radius) shall be used for
the connection of recessed lighting fixtures. A separate drop to
be used for each fixture unless fixtures are mounted in
continuous rows.
.22
No circuits fed from emergency or essential power sources shall
be run in the same conduit as other systems.
.23
Provide separate conduit system for emergency distribution.
.24
All conduit runs passing across expansion joints of the building
shall be installed utilizing approved expansion fittings, and
bonding devices.
.25
Refer to 16010 for identification requirements.
.26
All conduit systems in hazardous areas to be rigid galvanized
steel to meet the requirements of the authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.2
Surface Conduits
.1
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.2
Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5 m
clearance.
.3
Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.
.4
Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surface
channels.
.5
Do not pass conduits through structural members except as
indicated.
.6
Do not locate conduits less than 150 mm parallel to steam or hot
water lines with minimum of 75 mm at crossovers.
.7
No power driven pins (Ramset) shall be utilized to secure any
portion of the conduit.
3.3
Concealed Conduits
.1
Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls.
.2
Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
3.4
Conduits, Conduit
Fastenings and
Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
Page 5
Conduits in Cast-in-place Concrete
.1
Except with the approval of the Structural Engineer, all conduit
runs embedded in concrete shall not be larger in outside diameter
than one quarter (1/4) the thickness of the slab, wall, or beam
in which they are embedded, nor shall they be spaced closer than
three diameters on centre, nor so located as to impair unduly the
strength of the construction. Where installed in columns, the
conduit shall be placed in the centre of the column and then
offset to the outlet box. In no case shall the conduits be placed
so that there is less than 25mm of concrete covering. All conduit
runs in concrete shall be inspected and approved by Structural
Engineer or his representative before concrete is poured. Conduit
shall not be embedded in floating concrete slab construction
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
.2
Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete.
.3
Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall.
.4
Where conduits pass through waterproof membrane provide
oversized sleeve before membrane is installed. Use cold mastic
between sleeve and conduit.
.5
Organize conduits in slab to minimize cross-overs.
3.5
Conduits Underground
.1
Slope conduits to provide drainage.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.3
Cabletroughs
Section 16114
.4
Fastenings and Support
Section 16191
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Conductors in Conduit:
.1
Type: RW90
.2
Conductors:
.1
Solid Copper #10 AWG and smaller.
.2
Stranded Copper #8 AWG and larger.
.3
Sized as indicated (Minimum # 12 AWG).
.3
Insulation: cross link polyethylene (RW90), (RWU90), 90
deg. C.
.4
Configuration: Single conductor.
.5
Voltage Rating: Minimum 600V.
.6
Certification: CSA C22.22 No. 38 or latest revision.
.2
Armored Cable (BX):
.1
Type: AC90
.2
Conductors:
.1
Solid Copper #10 AWG and smaller.
.2
Stranded Copper #8 AWG and larger.
.3
Sized as indicated (Minimum # 12 AWG).
.3
Insulation: cross link polyethylene (XLPE), 90 deg. C.
.4
Configuration: Multi-conductor, as required, c/w a separate
bare CU ground wire.
.5
Voltage Rating: Minimum 600V
.6
Certification: CSA C22.22 No. 51 or latest revision.
.3
Armored Cable (TECK):
.1
Type: TECK
.2
Conductors:
.1
Solid Copper #10 AWG and smaller.
.2
Stranded Copper #8 AWG and larger.
.3
Sized as indicated (Minimum # 12 AWG).
.3
Insulation: cross link polyethylene (RW90), 90 deg. C.
.4
Configuration: Multi-conductor, as required, c/w a separate
bare CU ground wire.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
Page 2
.5
Colour Code: Black, red, blue and white in 4/C cable.
Cables of more than 4/C to be number coded.
.6
Voltage Rating: 1KV, 5KV, or 15KV as indicated.
.7
Inner Jacket:
.1
Black polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
.2
Low Flame Spread (LFS)
.3
Low Gas Emission (LGE)
.8
Armor: Inter-locked aluminum
.9
Outer Jacket:
.1
Black polyvinyl chloride (PVC), -40 deg. C
.2
Low Flame Spread (LFS)
.3
Low Gas Emission (LGE)
.10 Flame Rating: FT4
.11 Certification: CSA C22.22 No. 131 or latest revision.
.4
Electronic Cables:
.1
Conductors:
.1
Minimum #18 AWG - STC Solid Copper
.2
Insulation: polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
.3
Configuration: twisted pairs (No. as indicated)
.4
Shielding: Copper braid
.5
Voltage Rating: 300V
.6
Certification: CSA
.7
Suitable for use with VFD and DDC controller.
.8
Ground the shield as per equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
.5
Fire Alarm Cable:
.1
Conductor: Solid Copper minimum #18 AWG
.2
Insulation: 105 deg. C Flame retardent PVC
.3
Configuration: Multi-conductor, (minimum 4 conductors per
cable).
.4
Voltage Rating: 300V
.5
Conductor Identification: Colour coded
.6
Shielding: Aluminum mylar foil
.7
Outer Jacket: 105 deg. C red PVC jacket
.8
Certification: CSA Class #5851-01 File #LR41741
.9
Flame Rating: FT4
.10 Refer to Fire Alarm section for wiring to suit addressable
fire alarm systems.
.6
Low Voltage Control Cables:
.1
Type: LVT
.2
Conductor: Solid Copper #18 AWG
.3
Insulation: Thermoplastic, colour coded
.4
Configuration: single, two conductor - parallel, three or
more conductors twisted
.5
Voltage Rating: 30V
.6
Outer Jacket: thermoplastic
.7
Certification: CSA C22.22 No. 35
.8
Flame Rating: FT4
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
Page 3
.7
Mineral Insulated Cables:
.1
Type: M.I., two hour fire rated.
.2
Conductors:
.1
Solid Copper Sized as indicated
.3
Insulation: magnesium oxide
.4
Configuration: Single, two, three or four conductor as
indicated.
.5
Voltage Rating: 600V
.6
Outer Jacket: copper
.7
Acceptable manufacturers: Pyrotenax (BICC Cables).
.8
Pressure type connectors, fixture type splicing connectors,
cable clamps and lugs as required.
.9
RA90
.1
.2
.3
.4
.10
Variable Frequency Drive Power Cables
.1
For input power wiring to the VFD and for output wiring to
the motor, from the VFD.
.2
Use cable specifically designed for Variable Frequency
Drives.
.1
Teck Drive RX cable as manufactured by Alcatel.
.2
PVC jacket rated at FT4.
.3
Continuous corrugated impervious aluminum shield.
.4
CSA approved to standard C22.2 No. 123-96.
.5
Teck Drive RX cables are to be installed in connectors
specifically made for use with the Drive RX cables.
.6
Terminate the Drive RX cable grounds as per the cable
manufacturer's instructions, using ground bushings as
directed. The ground connections are to be made at the
ground points indicated by the VFD manufacturer. Coordinate
with Division 15.
.7
Installed as per manufacturer's instructions.
Cables
Single conductor RW90 insulation, minimum 600V, -40°C
Stranded copper, size as indicated.
Liquid and vapour tight corrugated aluminum sheath.
Overall PVC jacket rated FT-4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1
To Minimize Voltage Drop
.1
There shall be no joints in branch circuits feeding patient
care receptacles.
.2
All branch circuits feeding patient care receptacles shall
be minimum #10 AWG.
.3
All branch circuits feeding patient care receptacles shall
be minimum #8 AWG for all circuits longer than 60 feet.
.4
All non-patient care branch circuits including lighting
circuits shall be minimum #10 AWG for all circuits longer than 21
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
Page 4
metres and shall be minimum #8 for all circuits longer than 35
metres.
.5
All branch circuit wiring and conduit shall be installed to
minimize voltage drop. Install additional conduit runs as
required to take the most direct and shortest route to outlets,
light fixtures, etc.
3.2
Installation in Raceways
.1
3.3
Install wiring as follows:
.1
In conduit systems in accordance with Section 16111.
.2
In underground ducts in accordance with Section 16106.
.3
In wireways and auxiliary gutters in accordance with
Section 16116.
.4
Ensure conduits are dry and free of debris before pulling
cables.
.5
Colour coding and identification as per this section.
.6
Wires in outlet, junction and switch boxes, not having a
connection within box shall not be spliced, but shall continue
unbroken through the box.
.7
Branch circuits exceeding 21 metres shall be #10 AWG,
branch circuits exceeding 35 metres shall be #8 AWG.
Installation of Single Conductor Cables
.1
Single conductor cables shall be installed one cable diam. apart
on suspended cable tray or channel supports and shall be clamped
with aluminum cable clamps. Cables shall be terminated using
non-magnetic connectors. Cable armor shall be grounded via an
aluminum plate at the supply end and isolated via an insulating
plate, at the load end of the cable. A #3/0 AWG bare (unless
otherwise noted) copper ground wire shall be installed with each
feeder. Cable bending radius shall be at least twelve times the
overall cable diam. and bends shall not damage or distort the
outer sheath.
.2
Do not install PVC jacketted cables in circulating air plenums.
.3
Single conductor cables installed underground shall be installed
in the installation configuration outlined in Appendix B of the
Canadian Electrical Code to provide the allowable ampacity
required for the feeder.
3.4
Installation of Flexible Armoured Cable
.1
Type AC90 armoured cable (BX) shall be used for connections from
conduit systems to recessed luminaires in accessible ceilings.
Cable to be of sufficient length to allow the lighting fixture to
be relocated to any location within a 6' (1.8M) radius. Cable
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
Page 5
shall be clamped before entering the lighting fixture and shall
be clipped before entering the conduit system junction box.
3.5
Installation of Mineral - Insulated Cables
.1
3.6
Mineral insulated (MI) wiring shall have a minimum of two hour
fire rating unless otherwise noted. Mineral insulated (MI) cables
shall be as manufactured by (Pyrotenax) (BICC Cables).
.1
Refer to drawings and specifications for MI power feeders.
All testing is to be done after cables are bent and formed within
panelboards but before the cables are terminated on breakers or
lugs. All insulation resistance values to be 50 megohms or more.
Any cables with values less than 50 megohms are to be
re-terminated and re-tested. At completion of all testing and
verification, submit a final report to the Contract
Administrator. The report is to include test results for each
cable, confirmation that all cables and terminations have been
installed according to manufacturer's installation instructions
and confirmation that there are no outstanding deficiencies in
the installation.
.2
Division 16 shall arrange for and shall pay all necessary
charges for Pyrotenax to provide the testing services and to
verify all terminations have been done correctly. Division 16
shall provide sufficient advance notice to Pyrotenax to allow
them to be present at the required time to provide training prior
to start of cable installation and to perform testing.
.3
All mineral insulated (MI) cables shall be spaced and
installed to manufacturers recommendations. Continuous lengths of
M.I. cable without joints shall be used. Mineral insulated cable
shall be clipped on minimum 1m centres. All cables shall be
terminated with the self threading sealing end pot inside the
brass gland body. In no case shall the copper sheath and sealing
end pot extend beyond the brass gland body. Complete installation
to meet all Code requirements and manufacturer's recommendations
necessary for a two hour rating. All forming/bending of M.I.
cable shall be done by manufacturer's recommended method.
.4
All Pyrotenax cable terminations shall be tested and
verified. Each and every termination is to be tested immediately
on completion of terminations and test results turned over to
Contract Administrator immediately.
.5
Lugs for M.I. cable shall be CSA approved for M.I. cable.
Where CSA approved lugs are not available for M.I. cable,
Pyrotenax "Quick Terminating Kits" shall be used.
.6
Type "P" cable clamps shall not be used to secure M.I.
cable. Use approved two piece strut clamps.
Installation in Equipment
.1
Group and lace-in neatly wire and cable installed in
switchboards, panelboards, cabinets, wireways and other such
enclosures.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
3.7
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
Page 6
Terminations
.1
3.8
Terminate wires and cables with appropriate connectors in an
approved manner.
Identification
.1
Wire in conduit #2 AWG and smaller shall have solid coloured
insulation, color coded as listed below.
.2
Wire in conduit 1/0 AWG and larger and single conductor cables
for normal power feeders shall be identified at each outlet box
and termination with a 150 mm band of coloured vinyl tape of the
appropriate colour. Emergency power feeders shall be provided
with an additional 75 mm band of red vinyl tape installed
adjacent to the 150 mm band of the coloured phase identification
tape, as listed below. Neutral and ground conductors shall be
identified. Paint or other means of colouring the insulation
shall not be used.
.3
Color code wire in conduit and single conductor cables as
follows:
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Ground
-
red
black
blue
white
green
.4
Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout project.
.5
Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched
throughout system.
.6
Identify control conductors in motor control equipment,
contactors, fire alarm panels, etc. with mylar/cloth wire
markers.
.7
Refer to 16010 for additional requirements.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Splitters, Junction,
Pull Boxes, Cabinets
and CSTE's
Section 16131
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.3
Fastenings & Supports
Section 16191
1.2
Location
.1
Locate splitters, junction and pull boxes as indicated or as
needed for each system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Splitters
.1
Sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover
suitable for locking in closed position. Sprinklerproof
.2
Main and branch lugs to match required size and number of
incoming and outgoing conductors as indicated.
.3
Minimum three spare terminals on each set of lugs in splitters.
.4
Explosion proof in hazardous areas to suit the hazardous
classification.
.5
Weatherproof where installed outdoors.
.6
Enclosures in other areas to suit environment.
2.2
Junction and Pull Boxes
.1
Welded steel construction with screw-on flat covers for surface
mounting.
.2
Covers with 25 mm minimum extension all around, for
flush-mounted pull and junction boxes.
.3
Cast type with gasketted covers where exposed to weather.
.4
Explosion proof in hazardous areas to suit the hazardous
classification.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.3
Splitters, Junction,
Pull Boxes, Cabinets
and CSTE's
Section 16131
Page 2
Cabinets
.1
Type E: sheet steel, hinged door and return flange overlapping
sides, handle, lock and catch, for surface mounting.
.2
Type T: sheet steel cabinet, with hinged door, latch, lock, 2
keys, containing 19 mm G1S fir plywood backboard. Cabinets to be
flush or surface mounted as indicated.
.3
Provide other systems cabinets as specified and located on
drawings.
2.4
CUSTOMER SERVICE TERMINATION ENCLOSURE
.1
Refer to Single Line Distribution Schematic for Amperage,
Voltage & KAIC ratings.
.2
Enclosure shall be CSA 3R rated, padmount design, free standing.
.3
Single or double outer doors with 3 point latching and
padlocking provision.
.4
Service entrance approved by Manitoba Hydro.
.5
Service entrance approved including individual sub breakers.
Refer to single line distribution schematic if required.
.6
Dead front construction c/w Integral barriers.
.7
Continuous 13 x 25mm ground bus.
.8
Stepped bus assembly of tin-plated aluminum.
.9
Constructed from 12 Ga. minimum steel, welded IAW CWB 47.1
Standards.
.10
Paint finish shall be 2 coats of outdoor UV and rust resistant
Urethane over zinc based rust inhibitive primer. Color to be ASA
#61 gray.
.11
Lug provisions for line and load conductors. Coordinate with the
contractor & utility for all lug sizes. Minimum provisions are
2 - 2 hole NEMA studs for line conductors. Lug provisions for
load conductors. (min. of 8 - 350MCM per phase & neutral)
.12
Complete provision to bolt in utility current and potential
transformers. Bus shall be suitable to accept current transformer
upgrade provisions.
.13
Stepped bus assembly c/w current transformer upgrade provisions.
.14
Provide remote metering cabinet on side of CSTE when indicated.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Splitters, Junction,
Pull Boxes, Cabinets
and CSTE's
Section 16131
Page 3
.15
Submit shop drawing to utility for approval prior to Contract
Administrator review.
.16
Cantruss wire support channel for line/load conductors
.17
Quality assurance standard - ISO9001/94
.18
Acceptable manufacturer - J R Stephenson Mfg. Ltd
.19
Acceptable manufacturer - J R Stephenson Mfg. Ltd
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Splitter Installation
.1
Install splitters and mount plumb, true and square to the
building lines.
.2
Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except
where indicated otherwise.
3.2
Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets Installation
.1
Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
.2
Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m above finished
floor.
.3
Install terminal block as indicated.
.4
Install pull boxes so as not to exceed 30 m of conduit run
between pull boxes.
.5
Install junction and pull boxes clear of all mechanical ductwork
and piping.
3.3
Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section
16010 - Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Identify splitters with size 7 nameplates.
.3
Identify junction and pull boxes with size 3 nameplates.
.4
Identify cabinets with size 5 nameplates.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
3.4
Splitters, Junction,
Pull Boxes, Cabinets
and CSTE's
Section 16131
Page 4
CUSTOMER SERVICE TERMINATION ENCLOSURE
.1
Mount on suitably sized concrete pad.
.2
Coordinate sleeving with Utility.
.3
Coordinate exact location and placement with Utility.
.4
Coordinate metering requirements with Utility.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Outlet Boxes,
Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Outlet and Conduit Boxes General
.1
Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.
.2
Sectional boxes shall not be used without specific approval of
the Contract Administrator.
.3
Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.
.4
Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.
.5
347 V outlet boxes for 347 V switching devices c/w holes on
centres to reject all other switches.
.6
Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one
system are grouped.
.7
In finished areas switch, convenience receptacle, voice/data and
blank cover plates shall be stainless steel. In finished area
ceilings, junction and pull box covers shall be solid covers,
painted to match the finish of the adjacent surface.
.8
In moist or dusty areas, gasketted watertight or dust tight
boxes and covers shall be provided.
.9
Explosion proof in hazardous areas to suit requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2
Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes
.1
Electro-galvanized steel device boxes for flush installation,
minimum size 102 mm square outlet boxes with extension and
plaster rings as required.
.2
Electro-galvanized steel device boxes for flush installation in
drywall and minimum size 102mm square outlet boxes with extension
and square cornered tile covers as required.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Outlet Boxes,
Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
Page 2
.3
Electro-galvanized steel utility boxes for outlets connected to
surface-mounted EMT conduit, sized as required for the
installation.
.4
102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture
outlets.
2.3
Masonry Boxes
.1
2.4
Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for
devices flush mounted in exposed block walls.
Concrete Boxes
.1
2.5
Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush
mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as
required.
Floor Boxes
.1
2.6
Concrete tight electro-galvanized sheet steel floor boxes with
gasket, floor plate, levelling screws and adjustable finishing
rings to suit floor finish with brass faceplate. Device mounting
plate to accommodate short or long ear duplex receptacles.
Conduit Boxes
.1
2.7
Cast FS or FD feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs and
mounting feet for surface wiring of switches and receptacle where
exposed to moisture.
Moulded Vapour Barrier Boxes
.1
2.8
Moulded box vapour barrier: factory moulded polyethylene box c/w
flange for use with recessed electric switch and outlet boxes.
Fittings - General
.1
Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.
.2
Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.
.3
Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 32 mm and pull boxes for
larger conduits.
.4
Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.9
Outlet Boxes,
Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
Page 3
Service Fittings
.1
Pedestal type 'high tension' receptacle fitting, 5" square low
profile, 2 piece; steel frame with black plastic housing for two
duplex receptacles. Bottom plate with knockout and BX connector
for centered installation.
.2
Pedestal type 'low tension' fitting 5" square low profile, 2
piece steel frame with black plastic housing to accommodate two
amphenol jack connectors. Bottom plate with slot for conduit
entry.
.3
Pedestal type 'Combination Telephone/Receptacle Fitting 5" x
10", low profile, 2 piece; steel barriered frame with black
plastic housing to accommodate two duplex receptacles and two
amphenol jack connectors. Bottom plate with BX connector in power
section and slot for conduit entry in telephone section.
.4
Raised floor outlet boxes - Wiremould #AC10105-2 c/w all
necessary outlets, faceplates and accessories. Carpet or tile
flange as per Architectural.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.
.2
Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved
material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove
upon completion of Work.
.3
For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall
using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of
opening.
.4
Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral
insulated and armoured cable connections. Reducing washers are
not allowed.
.5
Maintain continuity of vapor barrier where boxes are installed
in exterior walls and ceilings. Use air/vapor barrier boxes for
outlets installed in walls or ceilings with a vapor barrier.
.6
Boxes to be mounted plumb and square with building lines.
.7
Where outlet boxes are shown on the drawings as being
"back-to-back" shall have a minimum offset of 200 mm (8") between
boxes to reduce sound transmission. In no case shall "thru-wall"
boxes be used.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Outlet Boxes,
Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
Page 4
.8
Install pull boxes, or fittings, in conduit runs where more than
four bends are necessary.
.9
Install pull boxes where run exceeds 23.0 (75 feet) in length.
.10
All junction, outlets and pull boxes shall be so installed that
they are always readily accessible.
.11
No power driven pins (Ramset) shall be utilized to secure boxes
without specific approval from Contract Administrator.
.12
Check opening provided for each recessed outlet box and if it is
not completely covered by cover plate, report discrepancy to the
division responsible and ensure that it is rectified.
.13
All concealed junction boxes, conduit fittings, etc. to be c/w
galv. steel covers, secured with two bolts.
.14
Co-ordinate boxes in masonry with brick or block configuration,
boxes to be saw cut in bottom of appropriate brick or block. They
shall be of sufficient depth to allow conduit to pass through
center of block.
.15
Co-ordinate locations with millwork.
.16
Apply acoustic sealant to and seal wires penetrating moulded
vapour barrier boxes.
.17
Verify exact location of floor boxes with Contract
Administrator. Adjust floor boxes level with finished floor.
.18
Verify exact location of service fittings with furniture
drawings and/or Contract Administrator. Service fittings to be
installed parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
.19
No more than two extension rings shall be used in sequence.
.20
For installations in hazardous areas, meet all requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
.21
Locate raised floor outlet boxes in coordination with the City
of Winnipeg's furniture. Coordinate as required.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Wiring Devices
Section 16141
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
1.2
Submittals
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section
16010.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Switches
.1
Toggle operated general purpose AC Switches 15A and 20A 120Vac
and 347Vac single pole, double pole, three-way and four-way
switches as indicated, with the following features:
.1
Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire.
.2
Silver alloy contacts.
.3
Urea molding.
.4
Suitable for back and side wiring.
.5
Brown toggle for normal power; red toggle for emergency
power.
.6
Fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps,
and up to 80% of rated capacity of motor loads.
.2
Switches of one manufacturer throughout project.
.3
Switches to be premium specification grade.
.4
Acceptable manufacturers:
Manufacturer
Hubbell
Bryant
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
Smith & Stone
Slater
120 Volt
1200
4800
1200
AG-1
4-4800
710
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.2
Wiring Devices
Section 16141
Page 2
Receptacles
.1
Duplex receptacles, CSA type 5-15 R, 125 Vac, 15 A, U ground,
with following features:
.1
Nylon face, brown or ivory for normal power, red for
emergency power.
.2
Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring.
.3
Break-off links for use as split receptacles.
.4
Double wipe contacts and rivetted grounding contacts.
.2
Single receptacles CSA type 5-15 R, 125 VAC, 15 A, U ground with
following features:
.1
Nylon face, brown or ivory for normal power, red for
emergency power.
.2
Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring.
.3
Receptacles to be orange face isolated ground type where
indicated. Provide a separate insulated ground wire and a
separate neutral for each isolated ground circuit.
.4
Receptacles of one manufacturer throughout project.
.5
Acceptable manufacturers: Hubbell, Arrow Hart, Bryant, Pass &
Seymour, Slater. Catalogue No. 5262 for all manufacturers.
.6
Acceptable manufacturers for ground fault receptacles shall be:
.1
Arrow Hart - GF 5242
.2
Bryant - GFR 52FT
.3
Hubbell - GF 5252
.4
Pass & Seymour - 1591-R
.7
Duplex safety receptacles in public waiting areas and public
lounges shall be Hubbell #SG-62.
.8
Receptacles to be grey face type for all circuits connected to
UPS circuits.
2.3
Special Wiring Devices
.1
Special wiring devices: as indicated on drawings.
.2
Pushbutton stations to be flush or surface mounted as required.
Units to be complete with up/down or start/stop buttons, as
required, and green pilot light.
.3
Range outlets to be NEMA #14-50, 125/250V, 50 Amp., black, c/w
cordset.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.4
Wiring Devices
Section 16141
Page 3
Incandescent Lighting Dimmer Controls
.1
Dimmer control devices to have a calibrated linear slide control
lever from 0% to 100%. A separate ON/OFF switch or the bottom
position of slider to have a positive OFF switch to turn off
current flow to lamps.
.2
Dimmers shall be rated at 1500, 1000 or 600 watts as required by
connected load plus 20% spare capacity.
.3
Colour of dimmer snap-on cover to be as selected by the
Contract Administrator or as indicated on the drawings.
.4
Provide a separate neutral wire for each dimmer circuit.
.5
Approved Manufacturers
.1
Lutron Nova NT-1 Series
.2
Leviton Monet MN-IL Series
2.5
Fluorescent Lighting Dimmer Controls
.1
Dimmer control devices to have a calibrated linear slide control
lever from 5% to 100%. A separate ON/OFF switch or the bottom
position of slider to have a positive OFF switch to turn off
current flow to lamps.
.2
Colour of dimmer snap-on cover to be as selected by the
Contract Administrator or as indicated on the drawings.
.3
Provide a separate neutral wire for each dimmer circuit.
.4
Approved ballasts: Lutron; Advance Mark X; Philips Ecotron
.5
Approved Manufacturers:
.1
Lutron Nova NTF-10 series rated at 16 Amps.
.2
Leviton Monet MNX-IL Series.
2.6
Cover Plates
.1
Cover plates from one manufacturer throughout project.
.2
Stainless steel cover plates for wiring devices mounted in
flush-mounted outlet boxes to be minimum plate thickness of
1.0mm.
.3
Sheet steel utility box cover for wiring devices installed in
surface-mounted utility boxes.
.4
Cast gasketted cover plates for wiring devices mounted in
surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Wiring Devices
Section 16141
Page 4
.5
Weatherproof double lift spring-loaded cast aluminum cover
plates, complete with gaskets for duplex receptacles as
indicated.
.6
Weatherproof cover plates complete with gaskets for single
receptacles or switches as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Switches:
.1
Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position
when switch closed.
.2
Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one
switch is required in one location.
.3
Mount toggle switches at height specified in Section 16010
or as indicated.
.4
Where pilot lights are required, or shown on the drawings,
install flush neon pilots in outlet box grouped with associated
switch.
.5
Study the Architectural plans and co-operate with other
trades so that the location and elevation of switch outlets shall
not necessitate any unnecessary cutting of dadoes, tile,
fitments, etc. If this is not done, this Contractor will be
required to move these outlets at no additional cost to the
Contract. Properly locate all switches with reference to door
swing, regardless of indicated position or doorswing shown on
electrical drawings.
.6
Where finished construction of walls consist of a
symmetrical pattern of finish materials, install wall switches
where directed by the Contract Administrator.
.7
Light switches in Kindergarten and Nursery Rooms shall be
MTD at .9 (3'-0") above finished floor on the strike side of the
door.
.8
Switches shall be mounted 1.4m (4'-6") above finished floor
on the strike side of the door.
.2
Receptacles:
.1
Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than
one receptacle is required in one location.
.2
Mount receptacles horizontally at height specified in
Section 16010 or as indicated.
.3
Install cordsets on ranges and dryers.
.4
Where switch and convenience outlets are shown close to one
another, mount receptacles below and in line with the switch.
.5
Where finished construction of walls consist of a
symmetrical pattern of wood or other panels, install and locate
receptacles and switches as directed to suit the pattern.
.6
Suitably ground all receptacles with #12 green insulated
wire to outlet box.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Wiring Devices
Section 16141
Page 5
.7
Flush floor mounted duplex receptacle to be as specified
but mounted in Thomas & Betts flush floor box complete with
gaskets, floor plate, levelling screws and plate assembly.
.3
3.2
Coverplates:
.1
Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices
are ganged.
.2
Do not use cover plates intended for flush outlet boxes on
surface-mounted boxes.
.3
Provide a coverplate on each outlet.
Identification
.1
Identify receptacles with size 1 nameplate indicating panel and
circuit number. Nameplates to be mechanically fastened. Refer to
Section 16010.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Wire and Box
Connectors
- 0-1000 V
Section 16151
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
References
.1
CSA C22.2No.65-1956(R1965) Wire Connectors.
.2
EEMAC 1Y-2, 1961 Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters
(1200 Ampere Maximum Rating).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Pressure type wire connectors: with current carrying parts of
copper sized to fit copper conductors as required.
.2
Fixture type splicing connectors: with current carrying parts of
copper sized to fit copper conductors 10 AWG or less.
.3
Clamps or connectors for armoured cable, aluminum sheathed
cable, mineral insulated cable, flexible conduit, non-metallic
sheathed cable as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and:
.1
Install pressure type wire connectors and tighten.
.2
Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten
screws with appropriate compression tool recommended by
manufacturer. Installation shall meet secureness tests in
accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.
.3
Install fixture type connectors and tighten. Replace
insulating cap.
.4
Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC
1Y-2.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fastenings
and Supports
Section 16191
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Basic Products/Workmanship
Section 01600
.2
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.3
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.4
Cabletroughs
Section 16114
.5
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
Support Channels
.1
U shape, size 41 x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted,
suspended or set in poured concrete walls and ceilings or as
required.
.1
Manufacturers: B-Line, Burndy, Electrovert, Unistrut,
Pilgrim, Pursley.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Secure equipment to solid masonry, tile and plaster surfaces
with lead anchors.
.2
Secure equipment to poured concrete with cast in or expandable
inserts.
.3
Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings
with toggle bolts.
.4
Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to
inverted T bar ceilings. Ensure that T bars are adequately
supported to carry weight of equipment specified before
installation. Provide additional support as required.
.5
Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded
bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel
members.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fastenings
and Supports
Section 16191
Page 2
.6
Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or
support system using straps.
.1
One-hole malleable iron straps to secure surface conduits
and cables 50 mm and smaller.
.2
Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than
50 mm.
.3
Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel Work.
.7
Suspended support systems.
.1
Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm dia
threaded rods and spring clips.
.2
Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported
by 6 mm dia threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to
building construction is impractical.
.8
For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at
1500 mm oc spacing.
.9
Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related
types of support structures where indicated or as required to
support conduit and cable runs.
.10
Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped
vertically to equipment where there is no wall support.
.11
Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure
raceways or cables.
.12
Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for
conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade
and approval of Contract Administrator.
.13
Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of
equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with
manufacturer's installation recommendations.
.14
Threaded rod to be minimum 6 mm diam. galv. or nickel plated.
Black steel rod is not acceptable.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Mechanical Equipment
Connections
Section 16192
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Mechanical Specifications
Division 15000
.2
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.3
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.4
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
.5
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
.6
Disconnect Switches - Fused and
Non-Fused up to 1000V
Section 16440
.7
Motor Starters to 600V
Section 16811
1.2
System Description
.1
Provide complete electrical power and control connections for
mechanical equipment, except as noted herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Include motor starters, disconnects, conduit, wire, fittings,
interlocks, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all associated
equipment required to provide power wiring for mechanical
equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Include pushbutton stations, motor protective switches,
interlocks, conduit, wire, devices and fittings required to
provide control wiring for mechanical equipment except for
temperature/humidity control systems.
.3
Unless otherwise noted, motors and control devices shall be
supplied by Div. 15. Motor horsepower ratings shall be as shown
in the Div. 15 specifications. Motor voltage and phase ratings
shall be as shown on the Div. 16 drawings.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.2
Mechanical Equipment
Connections
Section 16192
Page 2
Exterior Equipment
.1
All equipment mounted on the exterior of the building shall be
weatherproof.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Power Wiring
.1
Install power feeders, starters, disconnects and associated
equipment and make connections to all mechanical equipment.
.2
Install branch circuit wiring for mechanical systems control
panels, time clocks and control transformers. Control panels for
equipment on emergency power to be connected to emergency branch
circuits.
.3
Install main power feeders to starter/control panels furnished
by Div. 15. Install branch circuit wiring for motors, electric
coils, etc.
3.2
Controls
.1
Install all electrical controls except controls supplied under
Division 15, unless otherwise noted herein. Controls which have
both electrical and mechanical connections shall be installed by
the trade supplying the control.
.2
Wire and connect remote thermostats, control panels, P/E
switches, etc. for furnaces, condensing units, force flows,
gas-fired unit heaters, electric heaters and rooftop HVAC units.
Interlock rooftop units to condensing units as required.
.3
Wire and connect float switches, pressure switches, alternators,
alarms, etc. for sump pumps, sewage pumps, domestic hot water
recirculating pumps, booster pumps, jockey pumps and compressors.
.4
Wire and connect control transformers, sensors, solenoids for
auto-flush urinals, electronic faucets and wash basins.
.5
Install, wire and connect controls which are an integral part of
any packaged unit and are supplied by the trade supplying the
packaged unit. Include wiring for controls for such items as
roof-top air handling units, boilers, etc.
.6
Section 15900 shall supply and install all conduit, wire,
devices and fittings required to wire and connect control systems
specified in 15900. Control wiring shall be installed in conduit.
.7
Wire and connect electrical interlocks for starters supplied by
Div. 16.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Mechanical Equipment
Connections
Section 16192
Page 3
.8
Wire and connect hi-limit cutouts for remotely mounted electric
heating coils provided by Div. 15.
.9
Wire and connect thermistor control devices, built-in to large
motors, to motor starters as per wiring diagrams provided by Div.
15.
3.3
Fire Protection (Sprinkler and Standpipe)
.1
Wire and connect the flow, pressure and tamper switches,
installed on the sprinkler and standpipe systems, to separate
zones in the fire alarm control panel, as indicated. Refer to
sprinkler shop drawings for the exact location of these switches.
.2
Wire and connect fire pump controller supervisory signals to
fire alarm control panel.
.3
Provide an E.O.L.R. for each zone where required and locate
adjacent to monitored device.
3.4
Coordination
.1
Refer to mechanical drawings for the exact location of motor
control devices, and other mechanical equipment requiring an
electrical connection.
.2
Obtain full information from Div. 15, regarding wiring,
controls, overload heaters, equipment ratings and overcurrent
protection. Notify the Div. 15 subcontractor, at once, if any
information provided is incorrect or unsatisfactory.
.3
Coordinate control wiring requirements with Div. 15 and provide
all control wiring and connections as required to make the
control systems operate as specified.
.4
Refer to Div. 15 specifications for any further electrical
requirements.
3.5
Shop Drawing Review
.1
Review Div. 15 equipment shop drawings and adjust breaker/feeder
sizes as required.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Miscellaneous
Apparatus and
Appliances
Section 16193
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Mechanical Specifications
Section 15000
.2
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.3
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.4
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
.5
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
.6
Wiring Devices
Section 16141
.7
Disconnect Switches - Fused
and Non-Fused up to 1000V
Section 16440
1.2
System Description
.1
Make all required electrical connections to devices, equipment,
appliances, etc. furnished by other trades or the City of
Winnipeg, as indicated or implied on the drawings or in the
specifications.
.2
Provide and install miscellaneous electrical components where
required.
1.3
Coordination
.1
Verify electrical supply characteristics of all equipment prior
to rough-in. Report any discrepancies immediately. Revise wire
sizing, device type, connection type, breaker size, etc., as
required, to accommodate the electrical supply characteristics of
the equipment supplied by other trades.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Miscellaneous
Apparatus and
Appliances
Section 16193
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
Provide all required electrical devices, components, conduits,
fittings, wiring, disconnects, and miscellaneous equipment to
make all connections to equipment.
.2
Be familiar with the apparatus being supplied and carefully
coordinate and cooperate with the supplier/installer to ensure a
proper and complete installation.
2.2
Receptacles
.1
2.3
Where equipment has line cord and plug, ensure cap is compatible
with receptacle. Provide cordsets to equipment where required.
Pushbutton/Buzzers
.1
Provide weatherproof pushbuttons where shown.
.2
Provide buzzers where shown.
.3
Provide 120/24V AC transformer where required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Equipment Supplied By Other Trades
.1
Wire and connect all equipment requiring an electrical
connection. Install disconnect switches where required.
.2
Provide a direct connection or receptacle and cord set to suit
hook-up requirements of each piece of equipment. Confirm
connection method with Contract Administrator.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Work in Existing
Building
Section 16195
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.3
Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes
and Cabinets
Section 16131
.4
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
.5
Wiring Devices
Section 16141
.6
Fastenings and Supports
Section 16191
1.2
Coordination
.1
The building shall remain open and in normal operation during
the construction period.
.2
Where existing services such as electrical power, fire alarm
system, sound system, etc. are required to be disrupted and/or
shut down, coordinate the shut-downs with the City of Winnipeg
and carry out the Work at a time and in a manner acceptable to
them. Carefully schedule all disruption and/or shut-downs and
ensure that the duration of same is kept to the absolute minimum.
Submit for approval a written, concise schedule of each
disruption at least 120 hours in advance of performing Work and
obtain the City of Winnipeg's written consent prior to
implementing.
.3
Should any temporary connections be required to maintain
services during Work in the existing building, supply and install
all necessary material and equipment and provide all labour at no
extra cost. Should any existing system be damaged, make full
repairs without extra cost, and to the satisfaction of the City
of Winnipeg and Contract Administrator.
.4
If existing equipment shown on drawings is defective it shall be
brought to the Contract Administrator and the City of Winnipeg's
attention prior to Work completion.
.5
Refer to General Conditions for phasing and staging of Work and
adhere to that schedule. Comply with instructions regarding
working hours necessary to maintain the building in operation.
.6
Coordinate complete installation of relocated utility services,
if required, with Utilities to ensure minimum interruption of
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Work in Existing
Building
Section 16195
Page 2
service. Coordinate the transfer of the existing hydro service
point to the new service point with the Hydro utility in order to
keep power interruptions to a minimum.
1.3
Existing Devices in New Construction
.1
Where existing devices (receptacles, switches, etc.) presently
mounted on a wall which will be covered with a new finish,
provide an extension ring, coverplate, etc. or relocate as
required to mount the device to the new wall.
.2
Where existing conduits pass vertically through a floor area,
relocate those conduits to be installed concealed in a new wall
or surface mounted in a service area. Extend conduit, wiring,
etc. as required.
.3
Existing junction boxes in walls and ceiling spaces required to
maintain existing circuits shall remain accessible.
.4
Where services are concealed within walls, floors or ceilings
and cannot be visually identified, Contractor shall provide
electronic scanning devices or other approved means to locate and
identify concealed services prior to drilling.
1.4
Schedule of Work
.1
Carefully note and refer to the Contract Administrator's general
schedule of Work and include for all requirements to conform to
it.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Provide all materials required for the complete interface and
reconnection installation as herein described and as indicated on
the drawings.
.2
New fire alarm devices, speakers, starters, panelboards, etc.
required to be tied in to existing systems shall match the
existing devices.
.3
New wiring required to interconnect new devices to existing
systems shall be provided to suit the manufacturers requirements
and instructions.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Work in Existing
Building
Section 16195
Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install boxes, conduit and wiring through existing areas as
required for the new installation.
.2
Add modules, switches, etc. in existing control panels, as
required, to extend existing systems to new or renovated areas.
.3
Patch and repair walls and ceilings in existing areas that have
been damaged or cut open due to the new electrical installation.
.4
Where new cables or conduits have been installed through
existing fire rated walls, seal opening around cables and conduit
to maintain fire rating.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Service Entrance
Board
Section 16421
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Section 16477
1.2
Description of Equipment
.1
1.3
Main distribution board incorporates service entrance cable
connection section, main breaker c/w built-in ground fault,
utility metering transformer compartment, sub-feeder distribution
section and customer metering section, factory assembled in one
enclosure.
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section
16010.
.2
Indicate on shop drawings.
.1
Floor anchoring method and foundation template.
.2
Dimensioned cable entry and exit locations.
.3
Dimensioned position and size of bus.
.4
Overall length, height and depth.
.5
Dimensioned layout of internal and front panel mounted
components.
.6
Shipping sections and weights.
.7
Circuit breaker details.
.3
Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers and
fuses as required for the coordination study.
1.4
Maintenance Data
.1
1.5
Provide maintenance data for service entrance board for
incorporation into manual specified in Section 16010.
Source Quality Control
.1
Refer to Section 16010.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.6
Service Entrance
Board
Section 16421
Page 2
Storage
.1
1.7
Store switchgear on Site in protected, dry location. Cover with
plastic to keep off dust.
Coordination and Short Circuit Study
.1
Switchboard manufacturer to provide a coordination and short
circuit study as per section 16010 and submit to Contract
Administrator with switchboard shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Service entrance board: to CSA C22.2 No. 31.
.2
Moulded case circuit breakers: to CSA C22.2 No.5.
.3
Fuse holder assemblies: to CSA C22.2 No. 39.
.4
HRC Fuses: to CSA C22.2 No. 106.
.5
Meters: to CSA C17.
.6
Meter mounting devices: to CSA C22.2 No. 115.
.7
Analogue instruments: to ANSI C39.1.
.8
Instrument transformers: to CSA C13.
.9
Aluminum for bus: to CSA HA.5.
2.2
Rating
.1
2.3
Service entrance switchboard rated 347/600V, 3 phase, 4 wire.
grounded neutral, 60 Hz, or 120/208V, 3 phase, 4 wire, grounded
neutral as indicated on drawings. Short circuit current rated at
RMS symmetrical as indicated on the drawings.
Service Entrance Board
.1
Rating: Refer to drawings for Ampere rating.
.2
Enclosure:
.1
Wall mounted or free standing, totally enclosed dead front
sheet steel enclosure, indoor CSA enclosure 1 or 2 sprinkler
proof.
.2
Sheet steel barriers to separate adjoining sections.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Service Entrance
Board
Section 16421
Page 3
.3
Provision for installation of supply authority metering
transformers.
.4
Customer metering instruments, transformers and selector
switches as indicated on drawings.
.5
Distribution section.
.6
Hinged access panels with captive knurled thumb screws.
Utility metering section to have provision for utility seals.
.7
High conductivity aluminum bus.
.8
Bus from load terminals of main breaker via metering
sections to main lugs of distribution section.
.9
Identify phases with colour coding.
.10 Sprinkler proof construction to suit local authority having
jurisdiction, which includes hinged door on distribution section.
2.4
Busbars
.1
Three phase and full capacity neutral bare busbars, continuous
current rating as indicated on drawings, self-cooled, extending
full width and height of cubicle suitably supported on
insulators.
.2
Main connections between bus and major switching components to
have continuous current rating to match major switching
components.
.3
Busbars and main connections: 99.30% conductivity aluminum.
.4
Tin plated joints, secured with non-corrosive bolts and
Belleville washers.
.5
Identify phases of busbars by suitable marking.
2.5
Main Breaker Section
.1
2.6
Type C:
.1
The main circuit breaker shall be a manually operable,
fixed mounted, moulded case circuit breaker. Breaker to be c/w a
removable handle, lock-out device, ground fault protection where
required. Refer to the single line distribution schematic for the
breaker size and additional requirements.
Grounding
.1
Copper ground bus not smaller than 50 x 6mm extending full width
of switchboard and located at bottom.
.2
Lugs at each end sized for grounding cables.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.7
Service Entrance
Board
Section 16421
Page 4
Customer Metering Section
.1
Microprocessor based, self-contained, door mounted device
designed to both monitor and display the following electrical
parameters:
.1
AC line current (each phase) +/- 1% accuracy.
.2
AC line to line voltage (all 3) +/- 1% accuracy.
.3
AC line to neutral voltage (all 3) +/- 1% accuracy.
.4
Watts +/- 2% accuracy.
.5
Vars +/- 2% accuracy.
.6
Power factor +/- 4% accuracy.
.7
Peak Demand +/- 2% accuracy.
.8
Frequency +/- 5% accuracy.
.9
Watt hours +/- 2% accuracy.
.2
Voltage may be directly monitored on 3 phase AC lines within a
range of 120 to 600 VAC without external potential transformers.
.3
Current monitoring is through external current transformers.
Current transformers to be dry type for indoor use with following
characteristics:
.1
Nominal voltage class as indicated.
.2
Rated frequency: 60 Hz.
.3
Primary current rated to match ampere rating of main bus.
Secondary rated @ 5 Amps.
.4
Capability to detect user-chosen electrical parameters.
.1
Phase loss
.2
Phase unbalance
.3
Phase reversal
.4
Undervoltage
.5
Overvoltage
2.8
Distribution Section
.1
2.9
The distribution section to consist of a CDP type panelboard
with moulded case circuit breakers and hinged door. Each breaker
shall be manually operated, fixed type with trip ratings as shown
on the drawings. Minimum interrupting rating to be RMS
symmetrical as indicated on the drawings. Breakers feeding
transformers 15 kVA and larger to be c/w fully adjustable LSI
settings. The CDP type panelboard is to meet the requirements of
16426 Secondary Switchgear.
Finishes
.1
Apply finishes in accordance with Section 16010.
.1
Service entrance switchboard to be exterior gray.
.2
Supply 2 spray cans touch-up enamel.
.3
Treated to inhibit rusting.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.10
Service Entrance
Board
Section 16421
Page 5
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section
16010.
.2
Nameplates:
.1
Size 7, to indicate voltage, amp rating and designation.
.2
Complete switchboard: labelled as above.
.3
Main disconnect: labelled "Main Breaker".
.4
Sub-breakers: labelled to indicate panel or equipment fed.
2.11
Shop Fabrication
.1
Assemble and wire complete service entrance board.
.2
Energize switchboard.
.3
Check meters and phase selector switches.
.4
Prepare switchboard for shipment to Site.
2.12
Manufacturers
.1
2.13
Cutler Hammer, Schneider, Square D, Seimens.
Future Energy Management
.1
Provide terminal board and wiring from customer CT's and PT's to
facilitate the future installation of thermal demand, watt hour
energy management equipment, recorders, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Locate service entrance switchboard as indicated and mount
securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surfaces.
.2
Connect service entrance cables to line terminals of
switchboard.
.3
Connect load terminals of distribution breakers to outgoing
feeders as indicated.
.4
Check factory made connections for mechanical security and
electrical continuity.
.5
Run minimum 4/0, bare copper, grounding conductor in 25 mm
conduit from ground bus to main building ground.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Service Entrance
Board
Section 16421
Page 6
.6
Check trip unit settings against coordination study to ensure
proper working and protection of components.
.7
Where floor mounted, arrange for main distribution switchboard
to be mounted on 100mm housekeeping pad.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Secondary Switchgear
(120/208V & 347/600V)
Section 16426
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Section 16477
1.2
Shop Drawings Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section
16010.
.2
Indicate on shop drawings:
.1
Floor or wall anchoring method and foundation template.
.2
Dimensioned cable entry and exit locations.
.3
Dimensioned position and size of bus.
.4
Overall length, height and depth of complete switchgear.
.5
Dimensioned layout of internal and front panel mounted
components.
.3
Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers as
required for the coordination study.
1.3
Maintenance Data
.1
1.4
Provide maintenance data for secondary switchgear for submission
to Contract Administrator and incorporation into manual specified
in Section 16010.
Storage
.1
1.5
Store switchgear on Site in protected, dry location. Cover with
plastic to keep off dust.
Coordination and Short Circuit Study
.1
Switchboard manufacturer to provide a coordination and short
circuit study as per section 16010, and submit to Contract
Administrator with switchboard shop drawings.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Secondary Switchgear
(120/208V & 347/600V)
Section 16426
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Rating
.1
2.2
Secondary switchgear: indoor 347/600V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz or
120/208 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz as indicated on drawings.
Minimum interrupting capacity (rms symmetrical) as indicated on
drawings but in any case no less than 14,000 Amps RMS symmetrical
at 600 Volts and 10,000 Amps RMS symmetrical at 208 Volts.
Amperage rating as indicated on drawings.
Enclosure
.1
Distribution sections to contain:
.1
Molded case circuit breakers sized as indicated.
.2
High conductivity aluminum bus.
.3
Panel covers.
.4
Hinged doors with lock. All locks to be keyed alike.
.2
Blanked off spaces for future units.
.3
Metal enclosed wall or floor mounted, dead front, indoor CSA
Enclosure 1 or 2. Sprinklerproof construction to suit local
authority having jurisdiction, which includes panel cover on
distribution section.
.4
Switchboard to be CDP type.
.5
Access from front.
2.3
Busbars
.1
Three phase and full capacity neutral bare busbars, continuous
current rating as indicated on drawings, self-cooled, extending
full height of cubicle suitably supported on insulators.
.2
Main connections between bus and major switching components to
have continuous current rating to match major switching
components.
.3
Busbars and main connections: 99.30% conductivity aluminum.
.4
Tin plated joints, secured with non-corrosive bolts and
Belleville washers.
.5
Identify phases of busbars by suitable marking.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.4
Section 16426
Page 3
Grounding
.1
Copper ground bus not smaller than 50 x 6 mm extending full
width of switchboard and situated at bottom.
.2
Lugs at each end sized for grounding cables.
2.5
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
.1
2.6
The Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall be manually operable
fixed mounted c/w frame size and trip settings as indicated.
Breakers feeding transformers 45 kVa and larger to be c/w fully
and independently adjustable LSI settings.
Finishes
.1
2.7
Apply finishes in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical
General Requirements.
.1
Cubicle exteriors gray.
.2
Supply 2 spray cans touch-up paint.
.3
Treated to inhibit rusting.
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section
16010 - Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Nameplates:
.1
Provide a size 7 nameplate to indicate voltage, amp rating
and designation.
.2
Sub-breakers: Nameplates to indicate panel or equipment
fed.
2.8
Metering
.1
2.9
Secondary Switchgear
(120/208V & 347/600V)
Provide City of Winnipeg's metering where indicated on drawing.
Metering to be equal to metering provided in main distribution
(16421).
Manufacturers
.1
Cutler Hammer, Schneider, Square D, Siemens.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Secondary Switchgear
(120/208V & 347/600V)
Section 16426
Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Locate switchboard as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true
and square, to adjoining surfaces.
.2
Connect load side of breakers in distribution cubicles to
distribution feeders.
.3
Check factory made connections for mechanical security and
electrical continuity.
.4
Check trip unit settings against co-ordination study to ensure
proper working and protection of components.
.5
Where floor mounted, arrange for switchboard to be mounted on
100mm housekeeping pad.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Instrument
Transformers
Section 16432
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Service Entrance Board
Section 16421
.3
347/600V Main Distribution
Switchboards (Air Ckt Brkrs
(Main & tie) with CDP Dist'n)
Section 16422
347/600V Main Distribution
Switchboard (Air Circuit
Breaker Type)
Section 16423
.4
1.2
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Indicate dimensions and connection details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Potential Transformers
.1
Potential transformers: to CAN3-C13, dry type for indoor use,
with following characteristics:
.1
Nominal voltage class: as indicated.
.2
Rated frequency: 60 Hz.
.3
Basic impulse level: 4 kV.
.4
Voltage ratio: as indicated.
.5
Metering accuracy rating: ± 1%.
.2
Potential transformers fused with separate fuse block. Fuses: as
required.
2.2
Current Transformers
.1
Current transformers: to CAN3-C13, dry type for indoor use with
following characteristics:
.1
Nominal voltage class: as indicated.
.2
Rated frequency: 60 Hz.
.3
Basic impulse level: 4 kV.
.4
Metering accuracy rating: +/- 1%.
.5
Rated primary and secondary current: as indicated/5 Amps
secondary.
.6
Continuous-current rating factor: as indicated.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.2
2.3
Instrument
Transformers
Section 16432
Page 2
Positive action automatic short-circuiting device in secondary
terminals.
Mounting Brackets
.1
Potential transformers with mounting brackets to suit switchgear
manufacturer.
.2
Fabricate brackets and channels from electrogalvanized code
gauge painted steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Inspection
.1
3.2
Inspect instrument transformers for damage and verify
characteristics.
Installation
.1
Install instrument transformers and ensure accessibility.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Disconnect Switches
- Fused and Non-Fused
Up to 1000 V
Section 16440
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Disconnect Switches
.1
Fusible and non-fusible disconnect switch in CSA Enclosure and
size as indicated. To suit the environment (i.e. weatherproof,
watertight, dust-tight, general purpose, etc.)
.2
Provision for padlocking in on-off switch position by three
locks.
.3
Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in
ON position.
.4
Fuses: size as indicated, to Section 16478 - Fuses - Low Voltage.
.5
Fuseholders: suitable without adaptors, for type and size of fuse
indicated.
.6
Quick-make, quick-break action, heavy duty industrial grade.
.7
ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
.8
Disconnects used for service entrances shall be approved service
entrance switches.
.9
Disconnects for two speed motors to be six pole. Refer to motor
schedule and drawings for two speed motors and provide a six
pole disconnect switch for each two speed motor.
2.2
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010
- Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Indicate name of load controlled and voltage on size 6
nameplate.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Disconnect Switches
- Fused and Non-Fused
Up to 1000 V
Section 16440
Page 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install disconnect switches complete with fuses as indicated.
.2
Install additional brackets, supports, etc. required for
mounting the disconnect switches.
.3
Install six pole disconnects at all two speed motors.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Grounding
- Secondary
Section 16450
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
.3
Service Entrance Board
Section 16421
.4
Dry Type Transformers up to
600V Primary
Section 16461
1.2
References
.1
Ground equipment to: CSA C22.2 No. 41.
.2
Copper grounding conductors to: CSA G7.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Equipment
.1
Grounding conductors system, circuit and equipment, grounding to
be bare (or green insulated if indicated/required) stranded
copper sized in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code.
.2
Clamps for grounding of conductor, size as required to
electrically conductive underground water pipe.
.3
Copper conductor minimum 6 m long for each concrete encased
electrode, bare, stranded, tinned, soft annealed, size as
indicated.
.4
Rod electrodes, galvanized steel 19 mm dia by minimum 3 m long.
Threaded to accept 3m extensions if required.
.5
Plate electrodes, copper, surface area 0.2 m 2, 1.6 mm thick.
.6
System and circuit, equipment, grounding conductors, bare
stranded copper, tinned, soft annealed, size as indicated.
.7
Insulated grounding conductors: green, type RW-90.
.8
Ground bus: copper, size 50 mm by 6 mm by 300 mm long complete
with insulated supports, fastenings, connectors.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.9
Grounding
- Secondary
Section 16450
Page 2
Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type,
size, material as indicated, including but not necessarily
limited to:
.1
Grounding and bonding bushings.
.2
Grounding or bonding clamps. All grounding and bonding
clamps shall be brass where attached to copper pipes. Clamps for
other applications shall be of a type and material that will
minimize deterioration from galvanic action due to dissimilar
metals.
.3
Bolted type conductor connectors.
.4
Thermit welded type conductor connectors.
.5
Bonding jumpers, straps.
.6
Pressure wire connectors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation General
.1
Install complete permanent, continuous, system and circuit,
equipment, grounding systems including, electrodes, conductors,
connectors, accessories, as indicated, to conform to requirements
of local authority having jurisdiction over installation.
.2
Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
.3
Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.
.4
Make buried connections, and connections to conductive water
main, electrodes, using copper welding by thermit process or
Burndy "HyGround" compression connectors.
.5
Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment
provided with lugs. Soldered joints not permitted.
.6
The main public metallic water service to a building shall be
utilized as the main ground electrode where applicable. Where
such a service does not exist, artificial grounding electrodes
shall be provided to suit the requirements of the local
inspection authorities.
.7
Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at both
ends to grounding bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer
and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible
conduit.
.8
Install flexible ground straps for bus duct enclosure joints,
where such bonding is not inherently provided with equipment.
.9
Install separate ground conductor to outdoor lighting standards.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Grounding
- Secondary
Section 16450
Page 3
.10
Connect building structural steel and metal siding to ground by
welding copper to steel.
.11
Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with
connections terminating at single grounding point street side of
water pipe. Avoid loop connections.
.12
Bond single conductor, metallic armoured cables to cabinet at
supply end, and provide non-metallic entry plate at load end.
.13
All conduit runs containing feeders and branch circuits shall be
complete with an insulated green ground wire bonded to all outlet
boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, equipment enclosures, etc. The
conduit system shall be continuous but shall not be relied on to
serve as the equipment grounding means. Ground conductors shall
be sized according to the Canadian Electrical Code, but shall be
minimum #12 AWG. All locknuts and couplings shall be securely
tightened. All flexible conduit shall include an insulated ground
wire and shall be properly grounded through an approved fitting.
A separate ground conductor shall be installed in all fibre, PVC
or plastic duct runs and shall be connected to maintain the
grounding of the system.
.14
A minimum #3/0 AWG bare ground wire shall be installed in all
cable trays.
3.2
System and Circuit Grounding
.1
3.3
Install system and circuit grounding connections to neutral
points of 600V and 208 V system.
Equipment Grounding
.1
3.4
Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in,
but not necessarily limited to following list. Service equipment,
transformers, frames of motors, motor control centres, starters,
control panels, building steel Work, generators, elevator
distributions, panels, outdoor lighting.
Grounding Bus
.1
Install copper grounding bus mounted on insulated supports on
wall of electrical room.
.2
Ground items of electrical equipment in electrical room to
ground bus with individual bare stranded copper connections
minimum size #3/0 AWG.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
3.5
Grounding
- Secondary
Section 16450
Page 4
Communication Systems
.1
3.6
Install grounding connections for telephone, data, sound, fire
alarm, intercommunication systems, etc. as follows:
.1
Telephones: make telephone grounding system in accordance
with telephone installer's requirements.
.2
Sound, fire alarm, intercommunication systems, etc. as per
manufacturers installation instructions.
Field Quality Control
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method
appropriate to Site conditions and to approval of the local
inspection authority. A report shall be submitted to the Contract
Administrator from the testing agency.
.3
Perform tests before energizing electrical system.
.4
Disconnect ground fault indicator, if provided, during tests.
.5
A ground electrode with an unsatisfactory resistance test result
shall be altered as necessary until the required resistance
reading is achieved.
.6
Perform all tests as outlined in CSA Z32 for patient care areas.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Dry Type Transformers
up to 600 V Primary
Section 16461
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.3
Secondary Switchgear
(120/208V & 347/600V)
Section 16426
.4
Grounding - Secondary
Section 16450
1.2
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Transformers - Ventilated
.1
Dry-type transformers: to CSA C22.2 No. 47, CSA C9.
.2
Use transformers of one manufacturer throughout project.
.3
Type: ANN. K rating to be minimum K-13 or as indicated on
drawings. Parking lot transformers need not be K-13 rated.
.4
3 phase, 600V Delta primary, 120/208V wye, secondary, 60 Hz,
copper windings.
.5
Voltage taps: 4 @ 2 1/2 %; two FCAN; two FCBN.
.6
Insulation: Class H; 150°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient.
.7
Basic Impulse Level (BIL): standard
.8
Hipot: standard
.9
Average sound level: 50 db for up to 150 kVA & 55 db above 150
kVA.
.10
Impedance at 75 deg. C: to be 3% to 5% for transformers up to
225kVA (minimum 3.75% for 225 kVA transformers and 5% for
transformers 300 kVA and larger).
.11
Enclosure: EEMAC 1, removable metal front panel, sprinklerproof
in sprinklered buildings.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Dry Type Transformers
up to 600 V Primary
Section 16461
Page 2
.12
Mounting: floor or wall.
.13
Finish: in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General
Requirements.
2.2
Transformers - Non-Ventilated
.1
Epoxy potted. K rating to be minimum K-13 or as indicated on
drawings. Parking lot transformers need not be K-13 rated.
.2
3 phase, 600V Delta primary, 120/208V wye, secondary, 60 Hz.
.3
Voltage taps: 4 @ 2 1/2%; two FCAN; two FCBN.
.4
115 deg. temp. rise insulation system.
.5
Basic Impulse Level (BIL): standard.
.6
Hipot: standard
.7
Average sound level: standard
.8
Impedance at 75 deg.C: standard
.9
Enclosure: sealed
.10
Mounting: floor or wall as indicated.
.11
Finish: in accordance with Section 16010.
2.3
Electro-Statically Shielded Transformers
.1
Dry-type transformers: to CSA C22.2 No. 47, CSA C9.
.2
Use transformers of one manufacturer throughout project.
.3
Type: ANN. K rating to be minimum K-13 or as indicated on
drawings. Parking lot transformers need not be K-13 rated.
.4
3 phase, 600V Delta primary, 120/208V wye, secondary, 60 Hz,
copper windings, or aluminum windings.
.5
Voltage taps: 4 at 2-1/2%; two FCAN; two FCBN.
.6
Insulation: Class H; 150°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient.
.7
Basic Impulse Level (BIL): standard.
.8
Hipot: standard.
.9
Average sound level: 50 db for up to 150 kVa and 55 db above 150
kVa.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Dry Type Transformers
up to 600 V Primary
Section 16461
Page 3
.10
Common noise attenuation of 60 db.
.11
Impedance at 75 deg. to be 3% to 5% for transformers up to
225kVA (minimum 3.75% for 225 kVA transformers and 5% for
transformers 300 kVA and larger).
.12
Enclosure: EEMAC 1, removable metal front panel; sprinkler proof
in sprinklered buildings.
.13
Mounting: floor or wall.
.14
Neoprene vibration insulation pads.
.15
Finish: in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General
Requirements.
2.4
Approved Manufacturers
.1
Schneider, Hammond, Rex Manufacturing, Cutler Hammer, Polygon,
Siemens.
.2
All transformers shall be of same manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Mounting
.1
Mount dry-type transformers up to 75 kVA as indicated.
.2
Mount dry type transformers above 75 kVA on (100mm) high
concrete housekeeping pad, unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Ensure adequate clearance around transformer for ventilation.
.4
Install transformers in level upright position.
.5
Remove shipping supports only after transformer is installed and
just before putting into service.
.6
Loosen isolation pad bolts until no compression is visible.
.7
Mount transformers with vibration isolation.
3.2
Connections
.1
Make primary and secondary connections indicated on wiring
diagram.
.2
Energize transformers immediately after installation is
completed, where practicable.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Panelboards
Breaker Type
Section 16471
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.3
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Section 16477
1.2
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branch breaker
type, quantity, ampacity and enclosure dimension.
1.3
Plant Assembly
.1
Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment.
.2
In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer's nameplate must
show fault current that panel including breakers has been built
to withstand.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Panelboards
.1
Panelboards: to CSA C-22.2 No. 29.
.2
Panelboards: product of one manufacturer.
.3
250V branch circuit panelboards: bus and breakers rated for 10kA
(RMS symmetrical) interrupting capacity minimum or as indicated
and 347/600V panels: bus and breakers rated for 14 ka (RMS
symmetrical) or as indicated.
.4
Sequence phase bussing such that circuit breakers will be
numbered in consecutive order, with each breaker identified by
permanent number identification as to circuit number and phase.
.5
Panelboards: mains, number of circuits, and number and size of
branch circuit breakers as indicated.
.6
Provide panel covers for all panelboards and supply two keys for
each panelboard and key panelboards alike.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Panelboards
Breaker Type
Section 16471
Page 2
.7
Aluminum bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains.
.8
Mains: suitable for bolt-on 25mm wide breakers.
.9
Trim and door finish: baked grey enamel.
.10
Sprinkler proof to meet code requirements when located in
sprinklered areas.
2.2
Custom Built Panelboard Assemblies
.1
450 mm relay section on one or two sides of panels as indicated
for installation of low voltage remote control switching
components.
.2
Double stack panels as indicated.
.3
Contactors in mains as indicated.
.4
Feed through lugs as indicated.
.5
Isolated ground bus as indicated.
.6
Metering as indicated, logging type c/w max/min values for
Volts/Amp/KW/KVA/KVAD/KWD/PF. Meter to be by PML-ION 7300 Series
or approved equal.
.7
As manufactured by J.R. Stephenson.
2.3
Breakers
.1
Breakers: to Section 16477 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
.2
Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in panelboards
except as indicated otherwise.
.3
Lock-on devices for 5% of 15 to 30 A breakers installed as
indicated. Turn over unused lock-on devices to the City of
Winnipeg.
.4
Lock-on devices for fire alarm, emergency lighting, door
supervisory, intercom, paging, stairway, exit, night light
circuits and similar circuits.
.5
Branch circuit breakers to be 15A single pole unless otherwise
indicated on drawings.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.4
Panelboards
Breaker Type
Section 16471
Page 3
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section
16010 - Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Nameplate for each panelboard size 5 engraved as indicated.
.3
Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing
location and load of each circuit.
2.5
Manufacturers
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers: Cutler Hammer, Schneider, Square D and
Siemens.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Locate panelboards as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true
and square, to adjoining surfaces.
.2
Except in public areas, install surface mounted panelboards on
U-channels. Where practical, group panelboards on common
U-channels.
.3
Mount panelboards to height specified in Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements or as indicated.
.4
Connect loads to circuits.
.5
Connect branch circuit neutral conductors to common neutral bus.
Common neutrals shall be shared by vertically adjacent breakers
except for GFI protected branch circuits and dimmer circuits
which shall not share neutrals with other circuits. Neutral
conductors shall be identified with mylar/cloth wire markers
showing the circuit numbers of the circuits sharing the neutral.
.6
Trims of recessed panelboards to be flush with wall. Coordinate
installation with wall installer to ensure that walls with
recessed equipment will be deep enough to accept the equipment.
.7
Finish parking lot panel enclosures to match Site lighting
poles.
.8
Locate all panelboards as shown on the drawings, an arrow
indicating the front.
.9
Wiring in panelboards shall be neat and set in as if laced. All
neutral conductors shall be identified in the panel with their
associated circuit numbers by means of Brady Markers.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.10
Panelboards
Breaker Type
Section 16471
Page 4
All panelboards throughout the building shall be phased together
such that the left-hand, centre and right-hand panelboard busses
represent phases A, B and C respectively. All indicating meters
shall be identified to this sequence.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Transient Voltage
Surge Suppression
Section 16475
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Service Entrance Board
Section 16421
.3
Panelboards Breaker Type
Section 16471
1.2
Summary
.1
1.3
This Section describes the materials and installation
requirements for transient voltage surge suppressors (TVSS) for
the protection of all AC electrical circuits from the effects
of lightning induced currents, substation switching transients
and internally generated transients resulting from inductive
and/or capacitive load switching.
References
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.2
Canadian Electrical Code (CEC)
.3
American National Standards Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE)
.4
Underwriters Laboratories Canada (ULC)
1.4
Submittal for approval
.1
Shop drawings, product data and manufacturer's installation
instructions shall be submitted for review ten days prior to
the bid date.
.2
The submittals shall include:
.1
Dimensional drawing of each TVSS unit.
.2
CSA Approval.
.3
UL Standard 1449 Listing, Standard for Safety, Transient
Voltage Surge Suppressors, documentation.
.4
UL Standard 1283 Listing, Electromagnetic Interference
Filters, documentation.
.5
IEEE C62.41-1991 Category C3 (20kV-1.2/50, 10kA-8/20us
waveform) clamping voltage test results from an independent
test lab. The test procedure shall be in accordance with IEEE
C62.45-1987.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Transient Voltage
Surge Suppression
Section 16475
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
Service Entrance Switchboard
.1
Suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449,
Standard for Safety, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors, and
UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
.2
Suppressors shall be independently tested with the Category C3
high exposure waveform (20kV-1.2/50us, 10kA-8/20us) per
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 - 1991.
.3
Suppressors shall provide redundant suppression modules
between each phase conductor and the neutral conductor and
between the neutral conductor and ground.
.4
Suppressor manufacturer shall provide certified test data
confirming a "fail-short" failure mode.
.5
Visible indication of proper suppressor connection and
operation shall be provided. The indicator lights shall
indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable.
.6
The suppressor shall incorporate copper bus bars for the surge
current path. Small gauge round wiring or plug-in connections
shall not be used in the path for surge current diversion.
Surge current diversion modules shall use bolted connections to
the bus bars for reliable low impedance connections.
.7
Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
.1
Maximum single impulse current rating shall be no less
than 320 kA per phase.
.2
Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and
surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C transients without
failure or degradation of UL 1449 clamp voltage by more than
10%.
.3
UL 1449 clamping voltage must not exceed the following:
L-N
N-G
VOLTAGE
120/208
400V
400V
277/480
800
800
347/600
1000
1000
.4
The ANSI/IEEE C-62.41 - 1991 Category C3 clamping voltage
shall not exceed the following:
L-N
N-G
VOLTAGE
120/108
675V
675V
277/480
1250
1250
347/600
1500
1500
.8
The TVSS shall be constructed using surge current modules (MOV
based). Each module shall be fused with user replaceable
200,000 AIR rated fuses. The status of each module shall be
monitored on the front cover of the switchboard as well as on
the module.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Transient Voltage
Surge Suppression
Section 16475
Page 3
.9
The TVSS shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall
actuate when any one of the surge current modules has failed.
An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm
and an alarm push-to-test switch shall be provided to test the
alarm. Both switches and audible alarm shall be located on the
front panel of the switchboard.
.10
Terminals shall be provided for all of the necessary power and
ground connections. Each terminal shall accommodate wire sizes
of #8 to #1 AWG.
.11
The suppressor shall have a response time no greater than 5
nanoseconds for any of the individual protection modes.
.12
The suppressor will have a warranty for a period of five years,
incorporating unlimited replacements of suppressor parts if
they are destroyed by transients during the warranty period.
.13
The suppressor shall be equipped with the following optional
items:
.1
TVSS units shall be equipped with a disconnect switch or
circuit breaker.
.2
A transient voltage surge counter shall be located on the
front cover of the switchboard. The counter shall be equipped
with a manual reset and a battery to retain memory upon loss of
AC power.
.3
A DB-9 connector shall be provided along with dry contacts
(normally open or normally closed) to allow connection to a
remote monitor or other system. The output of the dry contacts
shall indicate a failure of a phase or the entire unit.
.4
A remote monitoring device shall be provided to directly
connect to the suppressor with a DB-9 connector for simple
installation. The device will have indicator lights to monitor
each AC phase for a fault or good condition and include an
audible alarm to indicate module failure.
2.2
Service Entrance Panelboard
.1
Integral Surge Suppressor
.1
Suppressors shall be component recognized in accordance
with UL1449, Standard for Safety, Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressors and UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
.2
Suppressors shall be independently tested with the
category C3 high exposure waveform (20 kV - 1.2/50 us, 10 kA 8/20 us) per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 - 1991.
.3
Suppressors shall incorporate copper bus bars for the
surge current path. Small round wiring or plug-in connections
shall not be used in the path for surge current diversion.
.4
Suppressors shall be constructed using surge current
modules (MOV based). Each module shall be fused with user
replaceable 200,000 AIR rated fuses. The status of each module
shall be monitored on the front cover of the panelboard
enclosure as well as on the module.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Transient Voltage
Surge Suppression
Section 16475
Page 4
.5
Suppressors shall be equipped with an audible alarm which
shall activate when any one of the surge current modules has
failed. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the
alarm and an alarm push-to-test switch shall be provided to
test the alarm. The switches and alarm shall be located on the
front cover of the panelboard enclosure.
.6
Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
.1
Maximum single impulse current rating shall be no less
than 120kA 200kA 320kA per phase.
.2
Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and
surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C transients
without failure or degradation.
.3
The clamping voltage shall not exceed the following:
L-N
N-G
VOLTAGE
120/208
400V
400V
277/480
800
800
347/600
1000
1000
.7
The suppressor shall have a response time no greater than
five nanoseconds for any of the individual protection modes.
.8
Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a maximum
continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than 115% of
nominal RMS voltage.
.9
Visible indication of proper suppressor connection and
operation shall be provided. The indicator lights shall indicate
which phase as well as which module is fully operable.
.10 Suppressors shall be manufactured in the United States. All
major components shall also be of American manufacture.
.11 Suppressors shall have a minimum EFI/RFI filtering of 34dB
at 100kHz with an insertion loss ratio of 50:1 using Mil Std.
220A methodology.
.12 Suppressors shall have a five year warranty, incorporating
unlimited replacements of suppressor modules if they are
destroyed by transients during the warranty period.
2.3
Secondary Service Surge Protected Panelboards
.1
Integral Surge Suppressor
.1
The panelboard shall be approved to CSA specification C22.2
No. 29-M1989. The TVSS device shall be UL 1449 Component
Recognized. The TVSS device shall have passed all UL testing
required by the UL 1449 standard. Panelboard markings shall
include clamp voltage at the TVSS terminals as well as clamp
voltage at the panelboard line terminals.
.2
Suppressors shall be independently tested with the category
C3 high exposure waveform (20 kV - 1.2/50us, 10 kA - 8/20us) per
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 - 1991.
.3
Suppressors shall incorporate copper bus bars for the surge
current path. Small round wiring or plug-in connections shall not
be used in the path for surge current diversion.
.4
Suppressors shall be constructed using surge current modules
(MOV based). Each module shall be fused with user replaceable
200,000 AIR rated fuses. The status of each module shall be
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Transient Voltage
Surge Suppression
Section 16475
Page 5
monitored on the front cover of the panelboard enclosure as well
as on the module.
.5
All encapsulated suppressors shall utilize an encapsulant
that is UL listed and holds a 94-V2 fire retardant rating. No
encapsulant compounds that incorporate epoxy shall be allowed.
.6
Suppressors shall be equipped with an audible alarm which
shall activate when any one of the surge current modules has
failed. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the
alarm and an alarm push-to-test switch shall be provided to test
the alarm. The switches and alarm shall be located on the front
cover of the panelboard enclosure.
.7
Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
.1
Maximum single impulse current rating shall be no less
than 120 kA per phase (calculated from component
manufacturer's specifications).
.2
Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and
surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C transients
without failure or degradation.
.3
The clamping voltage shall not exceed the following:
L-N
N-G
VOLTAGE
120/208
400V
400V
277/480
800
800
347/600
1000
1000
.8
The suppressor shall have a response time no greater than
five nanoseconds for any of the individual protection modes.
.9
Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a maximum
continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than 115% of
nominal RMS voltage.
.10 Visible indication of proper suppressor connection and
operation shall be provided. The indicator lights shall
indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable.
.11 Suppressors shall have a minimum EFI/RFI filtering of 34dB
at 100kHz with an insertion loss ratio of 50:1 using Mil Std.
220A methodology.
.12 Suppressors shall have a five year warranty, incorporating
unlimited replacements of suppressor modules if they are
destroyed by transients during the warranty period.
.13 Suppressors shall be equipped with the following optional
items:
.1
TVSS units shall be equipped with a disconnect switch
or circuit breaker.
.2
A transient voltage surge counter shall be located on
the front cover of the suppressor. The counter shall be
equipped with a manual reset and a battery to retain
memory upon loss of AC power.
.3
A DB-9 connector shall be provided along with dry
contacts (normally open or normally closed) to allow
connection to a remote monitor or other system. The output
of the dry contacts shall indicate a failure of a phase or
the entire unit.
.4
A remote monitoring device shall be provided to
directly connect to the suppressor with a DB-9 connector
for simple installation. The device will have indicator
lights to monitor each AC phase for a fault or good
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Transient Voltage
Surge Suppression
Section 16475
Page 6
condition and include an audible alarm to indicate module
failure.
.2
Non-Linear Panelboard
.1
The panelboard shall be approved to CSA specification
C22.2 No. 29-M1989. The TVSS device shall be UL 1449 Component
Recognized. The TVSS device shall have passed all UL testing
required by the UL 1449 standard. Panelboard markings shall
include clamp voltage at the TVSS terminals as well as clamp
voltage at the panelboard line terminals.
.2
The unit shall be top or bottom feed according to
requirements. A circuit directory shall be located inside the
door.
.3
The box shall be code gauge steel. The box size shall be as
indicated on the associated schedules drawings.
.4
The main bus shall be aluminum and rated for the load
current required.
.5
The unit shall be provided with branch circuit breakers.
All available types of circuit breakers can be provided as
required. No modification to the interior of the unit shall
limit the selection of circuit breakers.
.6
The unit shall include a 200% rated neutral assembly with
aluminum neutral bus.
.7
The unit shall be provided with an insulated ground bus
and a safety ground bus.
.8
The field connections to the panelboard shall be main lug
or main breaker.
.9
The unit shall be constructed with flush or surface
mounted trim and shall be in a EEMAC 1 enclosure.
.10 The panelboard shall be supplied with the appropriate
branch breaker positions and nominal current rating as
indicated on the associated drawing.
.3
Approved Manufacturers
.1
Schneider Canada
.2
Cutler-Hammer
.3
Siemens
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Service Entrance
.1
Install one primary suppressor within the switchboard or
panelboard at each utility service entrance to the facility,
according to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
The suppressor shall be installed on the load side of the
service entrance.
.3
Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be
kept short and straight.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.4
3.2
Transient Voltage
Surge Suppression
Section 16475
Page 7
The suppressor's ground shall be bonded to the service entrance
ground.
Secondary Distribution Panels
.1
Install panelboards as required and according to manufacturer's
recommendations. The surge suppression is integrated into the
surge protected panelboards.
.2
Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be
kept short and straight.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Moulded Case
Circuit Breakers
Section 16477
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Service Entrance Board
Section 16421
.3
347/600V Main Distribution
Switchgear (Air Ckt Brkrs
(Main & tie) with CDP Dist'n)
Section 16422
.4
Secondary Switchgear
(120/208V & 347/600V)
Section 16426
.5
Panelboards Breaker Type
Section 16471
1.2
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Include time-current coordination characteristic curves for
breakers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Breakers General
.1
Moulded case circuit breakers: to CSA C22.2 No. 5.
.2
Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick- make, quick-break
type, for manual and automatic operation with temperature
compensation for 40 deg. C ambient.
.3
Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole
applications.
.4
Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to
operate only when value of current reaches setting. Trip
settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 5-10
times current rating.
.5
Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated.
.6
Minimum Interrupting Ratings (RMS Symmetrical) unless otherwise
indicated:
.1
120/208 Volts - 10,000 Amps
.2
347/600 Volts - 14,000 Amps
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.2
Moulded Case
Circuit Breakers
Section 16477
Page 2
Thermal Magnetic Breakers
.1
2.3
Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of
thermal and magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse time
current tripping and instantaneous tripping for short circuit
protection.
Solid State Trip Breakers
.1
Moulded case circuit breaker to operate by means of a
solid-state trip unit with associated current monitors and
self-powered shunt trip to provide inverse time current trip
under overload condition, and long time, short time,
instantaneous and ground fault tripping.
.1
Each breaker shall have the following independent and fully
adjustable curve shaping characteristics:
.1
Adjustable long time pickup
.2
Adjustable long time delay
.3
Adjustable short time pickup
.4
Adjustable short time delay with selective curve
shaping
.5
Adjustable instantaneous pickup
.6
Adjustable ground fault pickup
.7
Adjustable ground fault delay with selective curve
shaping
.2
Breakers feeding transformers 45 kVA and larger shall have solid
state trips, fully and independently adjustable LSIG settings.
2.4
ARC Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCI)
.1
Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means
of thermal and magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse time
current tripping and instantaneous tripping for short circuit
protection.
.2
Integrated processor which trips the breaker upon recognized
unique current and/or voltage signatures associated with arcing
faults.
2.5
Manufacturers
.1
Acceptable manufacturers: Cutler Hammer, Schneider, Square D,
Siemens.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Moulded Case
Circuit Breakers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2.5
Installation
.1
Install circuit breakers as indicated.
END
Section 16477
Page 3
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fuses - Low Voltage
Section 16478
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
1.2
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section
16010.
.2
Submit fuse performance data characteristics for each fuse type
and size above 30 A. Performance data to include: average melting
time-current characteristics, I 2t (for fuse coordination), and
peak let-through current.
1.3
Maintenance Materials
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Three spare fuses of each type and size installed above 600 A.
.3
Six spare fuses of each type and size installed up to and
including 600 A.
1.4
Delivery and Storage
.1
Ship fuses in original containers.
.2
Do not ship fuses installed in switchboard.
.3
Store fuses in original containers in storage cabinet.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Fuses General
.1
Plug and cartrige fuses: to CSA C22.2 No. 59.
.2
Fuse type references L1, L2, J1 etc. have been adopted for use in
this specification.
.3
Fuses: product of one manufacturer.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.2
Fuses - Low Voltage
Section 16478
Page 2
Fuse Types
.1
HRC-L fuses (formerly Class L), motor loads:
.1
Type L1, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated
current for 10 s minimum.
.2
Type L2, fast acting.
.2
HRCI-J fuses (formerly Class J), Panel loads:
.1
Type J1, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated
current for 10 s minimum.
.2
Type J2, fast acting.
2.3
Fuse Storage Cabinet
.1
Fuse storage cabinet, manufactured from 2.0 mm thick aluminum 750
mm high, 600 mm wide, 300 mm deep, hinged, lockable front access
door finished in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical-General Requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install fuses in mounting devices immediately before energizing
circuit.
.2
Ensure correct fuses fitted to physically matched mounting
devices.
.1
Install Class R rejection clips for HRCI-R fuses.
.3
Ensure correct fuses fitted to assigned electrical circuit.
.4
Provide a fuse cabinet in each main and sub-electrical room
where fuses are installed.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Contactors
Section 16485
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
1.2
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Contactors
.1
Contactors: to EEMAC No.1CS.
.2
Electrically held or Mechanically held controlled by pilot
devices as indicated and rated for type of load controlled. Half
size contactors not accepted.
.3
Complete with 2 spare normally open and 2 normally closed
auxiliary contacts unless indicated otherwise.
.4
Mount in EEMAC '1' Enclosure unless otherwise indicated.
.5
Include following options in cover:
.1
Red indicating lamp. (Open)
.2
Green indicating lamp. (Closed)
.3
Hand-Off-Auto selector switch.
.6
Control transformer in contactor enclosure.
2.2
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section
16010 - Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Size 4 nameplate indicating name of load controlled as
indicated.
2.3
Manufacturers
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers: Allen Bradley, ASCO, Cutler-Hammer,
Square D, Siemens.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Contactors
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install contactors as indicated on drawings.
.2
Connect line and load side wiring.
.3
Connect controls as required.
END
Section 16485
Page 2
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Ground Fault Circuit
Interrupters
- Class "A"
Section 16496
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Panelboards Breaker Type
Section 16471
1.2
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section
01300 - Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
2.2
Components comprising ground fault protective system to be of
same manufacturer.
Breaker Type Ground Fault Interrupter
.1
2.3
Single or Two pole ground fault circuit interrupter for 15 to
40A, 120/240V, 1 phase circuit c/w test and reset facilities.
Ground Fault Protector Unit
.1
Self-contained with 15 A, 120 V circuit interrupter and duplex
receptacle complete with:
.1
Solid state ground sensing device.
.2
Facility for testing and reset.
.3
Flush mounted with stainless steel face plate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Do not ground neutral on load side of ground fault relay.
.2
Pass phase conductors including neutral through zero sequence
transformers.
.3
Connect supply and load wiring to equipment in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
3.2
Ground Fault Circuit
Interrupters
- Class "A"
Section 16496
Page 2
Field Quality Control
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Arrange and pay for field testing of ground fault equipment by
independent testing laboratory before commissioning service.
.3
Submit report of tests to Contract Administrator and a
certificate that system as installed meets criteria specified
herein. Include copies of report in maintenance manuals.
.4
Demonstrate simulated ground fault tests.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Lighting Equipment
Section 16505
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Section 03300
.2
Painting - General
Section 09900
.3
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
1.2
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Submit complete photometric data prepared by independent testing
laboratory for luminaires where specified, for approval by
Contract Administrator.
.3
Submit list of replacement lamp data for each luminaire. Include
lamp type, voltage, base type and order code.
1.3
Guarantee
.1
1.4
Replace:
.1
Incandescent and tungsten halogen lamps burnt out within 3
months of takeover.
.2
Fluorescent and HID lamps burning out within 12 months of
takeover.
.3
Ballasts that fail or exceed their labelled noise level
rating within 12 months of takeover.
Co-ordination
.1
Co-ordinate luminaire locations with Work of other trades.
.2
Co-ordinate luminaire types with ceiling finishes to ensure
compatability.
.3
Luminaires to be c/w lamps, suspension devices, plaster rings
and other attachments required for best appearance and proper
mechanical installation.
.4
Every light outlet in the building shall be provided with a
suitable fixture. In the event that the fixture type is not
designed for any particular outlet, supply a suitable fixture
for the application, as approved by the Contract Administrator.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Lighting Equipment
Section 16505
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Incandescent and electric discharge fixtures: to CSA C22.2 No.
9.
.2
Socket screw-shell lampholders: to CSA C22.2 No. 43.
.3
Electric discharge lampholders: to CSA C22.2 No. 74.
.4
Incandescent lamps to: CSA C10 and CSA C22.2 No. 84.
.5
Tungsten halogen lamps: to CSA C22.2 No. 84.
.6
HID lamps: to ANSI C78 series.
.7
Fluorescent lamps: to ANSI C78 series.
.8
Ballasts: to CSA C22.2 No. 74.
.9
Plastic lenses and diffusers ULC labelled.
2.2
Luminaire Details
.1
Luminaires shall carry the CSA label.
.2
Provide supporting devices, plaster frames, junction boxes and
outlet boxes where required.
.3
Provide lenses or diffusers of glass or acrylic material as
indicated. Acrylic lenses used with fluorescent luminaires shall
be a K-12 pattern with a minimum of .125" (3mm) thickness.
.4
Include finishes to Section 16010 and as indicated.
.5
Provide gasketting, stops and barriers to prevent light leaks.
.6
Recessed luminaires shall be suitable for mounting in the
particular type of ceiling where the luminaires are to be
mounted.
2.3
Lamps
.1
Provide lamps as indicated.
.2
Incandescent lamps to be extended service type rated 2500 hours,
130 volts, inside frosted unless indicated otherwise.
.3
Fluorescent lamps (T12) shall be rapid start, 3100 lumens, rated
20,000 hours, cool white unless other indicated.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Lighting Equipment
Section 16505
Page 3
.4
Fluorescent lamps (T8) shall be rapid start, 2850 Lumens rated
20,000 hours, 3500 K.
.5
HID lamps shall be rated 20,000 hours with coating as designated
and universal mounting.
.6
Metal Halide lamps shall be coated unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
Ballasts and Accessories
.1
Provide ballasts and accessories as indicated.
.2
Provide ballasts with non-PCB type capacitors with pressure
sensitive devices to prevent rupturing.
.3
Fluorescent ballast: CBM certified, energy efficient electronic
type, design. (Hybrid type not acceptable).
.1
Rating: 60 Hz, voltage as indicated, for use with 2-32 W,
T-8, rapid start lamps.
.2
Totally encased and designed for 40 deg C ambient
temperature.
.3
Power factor: minimum 90% with 95% of rated lamp lumens.
.4
Capacitor: non PCB, thermally protected.
.5
Thermal protection: non-resettable auto reset on coil.
.6
Sound rated: A.
.7
Mounting: remote integral with luminaire.
.8
Total harmonic distortion less than 20%.
.9
Ballast must be listed by Manitoba Hydro as acceptable by
their "Power Smart" premium rebate program.
.10 Line amperes for ballast with two 4-foot T-8 lamps to be
0.6 Amps at 120 V maximum, 68 VA. volt-amperes for ballast with
four 4-foot T-8 lamps to be 1.0 Amps at 120V maximum.
.4
Ballasts for high intensity discharge lamps shall be, HPF,
auto-regulator type.
.5
Ballasts used in exterior luminaires shall be rated at -20 deg.
C starting.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Lighting Equipment
Section 16505
Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install luminaires at locations indicated, c/w lamps, all
wiring, connections, fittings, hangers, aligners, box covers and
accessories, as required.
.2
Install luminaires and lens materials in architectural details,
as indicated.
.3
Install luminaires parallel with building lines. Wall mounted
luminaires to be installed plumb.
.4
Review all ceiling types, construction details and mounting
arrangements before placing luminaire orders and ensure that all
mounting assemblies, frames, rings and similar features are
included for and match the required installation.
.5
All luminaires and assemblies shall be properly secured and
supported. Support luminaires independent of the ceiling
construction c/w all fasteners, framing and hangers as may be
required. Do not secure luminaires to mechanical ductwork or
other vibration producing apparatus, unless specifically detailed
on the drawings.
.6
Where luminaires are suspended from ceilings using self-aligning
box covers and additional ground wire from the outlet box to the
luminaires shall be provided.
.7
Co-ordinate the installation of luminaires with the Work of
other trades, ensuring that the necessary depths and mounting
spaces are provided. Luminaires which cannot be installed due to
a conflict with structural members, pipes or ductwork shall be
relocated to a more suitable location, as directed by the
Contract Administrator and/or Designer.
3.2
Wiring
.1
3.3
Connect luminaires to lighting circuits as indicated.
Lamps
.1
Adjust lamp position in adjustable lampholder type luminaires to
produce the proper beam distribution for the specified lamp.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
3.4
Lighting Equipment
Section 16505
Page 5
Tests
.1
3.5
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010.
Cleaning
.1
Prior to take-over of the project, clean the lenses and
reflectors of all luminaires with a damp cloth to remove dust,
smudges and fingerprints.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Exit Lights
Section 16519
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Lighting Equipment
Section 16505
1.2
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Exit Lights - General
.1
Housing: Slim-Line 2.0 mm thick, heavy-duty extruded aluminum,
white powder coat finish c/w snap-out directional arrows and
universal canopy mount. Entire fixtures to meet CSA-C860.
.2
Extruded aluminum 2.00 mm thick stencil face, white powder coat
finish.
.3
Lamps: LED light bar type c/w internally mounted transformers as
required.
.4
Designed for 10 years of continuous operation without relamping.
.5
Letters: 153 mm high x 20 mm wide, white faceplate on red glass
reading EXIT.
.6
No external holes or slots to eliminate light leaks.
.7
Built-in switch-over relays for 12 Volt DC operation.
.8
Face plate to remain captive for relamping.
.9
Units c/w punch-out directional arrows as required.
.10
Units c/w universal mounting canopies as required.
.11
Shall comply with CSA-860.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Exit Lights
Section 16519
Page 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install exit lights as indicated.
.2
Connect fixtures to designated AC exit light circuits as
indicated.
.3
Ensure that exit light circuit breaker is locked in on position.
.4
Connect fixtures to remote battery banks circuits as indicated.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Unit Equipment for
Emergency Lighting
Section 16536
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.3
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
.4
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
.5
Exit Lights
Section 16519
1.2
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Data to indicate system components, mounting method, source of
power and special attachments.
1.3
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
Provide data for incorporation into Maintenance Manual specified
in Section 16010.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Manual to include:
.1
Operation and maintenance instructions for complete battery
system to permit effective operation and maintenance.
.2
Technical data - illustrated parts lists with parts
catalogue numbers.
.3
Copy of approved shop drawings.
1.4
Maintenance Materials
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Include:
.1
Five spare lamps of each type supplied for remote heads.
1.5
Warranty
.1
Provide a written guarantee, stating that the battery for
emergency lighting is guaranteed against defects in material and
workmanship for a period of 10 years, with a no-charge
replacement during the first lustrum and a pro-rate charge on the
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Unit Equipment for
Emergency Lighting
Section 16536
Page 2
second lustrum, from the date of the Final Acceptance from the
City of Winnipeg.
1.6
System Description
.1
The system to include battery unit(s) controls, remote heads,
wire and conduit etc. to provide backup emergency lighting in the
event of a loss of AC power to the normal lighting system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Equipment
.1
Supply voltage: 120 V, ac. as indicated.
.2
Output voltage: 12 V dc. as indicated.
.3
Operating time: 60 min. as indicated.
.4
Battery: sealed, long life, lead acid or lead calcium
maintenance free.
.5
Charger: solid state, multi-rate, pulse type, voltage/current
regulated, inverse temperature compensated, short circuit
protected, modular construction.
.6
Solid state transfer.
.7
Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, operates at 80%
battery output voltage c/w 2-fused DC output circuits.
.8
Signal lights: solid state, life expectancy 100,000 h minimum,
for 'AC Power ON' and 'High Charge'.
.9
Lamp heads: integral on unit 360 deg. horizontal and 180 deg.
vertical adjustment. Lamp type: tungsten-halogen, 12 W, glare
free, (mini style).
.10
Cabinet: minimum 20 gauge steel cabinet c/w white polyester
paint finish c/w knockouts for conduit.
.11
Auxiliary equipment:
.1
Low voltage disconnect switch.
.2
Lamp disconnect switch.
.3
Test switch.
.4
Time delay relay.
.5
Battery disconnect device.
.6
ac input and dc output terminal blocks inside cabinet.
.7
Shelf where required.
.8
Cord and 3-prong straight blade NEMA 5-15P plug connection
for ac.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Unit Equipment for
Emergency Lighting
Section 16536
Page 3
.12
Wall mounted battery banks to be direct wall mounted or with
wall mounting shelf. Provide removable or hinged front panel for
easy access to the batteries. LED diagnostics display and test
switch mounted by side of enclosure.
.13
T-bar mounted battery banks to be mounted in T-bar ceilings at
locations shown. Units to be c/w flanges to access T-bar ceiling
tiles. Units to be independently suspended from structure above.
LED diagnostics display and test switch to be mounted on
underside of enclosure.
2.2
Manufacturers
.1
2.3
Acceptable Manufacturers: Dual-Lite, Emergi-lite, Lithonia,
Lumacell, Luxnet, Uniglo.
Remote Heads
.1
Remote micro heads fixture:
.1
Double or triple heads as indicated.
.2
Wall or ceiling mountable c/w mounting plate.
.3
Molded thermoplastic housing and mounting plate.
.4
Adjustable rotary collar and adjustable swivel heads for
proper aiming of fixture.
.5
Prismatic acrylic lens over lamp.
.6
12 Watt quartz halogen lamp at voltage indicated.
.7
Approved Manufacturers:
.1
Dual-Lite: MRH series
.2
Emergi-Lite: P18 series
.3
Lithonia: P18 series
.4
Lumacell: MQ series
.5
Luxnet: R1Q series
.6
Uniglo: MR series
.2
Recessed fixture:
.1
Single head, recessed in drywall or T-bar ceiling.
.2
Fully adjustable for tilt, rotation and tight beam control.
.3
Matte white finish.
.4
Minimum 12 watt quartz halogen lamp at voltage indicated.
.5
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1
Dual-Lite: EXT-122 series
.2
Emergi-Lite: EF15 series
.3
Lithonia: ELA RG series
.4
Lumacell: RS20 series
.5
Luxnet: R21 series
.6
Uniglo: MRR series
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Unit Equipment for
Emergency Lighting
Section 16536
Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install unit equipment for emergency lighting in accordance with
CSA C22.1.
.2
Install conduit and wiring as indicated.
.3
Install unit equipment and remote mounted fixtures as indicated.
.4
Cut and re-cap cord to remove surplus.
.5
Direct heads indicated to provide maximum lighting level along
means of egress routes.
.6
Mount double remote heads on outlet box such that the two heads
will be horizontal with the building lines.
.7
Charge the batteries and test the system for proper operation
(minimum of 35 or 65 minutes discharge time).
.8
Adjacent to each battery bank unit install a 120V duplex
receptacle and wire to AC night lighting circuit.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Summary
.1
This specification defines the electrical and mechanical
characteristics and requirements for a continuous-duty,
three-phase, solid-state, uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
system. UPS shall provide high-quality AC power for sensitive
electronic equipment loads.
.2
A cash allowance is provided in the front end specification for
purchase of this equipment at a later date. Div. 16 to allow all
material/handling/markups, overhead and profit, etc. in their
bid.
.3
The UPS system will be supplied by Powerware.
.4
Refer to 16010 for Additional Information.
1.2
Standards
.1
UPS shall be designed in accordance with applicable sections of
current revision of the following documents. Where a conflict
arises between these documents and statements made herein, the
statements in this specification shall govern.
.1
ANSI C62.41 (EEE.587)
.2
CSA 22.2, No. 107.1
.3
FCC rules Part 15, Class A
.4
National Electrical Code (NFPA-70)
.5
OSHA
.6
UL Standard 1778
.2
UPS shall be UL listed per UL Standard 1778, and shall be CSA
certified.
.3
UPS shall be tested to ANSI 62.41 Categories A & B with no
damage to unit.
1.3
Description
.1
UPS Module.
.1
Voltage: Input/output voltage of UPS shall be user
selectable via front panel controls: 600 Volts.
.2
Input 347/600 Volts, three-phase wye, 4-wire-plus-ground.
.3
Output 120/208 Volts, three-phase wye, 4-wire-plus-ground.
.2
Output Load Capacity
.1
Specified output load capacity of UPS shall be rated in kVA
0.7 lagging power factor. UPS shall supply rated kVA from 0.5 to
0.7 lagging power factor. UPS shall also supply rated kW from 0.7
lagging to 0.9 leading power factor.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 2
.3
Battery Cabinet
.1
Battery Cells: Sealed, valve regulated lead acid.
.2
Reserve Time: 20 minutes at full load, with 25 deg. ambient
temperature.
.3
Recharge time: to 95% capacity within ten (10) times
discharge time. The battery charger shall be temperature
compensated and be capable of recharging the battery at a slower
(selectable) rate of 20 times the discharge time.
.4
Modes of Operation:
.1
UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line reverse
transfer system in the following modes:
.1
Normal: The critical AC load is continuously supplied
by UPS inverter. Input converter derives power from utility
AC source and supplies power to inverter while
simultaneously float-charging to storage battery.
.2
Emergency: Upon failure of utility AC power, inverter
obtains power from battery without interruption. There shall
be no interruption in power to critical load failure or
restoration of utility AC source.
.3
Recharge: Upon restoration of utility AC power, after
utility AC power outage, converter shall automatically
restart and assume inverter and battery recharge loads.
.4
Bypass: In case of internal fault, or should inverter
overload capacity be exceeded, static transfer switch shall
transfer load from inverter to bypass source with no
interruption in power to critical AC load.
.5
AC Input to UPS
.1
Voltage Configuration: three-phase wye, 4-wire plug ground.
.2
Voltage Range: 468-762 VAC +27%, -18% at 600V nominal.
.3
Frequency: 45 to 65 Hz.
.4
Power Factor: 0.95 lagging minimum over entire load range
of UPS.
.5
Inrush Current: 116A peak for one cycle maximum at nominal
208V input.
.6
Current Limit: 125% of nominal AC input current maximum.
.7
Current Distortion: 30% THE maximum from 50% load to full
load.
.8
Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per
criteria listed in ANSI C62.41-1991, Categories A and B.
.6
AC Output, UPS Inverter
.1
Voltage Configuration: 120/208, three-phase, 4-wire plus
ground.
.2
Voltage Regulation: +/- 1% three-phase RMS average for
balanced three-phase load, +/- 1.5% for 100% unbalanced load, for
combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load,
battery voltage, ambient temperature, and load power factor.
.3
Frequency: Nominal 60 Hz.
.4
Frequency Slew Rate: 1.0 Hertz per second default. Field
selectable from 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2 and 3 Hz per second.
.5
Phase Displacement: 120 deg +/-1 deg for balanced and
unbalanced loads.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 3
.6
Bypass Line Sync Range: From +/-0.1 to +/- 5.0 Hz in 0.1 Hz
increments, user selectable.
.7
Voltage Distortion: 2% total harmonic distortion (THD) for
linear loads at 208V. 3.5% THD maximum for 100% 3:1 crest factor
load at 208V, with 3% maximum single harmonic at 100% non-linear
loading.
.8
Load Power Factor Range: 0.9 leading to 0.5 lagging.
.9
Output Power Rating: Rated kVA from 0.5 to 0.7 lagging
power factor, rated kW from 0.7 lagging to 0.9 leading power
factor. Rated kW is rated kVA times 0.7 power factor.
.10 Overload Capability: (on inverter) 125% for 10 minutes,
150% for 30 seconds, 100% continuous rating.
.11 Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: +/- 5% from nominal
settings.
.12 Step-Load Transient Response: Voltage will not exceed +/1% of nominal rated voltage for linear step-load change up to
100% of UPS rating.
.13 Transient Recovery Time: to within 1% of output voltage
within 1 cycle.
.14 Load Unbalance: Maximum 100% of rated phase current.
.15 Noise Attenuation: With isolated neutral. 80 dB up to 100
kHz, common mode, 60 dB up to 100 kHz, transverse mode.
.7
1.4
AC Output, Static Bypass
.1
Overload Capability: >2,000% static switch automatically
shuts off. 2.000% - 2 cycles, 200% 30 seconds, 150% 10 minutes,
110% continuous rating.
.2
Surge Withstand Capability: ANSI C62.41, Categories A and
B.
.3
Detect and Transfer Time: less than 1 millisecond for
overloads, less than 4 milliseconds for faults.
Environmental Conditions
.1
The UPS shall be able to withstand the following environmental
conditions without damage or degradation of operating
characteristics:
.1
Operating Ambient Temperature:
.1
UPS Module: 32 to 104 deg F (0 to 40 deg C).
.2
Battery: 77 +/- 9 deg F (25 +/- 5 deg C).
.2
Storage/Transport Ambient Temperature.
.1
-4 to 158 deg F (-20 to 70 deg C) without batteries.
.2
-26 to +104 deg F (-32 to +40 deg C) with batteries.
NOTE: Maximum recommended storage temperature for batteries
is 25 deg C for up to six months.
.3
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
.4
Altitude: Operating to 6,000 ft. (2,000 meters) above Mean
Sea Level. Derated 5% per kilometer above 2 km. Storage/Transport
to 40,000 ft. (12,200 meters) above Mean Seal Level.
.5
Electrostatic Discharge: Withstand maximum 25kV spark
discharge, also withstand minimum 5 kV with 5A/NS rise and 10A
vertical transverse. UPS shall continue to operate without
damage.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.6
1.5
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 4
Audible Noise: 57 dBA at 1 meter from surface of the UPS.
Quality Assurance
.1
Manufacturer Qualifications:
.1
Minimum of five year's experience in design, manufacture
and testing of solid-state UPS systems is required. Manufacturer
shall be ISO9001 certified.
.2
Factory Testing:
.1
Before shipment, manufacturer shall fully and completely
test system to assure compliance with specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Fabrication
.1
Materials
.1
All materials shall be new, of current manufacture, high
grade, free from all defects and shall not have been in prior
service except as required during factory testing.
.2
Maximum working voltage, current and di/dt of all
solid-state power components and electronic devices shall not
exceed 75% of ratings established by manufacturer. Operating
temperature of solid-state component/sub-assemblies shall not be
greater than 75% of ratings. Electrolytic capacitors shall be
computer grade and be operated at no more than 95% of their
voltage rating at maximum rectifier charging voltage.
.2
Wiring
.1
Wiring practices, materials and coding shall be in
accordance with requirements of National Electrical Code (NFPA
70). All bolted connections of bus bars, lugs, and cables shall
be in accordance with requirements of National Electrical Code
and other applicable standards. All electrical power connections
are to be torqued to required value.
.2
Provision shall be made for power cables to enter or leave
from both top and bottom of UPS cabinet.
.3
Construction and Mounting
.1
UPS unit, comprised of front-end coverter, battery charger,
high-frequency isolation transformer, inverter, and static
transfer switch, shall be housed in single free-standing NEMA
type 1 enclosure. Casters and leveling feet shall be provided for
ease of installation. Front access only shall be required for
expedient servicing, adjustments, and installation. UPS cabinet
shall be structurally adequate for forklift handling.
.2
UPS cabinet shall be cleaned, primed, and painted with
manufacturer's standard color. UPS shall be constructed of
replaceable subassemblies. Like assemblies and like components
shall be interchangeable.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 5
.4
Cooling
.1
Cooling shall be by forced-air with internally-mounted,
fans to minimize audible noise output. Fan power shall be
provided by UPS.
.2
Thermal design, along with all thermal sensors, shall be
coordinated with protective circuits before excessive component
or internal cabinet temperatures are exceeded.
.3
Temperatures shall be displayed on front panel for input
converter, inverter, and battery. Warning alarm shall be issued
for high temperature readings. Automatic shutdown shall occur
when manufacturer's maximum operating temperature is exceeded.
Load shall be automatically transferred to bypass.
.5
Grounding
.1
AC output neutral shall be electrically isolated from UPS
chassis. UPS chassis shall have equipment ground terminal.
Provision for local bonding shall be provided.
2.2
Components
.1
Input Converter
.1
General
.1
The term input converter shall denote solid-state
equipment and controls necessary to convert incoming AC
power. Input converter shall be part of an assembly known as
the Power Factor Corrector (PFC) which provides power to
inverter while also actively improving input power usage to
95% (0.95 power factor).
.2
Input Protection
.1
UPS shall have built-in protection against
undervoltage, overcurrent, and overvoltage conditions
including low-energy surges, introduced on primary AC source
and bypass source. UPS shall sustain category A & B input
surges without damper per criteria listed in ANSI
C62.41-1980 (IEEE 587).
.3
AC Input Current Limiting
.1
Input converter shall automatically limit input
current. UPS output overloads shall be supplied from input
converter. Battery charger shall draw no more than 25% of
rated full load input current.
.4
Fuse Failure Protection
.1
Input lines shall be fused with fast-acting fuses, so
loss of any one power semiconductor shall not cause
cascading failures.
.5
DC Filter
.1
Battery charger shall have output filter to minimize
ripple voltage into battery. Under no conditions shall
ripple voltage into battery exceed 2% RMS.
.6
Automatic Restart
.1
Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility
AC power outage and prior to UPS automatic end-of-discharge
shutdown, input converter shall automatically restart, and
assume inverter and battery recharge loads.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.7
.8
2.3
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 6
.2
Upon restoration of utility AC power, after utility AC
power outage and after automatic end-of-discharge shutdown,
input converter shall automatically restart, walk-in, and
assume the inverter and battery recharge loads. UPS shall be
configurable for automatic or manual restart. This function
shall be user-selectable from UPS control panel or remote
terminal.
Battery Recharge
.1
Charger circuitry shall be capable of producing
battery charging current sufficient to replace 95% of
battery discharge power within 10 times the discharge time.
After battery is recharged, charger shall maintain battery
at full charge until next emergency operation. Battery
recharge shall be temperature compensated and microprocessor
controlled to prolong battery life.
Overvoltage Protection
.1
There shall be DC overvoltage protection so that if DC
voltage exceeds the pre-set limit, UPS will shutdown
automatically and critical load will be transferred to
bypass.
Inverter (Output Converter)
.1
General
.1
The term inverter shall denote solid-state equipment and
controls to convert power from input convertor or battery to
regulated AC power for supporting the critical load. At the
output, there shall be three independently-controlled inverters;
one for each phase. The inverters shall produce 50 or 60 hertz
(selectable) using insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs)
switching at 20 kHz, above the audible frequency range and
without low frequency magnetic components. Each inverter shall be
of pulse with modulated (PWM) design capable of providing the
specified AC output.
.2
Overload Capability
.1
The inverter shall be capable of supplying current at
regulated voltage for overloads exceeding 100% and up to 150% of
full load current. A visual indicator and audible alarm shall
indicate overload operation. For greater currents, the inverter
shall have electronic current-limiting protection to prevent
damage to components. The inverter shall be self-protecting
against any magnitude of connected output overload. Inverter
control logic shall sense and disconnect the inverter from the
critical AC load without the requirement to clear protective
fuses. The UPS shall transfer the load to bypass when overload
capacity is exceeded.
.3
Phase Balance
.1
Electronic controls shall be provided to regulate each
phase so that an unbalanced loading will not cause the output
voltage to go outside the specified voltage regulation or phase
displacement.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 7
.4
Fuse Failure Protection
.1
Each inverter unit shall be fused with fast-acting fuses,
so that loss of any one power semiconductor will not cause
cascading failures.
.5
Inverter Shutdown
.1
For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical load,
the inverter control electronics shall instantaneously turn off
the inverter transistors. Simultaneously, the static transfer
switch shall be turned on to maintain continuous power to the
critical load.
.6
Inverter DC Protection
.1
The inverter shall be protected by the following disconnect
levels:
.1
DC Overvoltage Shutdowns
.2
DC Undervoltage Shutdowns (End of Discharge)
.7
Overdischarge Protection
.1
To prevent battery damage from overdischarging, the UPS
control logic shall automatically raise the shutdown voltage
setpoint as discharge time increases beyond fifteen (15) minutes.
The automatic shutdown voltage adjustment ramp shall be a linear
function starting with 1.63 volts per cell at 15 minutes and
increasing to 1.83 volts per cell at 90 minutes after beginning
of battery discharge. The shutdown voltage shall not be less than
1.67 volts per cell at 30 minutes and not less than 1.75 volts
per cell at 60 minutes.
.8
Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment
.1
A manual control shall be provided to adjust the inverter
output voltage from +/- 5% of the nominal value. Adjustment shall
be made from the control pad on the front of the UPS.
.9
Output Frequency
.1
The output frequency of the inverter shall track input
frequency (when input frequency is within limits) and be
controlled by an ocscillator. When free-running, the oscillator
shall be temperature compensated and hold the inverter output
frequency to +/-0.1% for steady state and transient conditions.
Drift shall not exceed 0.1% during a 24-hour period. Total
frequency deviation, including short time fluctuations and drift,
shall not exceed 0.1% from the rated frequency.
2.4
Static-Bypass Switch
.1
General
.1
A static transfer switch and bypass circuit shall be
provided as an integral part of the UPS. That static switch shall
be a naturally commuted high-speed static (SCR-type) device rated
to conduct full load current continuously. The switch shall have
an overload rating of 110% rated load continuously. 150% rated
load for ten minutes, 200% rated load for 30 seconds, and 2,000%
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 8
rated load for two cycles. The static bypass shall shut down if
these overload conditions are exceeded. The static transfer
switch control logic shall contain an automatic transfer control
circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals, and
operating and alarm conditions. This control circuit shall
provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to an alternate
bypass source (or normal input source). Transfers shall be made
when an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPS, without
exceeding the transient limits specified herein.
.2
Uninterrupted Transfer
.1
The transfer control logic shall automatically turn on the
static transfer switch, transferring the critical AC load to the
bypass source, after the transfer logic senses any of the
following conditions:
.1
Inverter overload capacity exceeded
.2
Critical AC load overvoltage or undervoltage
.3
Battery protection period expired.
.4
UPS fault condition.
.2
Uninterrupted Retransfer
.1
Retransfer of the critical AC load from the bypass
source to the inverter output shall be automatically
initiated unless inhibited by manual control. The transfer
control logic shall inhibit an automatic retransfer of the
critical load to the inverter if one of the following
conditions exists:
.1
Inverter out of synchronizations with bypass.
.2
Overload condition exists in excess of inverter
full load rating
.3
UPS fault condition present
.4
More than 15 transfer attempts in a 20-minute
period
.3
Display and Controls
.1
The UPS shall be provided with a microprocessor based
unit status display and controls section designed for
convenient and reliable user operation. All of the operator
controls and monitors shall be located on the front of the
UPS cabinet. The monitoring functions such as metering,
status and alarms shall be displayed on a four line, 64
character alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). The
display unit includes a membrane overlay with tactile dome
buttons for control, and a guarded, red pushbutton for local
emergency power off. Additional features of the monitoring
system shall include:
.2
Menu-driven display with text format
.3
Real time clock (time and date)
.4
Alarm history with time and date stamp
.5
Battery backed-up memory
.4
Metering
.1
The following parameters shall be displayed:
.1
Input AC voltage line-to-line
.2
Input AC current for each phase
.3
Input frequency
.4
Battery voltage
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.5
.6
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 9
.5
Battery charge/discharge current
.6
Output AC voltage line-to-line and
line-to-neutral for each phase
.7
Output AC current for each phase
.8
Output frequency
.9
Percent of rated load being supplied by the UPS
.10 Output kVA and kW for each phase
.11 Battery time remaining during battery operation
.12 Operating temperature of input converter,
inverter, and internal battery.
Status Messages
.1
The following UPS status messages shall be displayed:
.1
Normal operation
.2
UPS on battery, (and time remaining)
.3
System shutdown
.4
Start up sequence aborted
.5
Battery test enabled/disabled
.6
System time set by operator
.7
Load on bypass
Alarm Messages
.1
The following alarm messages shall be displayed:
.1
Input voltage out of tolerance
.2
Bypass voltage out of tolerance
.3
UPS on battery
.4
Site wiring error
.5
Output undervoltage
.6
Output overvoltage
.7
Incorrect input frequency
.8
Output overload
.9
Overload Phase A
.10 Overload Phase B
.11 Overload Phase C
.12 Temporary overload
.13 Charger failure
.14 Battery failed test
.15 Cannot execute battery test: not recharged
.16 Cannot execute battery test at this time
.17 Logic error
.18 Memory failure ROM
.19 Memory failure RAM
.20 UPS overtemp
.21 External shutdown initiated (remote or local EPO
activated
.22 Fan failure
.23 Charger battery voltage too high
.24 Charger battery voltage too low
.25 Charger blown fuse
.26 Low battery shutdown
.27 Low battery warning (adjustable 1 to 99 minutes)
.28 DC bus overvoltage
.29 PFC bus voltage high
.30 PFC bus voltage low
.31 PFC hardware shutdown
.32 System shutdown impending due to over temperature
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.7
.8
.9
.10
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 10
.33 Inverter fault
.34 Inverter failure
.35 System shutdown: loss of control power
.36 Over temperature shutdown
.37 System output overloaded
.38 Bypass overload
.39 Fault load transferred to bypass
.40 Bypass power supply failure
.41 Bypass out of sync
.42 Bypass SCR open
.43 Bypass SCR short
.44 Bypass sensing failure
.45 Load on bypass
.46 Excessive retransfers attempted.
.47 An audible alarm shall be provided and activated
by any of the above alarm conditions.
RS-232C Interface Port
.1
An RS-232C interface port shall be provided for remote
display of UPS status information at a computer terminal (by
others). The format of the remote display shall mimic the
alpha-numeric display panel located on the UPS.
LAN Interface Port
.1
A DB25F interface port shall be provided for
signalling of UPS status information to a computer (by
others) using software for unattended shutdown. The signals
shall include; power fail, on battery, low battery and on
bypass.
Event Logging
.1
The UPS monitoring shall have the capability of
capturing the following:
.1
Input brownouts, blackouts and transients
.2
Frequency variations
.3
UPS alarms
.4
UPS external "on" and "off" commands
.5
UPS total ON time
.2
Information will bee categorized into two sections:
.1
Alarm History
.1
Event type
.2
Event date and time
.2
Input disturbance counter (resettable)
.1
Sum number of brownouts
.2
Sum number of blackouts
.3
Sum number of transients
.3
The number of events that shall be stored is 512,
after which the events will enter and leave the buffer
in first-in-first out order.
Controls
.1
UPS start-up and shutdown operations shall be
accomplished via the from LCD panel. An advisory display and
menu-driven user prompts shall be provided to guide the
operator through system operation without the use of
additional manuals. Push buttons shall be provided to
display the status of the UPS and to test and reset visual
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.11
2.5
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 11
and audible alarms. A guarded, red pushbutton switch for
local emergency power off shall also be provided.
On-Line Battery Test
.1
The UPS shall be provided with a menu driven On-Line
Battery Test feature. The test shall ensure the capability
of the battery to supply power to the inverter while the
load is supplied power in the normal mode. The battery test
feature shall have the following user selectable options,
accessible from the LCD panel and/or RS232C port:
.1
DC bus voltage threshold (pass/fail value)
.2
Interval between tests (2 to 9 weeks)
.3
Duration of test (30 to 900 seconds; factory
default is 30 seconds)
.4
Date and time of initial test
.5
Enable/disable test
.2
If the battery fails the test; the system shall
automatically do the following:
.1
Transfer the load to bypass
.2
Restart the rectifier/charger
.3
Display a warning message
.4
Sound an audible alarm
.5
Retransfer the load back to normal mode
Maintenance Bypass Switch
.1
Maintenance Bypass Switch - 600V, 3 Phase Input/120-208V,
3 Phase, 4W Output
.1
A manually operated three-phase maintenance bypass switch
shall be incorporated into the UPS cabinet to directly connect
the critical load to the input AC power source, completely
bypassing the input converter, inverter, static transfer switch,
all control and monitoring circuits, and all printed circuit
boards. The internal maintenance bypass switch and its terminals
shall be physically barrier and isolated from these components.
.2
Dual-Input Configuration
.1
This configuration alternative shall provide input
terminals for an alternate source to the static transfer switch
(bypass) separate from the feeder to the input converter. The
inverter output shall synchronize to the bypass source which may
be different from the input converter source. The internal
Maintenance Bypass Switch shall also be fed from the alternate
source.
.3
Input Coverter with 3% Input Current THD
.1
Added dynamic power factor correction circuitry shall
reduce the input current distortion to 3% maximum at all load
levels. Input power factor shall be corrected to 0.99 minimum.
.4
The maintenance bypass shall have integral transformer for 600V,
3 phase, 3 wire input, 120/208V, 3 Phase, 4 wire output. The
transformer shall be c/w taps to raise/lower the voltage if
required.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.6
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 12
Accessories (Communications Options)
.1
2.7
Communication interfaces will be provided by printed circuit
boards installed in the slot area of the UPS cabinet.
.1
Programmable Relays
.1
A programmable relay board with eight (8) double-pole,
double-throw relays shall be provided. The relays shall be
individually programmable to activate based on a selection
of a number of UPS events. Each relay shall be programmable
to function based on any one alarm or any combination of
alarms from the UPS. Any alarm or group of alarms shall be
able to trigger multiple relays.
.2
The UPS shall accept up to two alarm board (16 total
relays). EAch relay shall have two sets (2A/2B) of form C
contacts rated for 2 Amps at 30 VDC, 0.6 Amps at 125 VAC.
.2
Input Contact Isolator
.1
The Input Contact Isolator option shall accept eight
(8) normally-open customer relay inputs. These inputs shall
be treated like other UPS alarms. The UPS shall be
programmable to act on these alarms exactly like internally
generated alarms. The user shall be able to program the name
of the input alarm through the LCD panel or RS232 port.
.3
SiteScan Interface
.1
The SiteScan Interface shall provide communication
capability with Liebert Site monitoring (SiteScan or
Sitemaster 200) products.
.4
Provide programmed inputs to disable battery charging when
the emergency generator is running (contact input from the ATS).
External Accessories
.1
The Remote Status Panel's (2) shall be provided in a NEMA 1
enclosure for wall mounting with the following features:
.1
Load on UPS indicator (Green LED)
.2
Battery Discharge Alarm (Red LED)
.3
Low Battery Reserve Alarm (RED led)
.4
Load on Bypass Alarm (Red LED)
.5
UPS Alarm Condition (Red LED)
.6
New Alarm Condition (Red LED)
.7
Audible Alarm
.8
Lamp Test/Reset Pushbutton
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 13
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Field Quality Control
.1
3.2
The following inspections and test procedures shall be performed
by factory trained field service personnel during the UPS
startup.
.1
Visual Inspection
.1
Inspect equipment for signs of damage
.2
Verify installation per drawings
.3
Inspect cabinets for foreign objects
.4
Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly
sized and configured
.5
Inspect battery cases
.6
Inspect battery for proper polarity
.7
Verify all printed circuit boards are configured
properly
.2
Mechanical Inspection
.1
Check all control wiring connections for tightness
.2
Check all power wiring connections for tightness
.3
Check all terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for
tightness
.3
Electrical Inspection
.1
Check all fuses for continuity
.2
Confirm input voltage and phase rotation is correct
.3
Verify control transformer connections are correct for
voltage being used
.4
Assure connection and voltage of the battery
string(s).
Site Acceptance Testing
.1
The Contractor shall arrange for Powerware to conduct the
following tests on the UPS installation:
Note: Powerware will quote this testing to Div. 16 as it is not
part of the equipment cash allowance.
.2
Tests shall be done for both the normal and bypass positions.
.1
Load Tests
.1
Measure the following at no load, 25%, 50%, 100%, 110%
and 125% load:
.1
Input voltage (L-L)
.2
Input current
.3
Input power
.4
Input current harmonics
.5
Input power factor
.6
Output voltage (L-L)
.7
Output voltage (L-N)
.8
Output current
.9
Output power
.10 Output voltage harmonics (L-L)
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 14
.11 Output voltage harmonics (L-N)
.12 Output frequency
.13 Phase angle imbalance
.2
Transient Tests
.1
Measure voltage and current for following load steps:
.1
0-50%
.2
50-100%
.3
100-50%
.4
50-0%
.5
0-100%
.6
100-0%
.2
Measure voltage and current for the following transfer
and loss of supply tests:
.1
Removal of input supply
.2
Restoration of input supply
.3
Load transfer from module to bypass
.4
Load transfer from bypass to module
.3
Instrument checks
.1
Carry out the following instrument checks at no load,
50% load and 100% load against a calibrated (and certified)
meter:
.1
Input current (L-L)
.2
Input current
.3
Battery current
.4
Battery voltage
.5
Output voltage (L-L)
.6
Output voltage (L-N)
.7
Output current
.4
Battery discharge tests
.1
Measure the following at 20 minute intervals of
battery autonomy with the UPS supplying full load:
.1
DC bus voltage
.2
DC bus current
.3
Overall autonomy
.5
Carry out a 2 hour system heat run test with the UPS
supplying 100% load. Measure the parameters indicated in
Section A.
.6
Contractor shall tap internal transformers to suit best
performance of the system in both the normal and bypass
positions.
.7
Provide a load bank and connections and wiring for the load
bank testing. (25%, 50%, 100%, 110%, 125% and 150%).
.8
Demonstrate that battery charging is disabled when the
supply voltage is from the emergency generator.
.9
Demonstrate a maximum battery charging rate of 25% of
capacity.
3.3
Manufacturer's Field Service
.1
Service Personnel
.1
The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ an organization,
consisting of factory trained field service personnel dedicated
to the start-up, maintenance, and repair of UPS and power
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Uninterruptible
Power System
Section 16610
Page 15
equipment. The organization shall consist of regional and local
offices.
.2
The manufacturer shall provide a fully automated national
dispatch centre to coordinate field service personnel schedules.
One toll-free number shall reach a qualified support person 24
hours/day, 7 days/week, 365 days/year. If emergency service is
required, response time for a return call from the responding
field engineer shall be 20 minutes or less.
.3
An automated procedure shall be in place to insure that the
manufacturer is dedicating the appropriate technical support
resources to match escalating customer needs.
.2
3.4
Replacement Parts Stocking
.1
Parts shall be available through an extensive network to
ensure around-the-clock parts availability throughout the
country.
.2
Customer Support Parts Coordinators shall be on-call 24
hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year for immediate parts
availability.
Maintenance Contracts
.1
A complete offering of preventive and full service maintenance
Contracts for both the UPS system and battery system shall be
provided. An extended warranty and preventive maintenance package
shall be provided for a period of 2 years after warranty period.
Warranty and preventive maintenance service shall be performed by
factory-trained service personnel.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work
.1
Installation of anchor
devices, setting templates:
Section 03300
.2
Electrical General
Requirements
Section 16010
.3
Conduit
Section 16111
.4
Wire and Cables
Section 16122
.5
Automatic Load Transfer
Section 16627
1.2
Description of System
.1
Generating system consists of:
.1
Diesel engine.
.2
Alternator.
.3
Control panel.
.4
Automatic transfer equipment with manual bypass switch.
.5
Battery charger and battery.
.6
Automatic engine room ventilation system.
.7
Fuel supply system, fuel tank base.
.8
Exhaust system.
.9
Structural steel mounting base.
.10 Weatherproof/outdoor housing.
.2
System designed to operate in as emergency standby power source
unattended.
.3
Diesel generator set shall be designed to start and accept full
load in 10 seconds (with a one second start delay) and within the
voltage and frequency tolerances specified in C282.
.4
The engine, generator, and all major items of auxiliary
equipment shall be products of manufacturers regularly engaged in
the production of such equipment. The assembly shall be made up
of coordinated components by an organization regularly engaged in
assembling such equipment. The assembler or his authorized
distributor shall maintain a parts and service facility
satisfactory to the Contract Administrator.
.5
The manufacturers shall ensure that the requirements of the
specifications are met and that the equipment to be supplied can
be accommodated.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.3
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 2
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Include:
.1
Engine: make and model, with performance curves.
.2
Alternator: make and model.
.3
Voltage regulator: make, model and type.
.4
Automatic transfer switch with manual bypass switch: make,
model and type.
.5
Battery: make, type and capacity.
.6
Battery charger: make, type and model.
.7
Control panel: make and type of meters and controls.
.8
Governor type and model.
.9
Cooling air requirements in m 3/s.
.10 British standard or DIN rating of engine.
.11 Flow diagrams for:
.1
Diesel fuel.
.2
Lubricating oil.
.3
Cooling air.
.12 Dimensioned drawing showing complete generating set mounted
on steel base, including vibration isolators, exhaust system,
drip trays, and total weight.
.13 Continuous full load output of set at 0.8 PF lagging.
.14 Description of set operation including:
.1
Automatic starting and transfer to load and back to
normal power, including time in seconds from start of
cranking until unit reaches rated voltage and frequency.
.2
Manual starting.
.3
Automatic shut down and alarm on:
.1
Overcranking.
.2
Overspeed.
.3
High engine temp.
.4
Low lube oil pressure.
.5
Short circuit.
.6
Alternator overvoltage.
.7
Lube oil high temperature.
.8
Thermistor overtemperature on alternator.
.9
Low battery voltage/battery charge.
.10 Other shutdowns and alarms as required by CSA
C282.
.15 Submit engine generator set performance tests together with
shop drawings before manufacture of equipment. Tests shall have
been carried out on a prototype of the generating set series in
accordance with procedures certified by an independent testing
laboratory. Tests shall include the following:
.1
Max. power level.
.2
Max. motor starting capability.
.3
Single step load pick-up.
.4
Torsigraph analysis.
.5
Steady-state and transient voltage response.
.6
Steady-state and transient frequency response.
.7
Harmonic analysis and voltage waveform deviation.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 3
.8
Three phase circuit strength (mechanical and
electrical).
1.4
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for diesel generator for
incorporation into manual specified in Section 16010.
.2
Include in Operation and Maintenance Manual instructions for
particular unit supplied and not general description of units
manufactured by supplier and:
.1
Operation and maintenance instructions for engine,
alternator, control panel, automatic transfer switch, manual
bypass switch, battery charger, battery, fuel system, engine
ventilation system, exhaust system, accessories, etc. to permit
effective operation, maintenance and repair.
.2
Technical data:
.1
Illustrated parts lists with parts catalogue numbers.
.2
Schematic diagram of electrical controls.
.3
Flow diagrams for:
.1
Fuel system.
.2
Lubricating oil.
.3
Cooling system.
.4
Certified copy of factory test results.
.5
Certified copy of Site test results.
.6
Maintenance and overhaul instructions and schedules.
Complete set of service manuals are to be the same as those
issued to factory trained technicians.
.7
Precise details for adjustment and setting of time
delay relays or sensing controls which are required on Site
adjustment.
.8
Spare parts list.
1.5
Maintenance Materials
.1
1.6
Include:
.1
2 fuel filter replacement elements.
.2
2 lube oil filter replacement elements.
.3
2 air cleaner filter elements.
.4
2 sets of fuses for control panel.
.5
Special tools for unit servicing.
.6
3 pairs of ear protectors.
.7
1 set of belts.
Source Quality Control
.1
Factory test generator set including engine, alternator, control
panels, transfer switch, accessories, etc. to ensure compliance
with specifications and send certified test results to the
Contract Administratorprior to shipping.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.7
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 4
Site Test
.1
Provide on Site testing of complete generator set installation
including engine alternator, control panels, transfer switch and
accessories, environmental system, fuel system, etc. Testing
shall be performed by factory-trained representative of the
diesel generator set supplier.
.2
Ensure room environment control is operational and that all
controls required for generator set operation are fed from
emergency circuits.
.3
Notify Contract Administrator 7 days in advance of on-site test.
.4
Tests:
.1
Test procedure:
.1
Prepare blank forms and check sheet with spaces to
record data. At top of first sheet record:
.1
Date.
.2
Generator set serial no.
.3
Engine, make, model, serial no.
.4
Alternator, make, model, serial no.
.5
Voltage regulator, make and model.
.6
Rating of generator set, kW, kVA, V, A, r/min,
Hz.
.2
Mark check sheet and record data on forms in duplicate
as test proceeds.
.2
Tests:
.1
With 100% rated load, operate set for 6 hours, taking
readings at 30 minute intervals, and record following:
.1
Time of reading.
.2
Running time.
.3
Ambient temp in deg. C.
.4
Lube oil pressure in kPa.
.5
Lube oil temp in deg. C.
.6
Engine coolant temp in deg. C.
.7
Exhaust stack temp in deg. C.
.8
Alternator voltage: phase 1, 2, 3.
.9
Alternator current: phase 1, 2, 3.
.10 Power in kW.
.11 Frequency in Hz.
.12 Power Factor.
.13 Alternator stator temp in deg. C.
.2
At end of 6 hour run increase load to 110% rated
value, and take readings every 15 min for 1 h. (Prime power
units only).
.3
After completion of run, demonstrate operation of all
shut down devices and alarms including:
.1
Overcranking.
.2
Overspeed.
.3
High engine temp.
.4
Low lube oil pressure.
.5
Short circuit.
.6
Alternator overvoltage.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 5
.7
Low battery voltage, or no battery charge.
.8
Manual remote emergency stop.
.9
High alternator temperature.
.4
Next install continuous strip chart recorders to
record frequency and voltage variations during load
switching procedures with chart speed of 1.3 mm/s. Each load
change delayed until steady state conditions exist.
Switching increments to include:
.1
No load to full load to no load.
.2
No load to 70% load to no load.
.3
No load to 20% load to no load.
.4
20% load to 40% load to no load.
.5
40% load to 60% load to no load.
.6
60% load to 80% load to no load.
.3
Demonstrate:
.1
Automatic starting of set, automatic transfer of load
on failure of normal power and retransfer to normal power on
automatic control.
.2
Automatic shut down of engine on resumption of normal
power.
.3
Operation of manual bypass switch.
.4
That battery charger reverts to high rate charge after
cranking.
.5
Unit start and shut down on "Manual" control.
.6
Unit start and transfer on "Test" control.
.7
Unit start on "Engine start" control.
.8
Satisfactory performance of dampers in ventilating
system to provide adequate engine cooling.
.4
Demonstrate low oil pressure, high engine temperature and
other shutdown and alarm device operation without subjecting
engine to these excesses.
.5
Provide additional testing as required by Manitoba Building
Code, Canadian Electrical Code and CSA Standards.
1.8
Training
.1
Provide a minimum of 6 hours of "hands-on" training of personnel
in operation and maintenance procedures of all aspects of the
standby generating system.
.2
Training shall include system operation descriptions, review of
manual and automatic operation, review of controls, regular
maintenance procedures, etc.
.3
Provide a videotape of the training session for future use by
the City of Winnipeg.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Diesel Engine
.1
Diesel engine: to ISO 3046/1 - 1981.
.1
Engine: standard product of current manufacture, from
company regularly engaged in production of such equipment.
.2
Two or Four cycle, turbo charged and after cooled as required,
synchronous speed 1800 r/min.
.3
Capacity:
.1
Rated continuous power in kW at 1800 r/min, after
adjustment for power losses in auxiliary equipment necessary for
engine operation; to be calculated as follows:
Rated continuous output =
.1
Generator kW
Generator Eff @ FL
Under following Site conditions:
.1
Altitude: 500 m.
.2
Ambient temperature: 30 deg. C.
.3
Relative humidity: 90%.
.4
Cooling System:
.1
Liquid cooled: heavy duty industrial radiator mounted on
generating set base with engine driven pusher type fan to direct
air through radiator from engine side. Thermostatically
controlled, with ethylene glycol anti-freeze non-sludging above
minus 46 deg. Ensure radiation fan has sufficient capacity to
exhaust air through the plenum (and area wells where specified)
to provide proper cooling.
.2
To maintain manufacturer's recommended engine temperature
range at 10% continuous overload in ambient temperature of 40
deg. C.
.3
Block heater: thermostatically controlled liquid coolant
heater to allow engine to start in room ambient 0 deg. C.
.4
Provide flexible hose connections.
.5
Engine to have coolant temperature gauge.
.5
Fuel:
.1
Type A fuel oil: to CGSB 3-GP-6c.
.6
Fuel system: solid injection, mechanical fuel transfer pump with
hand primer, fuel filters and air cleaner, fuel rack solenoid
energized when engine running, flexible fuel line connections,
fuel oil pressure gauge, etc.
.7
Governor:
.1
Electronic type:
.1
Steady state speed band of plus or minus 0.5%.
.2
Isochronous speed regulation no load to full load.
.3
Adjustable isochronous to 5% droop.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 7
.4
Transient frequency variation shall not exceed 15% of
rated frequency when full load at rated power factor is
applied. Recovery to stable operation shall occur within
five seconds.
.8
Lubrication system:
.1
Pressure lubricated by engine driven pump.
.2
Lube oil filter: replaceable, full flow type, removable
without disconnecting piping.
.3
Lube oil cooler.
.4
Engine sump drain valve.
.5
Oil level dip-stick.
.6
Lube oil temperature gauge.
.7
Lube oil pressure gauge.
.9
Starting system:
.1
Positive shift, gear engaging starter 24 Vdc.
.2
Cranking limiter to provide 3 cranking periods of 10 s
duration, each separated by 5 second rest.
.3
Lead acid, 12 V storage batteries with sufficient capacity
to crank engine for 3 min at 0 deg. C without using more than 25%
of ampere hour capacity. To be complete with battery cables,
interconnectors and steel rack.
.4
Battery charger: constant voltage, solid state, two stage
from trickle charge at standby to boost charge after use.
Regulation: plus or minus 1% output for plus or minus 10% input
variation. Automatic boost for 6 h every 30 days. Equipped with
dc voltmeter, dc ammeter and on-off switch. Charger to be capable
of recharging completely discharged batteries to 80% capacity
within 12 hours.
.10
Vibration isolated engine instrument panel with:
.1
Lube oil pressure gauge.
.2
Lube oil temperature gauge.
.3
Coolant temperature gauge.
.4
Running time meter: non-tamper type.
.5
Fuel oil pressure gauge.
.11
Guards to protect personnel from hot and moving parts. Locate
guards so that normal daily maintenance inspections can be
undertaken without their removal.
.12
Drip tray.
.13
Connect the following alarms to a common supervisory trouble
zone in main fire alarm panel.
.1
Overcranking
.2
Overspeed
.3
High engine temperature
.4
Low lube oil pressure
.5
Short circuit
.6
Alternator overvoltage
.7
Low battery voltage or no battery charge
.8
Manual remote emergency stop
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.9
.10
.11
.12
.14
2.2
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 8
High alternator temperature
Low fuel
Generator fail
Generator running
All piping and connections to the engine and generator shall
include a flexible section supplied with the engine.
Alternator
.1
Alternator: to NEMA MG1.
.2
Rating: 1 phase, 120/240V, 3 wire, 60 Hz, continuous duty, 125°C
temperature rise.
.3
Output at 40 deg. C ambient:
.1
100% full load continuously.
.2
125% full load for 1 min.
.4
Revolving field, brushless, single bearing.
.5
Drip proof.
.6
Amortisseur windings.
.7
Synchronous type.
.8
Dynamically balanced rotor permanently aligned to engine by
flexible disc coupling.
.9
Exciter: rotating brushless or permanent magnet. The exciter
shall have capacity to provide 150% of required excitation at
rated load and voltage. Excitation shall provide for current
output of 300% for 10 seconds.
.10
EEMAC class H insulation on windings.
.11
Thermistors embedded in stator winding and connected to
alternator control circuitry.
.12
Voltage regulator: solid state thyristor controlled rectifiers
with phase controlled sensing circuit:
.1
Stability: 0.1% maximum voltage variation at any constant
load from no load to full load.
.2
Regulation: 0.5% maximum voltage deviation between no-load
steady state and full-load steady state.
.3
Transient: 10% maximum voltage dip on one-step application
of 0.8 PF full load.
.4
Transient: 15% maximum voltage rise on one-step removal of
0.8 PF full load.
.5
Transient: 2s maximum voltage recovery time with
application or removal of 0.8 PF full load.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 9
.6
Transient: 10% maximum voltage dip in most severe motor
starting condition.
.7
Transient voltage variation shall not exceed 20% of rated
voltage when full load at rated power factor is applied or
removed. Recovery to stable operation shall occur within two
seconds.
.13
2.3
Alternator: capable of sustaining 300% rated current for period
not less than 10 s permitting selective tripping of down line
protective devices when short circuit occurs.
Control Panel
.1
Totally enclosed, weather proof, mounted on generator with
vibration dampers.
.2
Panel door with formed edges and lockable handle with 2 keys.
.3
Flexible conductors between door and fixed panel.
.4
Instruments:
.1
Analogue or digital indicating type 2% accuracy,
rectangular scale, flush panel mounting:
.1
Voltmeter: ac, scale 0 to 750 V.
.2
Ammeter: ac, scale 0 to 125% of rated amperage.
.3
Wattmeter: scale 0 to 125% of rated kW.
.4
Frequency meter: scale 55 to 65 Hz.
.5
Power Factor meter.
.6
Running time meter.
.2
Voltmeter selector switch, rotary, panel mounting, four
position, labelled "Off-Phase A-Phase B-Phase C".
.3
Ammeter selector switch, rotary, maintained contacts, panel
mounting, designed to prevent opening of current circuits, four
position labelled "OFF- Phase A-Phase B-Phase C".
.4
Fuses for indicating instruments: miniature, glass, fast
acting, fitted at rear of instrument.
.5
Instrument Transformers
.1
Potential-dry type for indoor use:
.1
Ratio: 600 to 120.
.2
Rating: 600 V, 60 Hz, BIL 3 kV.
.2
Current-dry type for indoor use:
.1
Ratio: as required.
.2
Rating: 600 V, 60 Hz, BIL 3 kV.
.3
Positive action automatic short-circuiting device
in secondary terminals.
.5
Controls:
.1
Engine start button.
.2
Selector switch: Off-Auto-Manual.
.3
Engine emergency stop button and provision for remote
emergency stop button.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 10
.4
Alternator output breaker:
.1
Circuit breaker: bolt-on, moulded case, temperature
compensated for 40 deg. C ambient, dual thermal-magnetic
trip.
.5
Voltage control rheostat: mounted on the inside of the
control panel and to be screwdriver adjust type with locking nut.
.6
Operating lights, panel mounted:
.1
"Normal power" pilot light.
.2
"Emergency power" pilot light.
.3
Green pilot lights for breaker on and red pilot lights
for breaker off.
.7
Solid state indicator lights for alarm with 1 set manually
reset NO/NC form "C" contacts wired to terminal block for remote
annunciation on:
.1
Low fuel level.
.2
Low battery voltage or high battery voltage.
.3
Ventilation failure.
.4
Engine high temperature (above 110%).
.5
Engine low lube oil pressure (at 80%).
.6
Low coolant.
.8
Solid state controller for automatic shutdown and alarms
with 1 set manually reset NO/NC form "C" contacts wired to
terminal block for remote annunciation on:
.1
Engine overcrank.
.2
Engine overspeed.
.3
Engine high temperature (shutdown at 115%).
.4
Engine low lube oil pressure (shutdown at 40%).
.5
Short circuit.
.6
Alternator over voltage.
.9
Push to test lamp buttons.
.10 Provision for remote monitoring.
.11 All devices to be wired to a terminal block.
2.4
Structural Steel Mounting Base
.1
Complete generating set mounted on structural steel base of
sufficient strength and rigidity to protect assembly from stress
or strain during transportation, installation and under operating
conditions on suitable level surface.
.2
Assembly fitted with vibration isolators and control console
resiliently mounted.
.1
Spring type isolators with adjustable side snubbers and
adjustable for levelling.
.3
Sound insulation pads for installation between isolators and
concrete base.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.5
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 11
Exhaust System
.1
Super critical grade exhaust silencer with condensate drain,
plug and flanged couplings.
.2
Fittings and accessories as required.
.3
Provide sound criteria as part of the shop drawing submission.
2.6
Fuel System/Fuel Tank/Base Tank
.1
A UL listed, dual wall sub base 750 gallon auxiliary fuel tank
shall be provided which complies with local codes and ordinances.
The tank shall incorporate threaded pipe connections, fuel gauge,
low fuel level alarm contact, and leak leakage contact wired to
indicating light on Genset control panel, and a vent with locking
cap.
.2
Division 16 to fill fuel tank. After completion of testing,
2.7
Enclosure - Genset
.1
A steel, weather protective sound attentuated enclosure with a
minimum ambient capacity of 43°C (110°F) shall be provided. The
enclosure shall be painted dark bronze utilizing an
electrostatically applied, power baked polyester paint. All sheet
metal shall be painted prior to assembly to ensure all surfaces,
including edges, are fully painted to prevent rust. All hardware
shall be zinc plated or stainless steel. Doors shall be lockable
and utilize stainless steel hinges and locks. Coolant and oil
drains shall be piped to the edge of the Genset baseframe where
they shall be terminated with a locking capped NPT pipe fitting
accessible from the exterior of the enclosure. The circuit
breaker and control panel shall be mounted on the right hand side
of the enclosure and shall be located to allow easy access to
control and power wiring. A super critical grade silencer shall
be mounted on the inside of the enclosure. The enclosure shall be
fully winterized and insulated with 2" Aeroflex with perforated
steel liner. Sound attentuation shall be 75 dbA at 7 meters. The
enclosure shall include motorized intake and discharge louvers
with 15 degree snow hoods. The interior of the enclosure shall
include a 60 amp 120/240 Volt combination panel and breakers, 5kW
heater, two incandescent light fixtures complete with 100 watt
lamps, one light switch, and one convenience GFI duplex
receptacle. The block heater and battery charger shall be
connected by supplier.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.8
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 12
Remote Alarm Panel
.1
Remote 16 point, LED annunciator c/w points as noted on plans.
.2
LED's to be red colour for "faults"; amber for pre-alarms.
.3
Reverse polarity protected.
.4
Lamp test pushbutton.
.5
Short circuit protection.
.6
Environmentally sealed.
2.9
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section
16010 - Electrical - General Provisions.
.2
Control panel:
.1
Size 5 nameplates for controls such as alternator breakers
and program selector switch.
.2
Size 2 nameplates for meters, alarms, indicating lights and
minor controls.
2.10
Fabrication
.1
Shop
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
assemble generating unit including:
Base.
Engine and radiator.
Alternator.
Control panel.
Battery and charger.
Automatic transfer equipment.
Base fuel tank.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Locate generating unit and install as indicated.
.2
Complete wiring and interconnections as indicated.
.3
The initial start-up shall be performed by factory-trained
representative of the diesel generator set supplier.
.4
Start generating set and test to ensure correct performance of
components.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.5
3.2
Power Generation
Diesel
Section 16622
Page 13
Provide wiring between generator control panel and transfer
switch in conduit. Wiring as required.
Testing
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Provisions and "Site Tests" in Part 1.
.2
Notify Contract Administrator 7 working days in advance of test
date.
.3
Provide and install necessary load banks for testing.
.4
Provide fuel for testing and leave full tanks on acceptance.
.5
Run unit on load for minimum period of 4 h to show load carrying
ability, stability of voltage and frequency, and satisfactory
performance of dampers in ventilating system to provide adequate
engine cooling.
.6
At end of test run, check battery voltage to demonstrate battery
charger has returned battery to fully charged state.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Automatic Load
Transfer Equipment
Section 16627
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Service Entrance Board
Section 16421
.3
Secondary Switchgear
(120/208V & 347/600V)
Section 16426
.4
Power Generation Diesel
Section 16622
1.2
Design Criteria
.1
1.3
Automatic load transfer equipment to:
.1
Monitor voltage of normal power supply.
.2
Initiate cranking of standby generator unit on normal power
failure or abnormal voltage.
.3
Transfer load from normal supply to standby unit when
standby unit reaches rated speed and voltage.
.4
Transfer load from standby unit to normal power supply when
normal power restored.
.5
Shut down standby unit.
.6
The transfer switch shall have an integral bypass to allow
manual transfer of load to either normal source or emergency
source.
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Include:
.1
Make, model and type.
.2
Single line diagram and wiring schematics showing controls,
relays, etc.
.3
Description of equipment operation including:
.1
Automatic starting and transfer to standby unit and
back to normal power.
.2
Test control.
.3
Manual control.
.4
Automatic shutdown.
1.4
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for automatic load
transfer equipment for incorporation into manual specified in
Section 16010.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Automatic Load
Transfer Equipment
Section 16627
Page 2
.2
Detailed instructions to permit effective operation, maintenance
and repair.
.3
Technical data:
.1
Schematic diagram of components, controls and relays.
.2
Illustrated parts lists with parts catalogue numbers.
.3
Certified copy of factory test results.
1.5
Source Quality Control
.1
Complete equipment, including transfer mechanism, controls,
relays and accessories factory assembled and tested.
.2
Tests:
.1
Operate equipment both mechanically and electrically to
ensure proper performance.
.2
Check selector switch, in 4 positions (Test, Auto, Manual,
Engine Start) and record results.
.3
Check voltage sensing and time delay relay settings.
.4
Check:
.1
Automatic starting and transfer of load on failure of
normal power.
.2
Retransfer of load when normal power supply resumed.
.3
Automatic shutdown.
.4
In-phase monitor operation (where provided).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Meters: to CAN3-C17.
.2
Instrument transformers: to CAN3-C13.
.3
Contactors: to NEMA ICS.
2.2
Automatic Transfer Switch
.1
Three phase contactors mounted on common frame, in double throw
arrangement, mechanically and electrically interlocked, solenoid
operated, with CSA sprinkler proof enclosure. To have integral
bypass.
.2
Rated: 347/600V, 60 Hz. Refer to drawings for amperage rating.
.3
Main contacts: silver surfaced, protected by arc disruption
means including separate arcing contacts, arc splitters and blow
out coils for load current.
.4
Copper buswork.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Automatic Load
Transfer Equipment
Section 16627
Page 3
.5
Switch and relay contacts, coils, spring and control elements
accessible for inspection and maintenance from front of panel
without removal of switch panel or disconnection of drive
linkages and power conductors.
.6
Auxiliary contact: to initiate emergency generator start-up on
failure of normal power.
.7
The transfer switch shall have an in-phase monitor to ensure
that the transfer or re-transfer only takes place when both the
normal and emergency sources are within tolerances.
.8
Short circuit withstand rating: 42 kA RMS symmetrical at rated
voltage.
.9
Inrush current rating minimum 20 times rated current.
.10
Sprinklerproof.
2.3
Controls
.1
Selector switch - four position "Test" "Auto" "Manual" "Engine
start".
.1
Test position - Normal power failure simulated. Engine
starts and transfer takes place. Return switch to "Auto" to stop
engine.
.2
Auto position - Normal operation of transfer switch on
failure of normal power; retransfers on return of normal voltage
and shuts down engine.
.3
Manual position - Transfer switch may be operated by manual
handle but transfer switch will not operate automatically and
engine will not start.
.4
Engine start position - Engine starts but unit will not
transfer unless normal power supply fails. Switch must be
returned to "Auto" to stop engine.
.2
Control transformers: dry type with 120 V secondary to isolate
control circuits from:
.1
Normal power supply.
.2
Emergency power supply
.3
Relays: continuous duty, industrial control type, with wiping
action contacts rated 10 A minimum:
.1
Time Delay adjustment from 0.5 to 6 seconds to prevent
activation of 'engine start' on momentary normal voltage
fluctuation. Factory set at 1 second.
.2
Time Delay adjustment from 0 to 60 seconds on transfer to
emergency position after emergency source is available. Factory
set at 0 seconds.
.3
Time Delay adjustment from 0 to 5 minutes on retransfer to
normal. Factory set at 3 minutes. Should the emergency source
fail during this timing period, there shall be an immediate
retransfer to the normal source.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Automatic Load
Transfer Equipment
Section 16627
Page 4
.4
Time delay adjustment from 0 - 4 minutes to delay resetting
of 'engine start' signal after retransfer to the normal source
Engine cool down provision. Factory set at 4 minutes.
.5
Adjustable, close differential, voltage sensing on all
phases of the normal source. Pickup voltage adjustable from 85%
510V to 100% 600V of nominal. Dropout voltage is adjustable from
75% to 98% of pickup. Factory set at: Pickup 90% 540V Dropout
85%510V.
.6
Adjustable, close differential, voltage sensing on two
phases of the emergency source. Pickup voltage adjustable from
85% 510V to 100% 600V of nominal. Factory set at: Pickup 95%
570V.
.7
Adjustable frequency sensing of emergency source. Pickup
adjustable from 90% 54 Hz to 100% 60 Hz. Factory set at: Pickup
95% 57 Hz.
.8
Three spare normally open auxiliary contacts and three
spare normally closed auxiliary contacts shall be provided.
2.4
Accessories
.1
Pilot lights to indicate switch position, green for normal, red
for standby, mounted in panel. Lamps to be LED type.
.2
Solid neutral bar.
.3
Auxiliary relay to provide 8 N.O. and 8 N.C. contacts for remote
alarms.
.4
Solid state electronic monitors:
.1
Voltage sensing, three phase with time delay and circuit
opening closing arrangement.
.2
Under Over frequency sensing, with adjustable differential
for nominal frequency of 60 Hz with 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. contacts,
repetitive accuracy plus or minus 0.2 Hz.
.3
In-phase monitor.
.5
'Elevator Emergency Mode Bypass' Keyswitch (local):
.1
A keyswitch shall be provided to bypass the elevator
emergency mode during testing only. This will allow the elevators
to function normally during a transfer switch test.
.6
For each elevator controller, provide the following auxiliary
contacts:
.1
Two auxiliary contacts that are closed when on normal power
and open when on emergency power.
.2
One auxiliary contact that is closed except for an
adjustable period of time (0 to 50 seconds adjustment, set
initially at 15 seconds) prior to power supply transfer in either
direction, from normal to emergency or from emergency to normal.
.7
Provide a contact output to each UPS (2) to close when the
generator is supplying power to the building. Contact is used
to disable UPS battery charging.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.5
Automatic Load
Transfer Equipment
Section 16627
Page 5
Bypass
.1
The transfer switch shall either come with an integral bypass or
shall be cabled to an external bypass mechanism.
.1
The bypass mechanism shall be constructed so as to provide
no interruption to the load during operation.
.2
The bypass mechanism shall be mechanically interlocked to
prevent any chance of connecting the utility and emergency
sources.
.3
The bypass mechanism shall give visual indication of each
position.
.4
External bypass switches shall meet the following:
.1
Provide in separate sprinklerproof enclosures by-pass
switches located as shown on drawings.
.2
By-pass switches shall be totally enclosed,
sprinklerproof, dead front, fabricated from formed and
welded #12 gauge steel and front accessible only. Enclosure
shall be painted uniformly with two coats of ASA61 grey.
Prior to painting enclosure shall be cleaned and throroughly
phosphatized. Enclosure to have a door with lock. Locks
shall be keyed the same as the panelboards.
.3
By-pass switches shall be moulded case non-auto type
as indicated on drawings. Breakers shall contain auxiliary
contacts for breaker position. These contacts shall be wired
to by-pass position indicating lights. Interrupting capacity
of breakers to match rating of upstream breakers feeding the
by-pass switch.
.4
Enclosure shall have a 120 Volt section at the top for
by-pass indicating lights. The 120 Volt section shall be
barriered from the circuit breaker section. This section
shall contain transformer (if required), fusing, terminal
strips for all wire terminations, heavy duty watertight,
neon indicating lights, etc. as required. All wiring shall
be identified. Refer to drawings.
.5
Bus bars shall be tin plated copper braced to
withstand a short circuit current of 50,000 Amperes
symmetrical at 600 Volts. Neutral bus, where required, shall
be full size. Ground bus shall be copper.
.6
Supply and install slide-bolt type interlocking as
shown on drawing. Sliding bar safety interlock shall not
interfere with by-pass switch cover/trim removal/
replacement. Sliding bar shall have spring loaded ball and
socket momentary stops at each position. It shall also be
padlockable in the three operating positions.
.7
Supply and install lamacoids identifying each by-pass
breaker and complete sequence of by-pass operation as
directed by Contract Administrator. Supply and install
schematic engraved on a lamacoid. Prior to fabrication,
submit shop drawing to Contract Administrator for review and
approval.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.6
Automatic Load
Transfer Equipment
Section 16627
Page 6
Acceptable Manufacturer
.1
2.7
Thompson Technology Incorporated. Series TS870SE automatic
transfer switches with bypass.
Equipment Identification
.1
2.8
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section
16010 - Electrical General Requirements.
Fabrication
.1
Shop
.1
.2
.3
.4
assemble transfer equipment including:
Mounting base and enclosure.
Transfer switch and operating mechanism.
Control transformers and relays.
Accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Locate, install and connect transfer equipment.
.2
Check solid state monitors and adjust as required.
.3
Install and connect battery and remote alarms.
.4
Wire and connect to elevator controllers, gen set, fire alarm
panel, etc. as required.
3.2
Field Quality Control
.1
Factory trained and authorized technician of the transfer switch
manufacturer shall set up, test and commission the automatic
transfer switch and controls.
.2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical
General Requirements.
.3
Energize transfer equipment from normal power supply.
.4
Set selector switch in "Test" position to ensure proper standby
start, running, transfer, retransfer. Return selector switch to
"Auto" position to ensure standby shuts down.
.5
Set selector switch in "Manual" position and check to ensure
proper performance.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Automatic Load
Transfer Equipment
Section 16627
Page 7
.6
Set selector switch in "Engine start" position and check to
ensure proper performance. Return switch to "Auto" to stop
engine.
.7
Set selector switch in "Auto" position and open normal power
supply disconnect. Standby should start, come up to rated voltage
and frequency, and then load should transfer to standby. Allow to
operate for 10 min, then close main power supply disconnect. Load
should transfer back to normal power supply and standby should
shutdown.
.8
Repeat, at 30 minute intervals, 7 times, complete test with
selector switch in each position, for each test.
.9
Test bypass switch for correct operation.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Lightning Protection
Section 16692
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCE
.1
1.2
Section 16010.
RELATED WORK
.1
Comply with relevant sections of this and other Divisions of the
specification, including Section 16010 Electrical General
Requirements.
.2
Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of CSA-B72
for the specific installation class of the building and the
results of the grounding study.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
98% conductivity, commercial lighnting protection cables shall
be high grade copper cables, size as shown minimum #4/0 unless
shown otherwise.
.2
Ground electrodes shall be copper clad 20mm (3/4") diameter x
3000mm long (3/4" x 10 ft.) rods and/or 1m sq. (36") x 20 ga.
copper plates.
.3
Connectors shall be cadweld or thermoweld or Burndy `High
Press'.
.4
Earth enhancing compound shall be of the 2 part site mix gel
type.
.5
Chemical additives for ground resistance reduction, shall be
suitable for vertical or horizontal configurations.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Lightning Protection
Section 16692
Page 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
The lightning protection system shall be installed by an
approved Subcontractor licensed to carry out such installation.
(Western Lightning Protection)
.2
Provide required modifications to ensure proper resistance
ratings. If required, use Earth Enhancing or Chemical Rod
treatment methods.
.3
All metal projections through or masses of metal above the roof
shall be bonded to the lightning protection system. All high
points of the roofs shall be covered by cables in addition to
standard required spacing.
.4
All connections, cable to cable, and cable to steel or other
metals shall be made using cadwelded copper connections or using
specified mechanical methods, after proper cleaning and
brightening.
.5
The roof cables shall form a crossed loop around the periphery
of the roof run within 600mm of the edge, and shall be fastened
at 1200mm centres, using manufactured bronze flat roof cable
anchors.
.6
The base perimeter loop and cross loop shall be connected to
building lightning protection system as indicated on drawings.
.7
At downlead cable locations, provide a suitable fitting as.
required.
.8
Connect all downlead conductors at grade to the grounding loop
cable.
.9
All down conductors shall be installed on face of building in
rigid PVC conduit with offsets, for cable strain relief.
.10
Upon completion of the lightning protection system, the
Contractor shall submit a certificate of installation and an
inspector's report to the Contract Administrator.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.3
Wires and Cable
Section 16122
.4
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
.5
Work in Existing Building
Section 16195
1.2
References
.1
CAN/ULC-S524 Installation of Fire Alarm Systems
.2
ULC-S525 Audible Signal Appliances, Fire Alarm
.3
CAN/ULC-S526 Visual Signal Appliances for Fire Alarm Systems
.4
CAN/ULC-S527 Control Units, Fire Alarm
.5
ULC-S528 Manually Actuated Signalling Boxes, Fire Alarm
.6
CAN/ULC-S529 Smoke Detectors, Fire Alarm
.7
ULC-S530 Heat Actuated Fire Detectors, Fire Alarm
.8
CAN/ULC-S531 Smoke Alarms
.9
CAN/ULC-S536 Inspection and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems
.10
CAN/ULC-S537 Verification of Fire Alarm Systems
.11
Manitoba Building Code
1.3
Description of System
.1
This specification provides the requirements for the supply and
installation, programming, testing, commissioning and
verification of a complete Addressable Analog Fire Detection
System. The system shall include, but not be limited to: control
panels, amplifiers, DGPs, Printer, remote annunciators, graphic
annunciators, input and control modules, alarm initiating and
indicating peripheral devices, conduit, wire and accessories,
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 2
etc. required to furnish a complete operational system. Provide
120V circuits for equipment as required.
.2
System Includes:
.1
Microprocessor based addressable control panel to carry out
fire alarm and protection functions including receiving alarm
signals, initiating first stage and general alarm, supervising
system continuously, actuating zone annunciators, initiating
trouble signals, performing fire control functions, etc.
.2
Trouble signal devices.
.3
Power supply facilities.
.4
Manual alarm stations.
.5
Automatic alarm initiating devices.
.6
Audible signal devices.
.7
Visual alarm signal devices.
.8
End-of-line devices.
.9
Annunciators.
.10 System Chart Printer.
.11 Ancillary devices.
.12 Standby batteries.
.13 Auxiliary control.
.14 Data gathering panels.
.15 Intelligent environmental compensation.
.16 System degrade operation.
.17 Other features, components, etc. as required.
.3
The loading of device loops shall be based on approximately 80%
load. Provide additional loops to comply with this loading where
required or directed.
.4
The loading of speaker circuits, strobe circuits and chime
circuits shall not exceed 75% circuit capacity. Provide
additional circuits to comply with this loading where required or
directed.
1.4
1.5
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
.1
The equipment and installation shall comply with the current ULC
and Building Code requirements.
.2
Manitoba Building Code.
.3
Local and Municipal By-Laws.
.4
Authorities having jurisdiction.
Shop Drawings
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 3
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010 for the
complete Fire Alarm system including:
.1
All devices.
.2
Control panels, DGP's, amplifiers, graphic annunciators,
LCD annunciators, printer, accessories, etc.
.3
Zoning System, including isolator locations.
.4
Programming of the Fire Alarm System.
.5
Connection to fire suppression system.
.6
All other components of the fire alarm system.
.7
Description of the operational sequences of the system.
.8
Complete set of drawings, indicating location of all
devices, including analogue and signalling devices, control and
annunciator panels, all interconnections to mechanical equipment,
to fire suppression systems and to existing computer room system,
all conduit routing and sizes, all wire sizes, types, number and
a riser for each control panel indicating all of the above.
.9
Pictorial drawings of control equipment indicating the
location of the components and parts and their respective
catalogue number and electrical characteristics.
.10 Interconnecting diagrams and cable manual.
.11 System descriptions of the actual installation.
.12 Maintenance instructions.
.13 Recommended spare parts list.
.14 Provide name, address and telephone number of the
manufacturer's service representative to be contacted during the
warranty period.
.2
This information is to be revised to "as-built" after
construction is completed. Insert as part of the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for Fire Alarm System for
incorporation into manual specified in Section 01730 - Operation
and Maintenance Manual and in Section 16010.
.2
Include:
.1
Operation and maintenance instructions for complete fire
alarm system to permit effective operation and maintenance.
.2
Technical data - illustrated parts lists with parts
catalogue numbers.
.3
Copy of as-built shop drawings.
1.7
Warranty
.1
Warranty all Equipment, Sensors, materials, peripherals,
installation, workmanship, etc. for one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance of the system.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 4
.2
Provide a complete inspection and testing of the fire alarm
system 1 year after final acceptance. Inspection tests to conform
to be ULC-S536. Submit inspection report to Engineer.
.3
Provide all programming of system as directed during the
warranty period at no cost to Owner.
1.8
Maintenance
.1
1.9
Provide one year's free maintenance with two inspections by
manufacturer during year. The second inspection can be done at
the same time as the ULC-S536 inspection and testing specified in
1.7 Warranty.
Training
.1
Arrange and pay for on-site lectures and demonstrations by fire
alarm equipment manufacturer to train operational personnel in
use and maintenance of fire alarm system.
.2
Provide video tape (3 copies) of all training provided.
.1
Provide training sessions which will explain general system
operation to staff.
.2
Provide training sessions for staff to explain detailed
operating and maintenance procedures.
1.10
Maintenance Materials
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Include:
.1
Ten spare glass rods for manual pull box stations.
.2
Ten spare lamps for Main Control Panel.
.3
Provide a lockable metal cabinet to be installed as directed by
the Owner.
.1
Provide 6 spare devices of each type used in unopened
cartons and clearly labelled as to type of device (smoke
detectors/heat detectors/dual strobes/bell strobes/addressable
relays/detector bases/pull stations, etc.
1.11
Service
.1
The supplier of the system must employ factory trained
technicians and maintain a service organization within driving
distance of the job site.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.12
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 5
Materials
.1
The system and components must be supplied by one manufacturer
of established reputation and experience who must have produced
similar apparatus for a period of at least five (5) years and who
must be able to refer to similar installation rendering
satisfactory service. All references to model numbers and other
pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum
standards of performance, quality and construction.
.2
Any equipment proposed as equal to that specified herein must
conform to the standards herein. All equipment must be of one
manufacturer. In addition, the contractor must obtain the
Consultant's approval in writing five (5) working days prior to
bidding other than as specified. The manufacturer's name, model
numbers, and three copies of working drawings and engineering
data sheets shall be submitted for approval along with a point by
point comply/non-comply cross reference listing, item by item, of
the specification for compliance. Refer to Requests for Equals in
Section 16010 as well. Approval of other manufacturers does not
relieve the contractor from meeting the specification
requirements.
.3
Manufacturers
.1
Approved manufacturers:
.1
Edwards
.2
Simplex
.3
Cerberus/Siemens
.4
Notifier
.2
Approved manufacturers must use factory trained personnel
for all sales, installation, programming, testing, verification,
inspection, service, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Equipment and devices: ULC listed and labelled and supplied by
single manufacturer.
.2
Power supply: to CAN/ULC-S524.
.3
Audible signal devices: to ULC-S525.
.4
Control unit: to CAN/ULC-S527.
.5
Manual fire alarm stations: to ULC-S528.
.6
Thermal detectors: to ULC-S530.
.7
Smoke detectors: to CAN/ULC-S529.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
.8
Smoke alarms: to CAN/ULC-S531.
.9
Visual alarms: to CAN/ULC-S526.
2.2
Section 16723
Page 6
Fire Alarm Design Features
.1
The Fire Alarm System shall be a zoned, two stage, non-coded,
electronically supervised, addressable, microprocessor based,
networked system. Supply complete with all hardware and software
necessary for this installation.
.2
Manual override switches, Actions, Sequences, and Time Controls
shall have the ability to be software disabled to prevent
unauthorized operation during non alarm condition. Switches shall
be automatically enabled during alarm condition to allow manual
control by authorized personnel.
.3
When all active events that initiated the SET or RESET of an
output have returned to normal, only then shall the output be
allowed to restore.
.4
Visually indicate at the control panel LCD, the addressable
device or the circuit of alarm initiation. When the control panel
goes into the alarm condition the green NORMAL LED shall
extinguish, the red ALARM LED shall light and the BUZZER shall
pulsate. The first line of the 80 character LCD shall indicate
the REAL TIME, the number of MESSAGES WAITING, the TYPE of ALARM,
the ALARM ZONE NUMBER, and the TIME THAT THE ALARM OCCURRED. The
second line shall display the user specified message.
.5
The system shall be capable of setting the sensitivity of all
analog sensors by point and be capable of displaying the analog
value of the sensor by device and/or traditional input and
vectoring the value to the printer. The system shall
automatically identify any analog sensor which becomes dirty
(maintenance alert) prior to false alarming.
.6
The operator shall acknowledge the alarm by pressing the
NEXT/ACK button, and the buzzer will silence providing there is
not an additional alarm pending. If there are additional alarms
waiting, the operator shall acknowledge all pending alarms before
the buzzer will silence. To silence audible devices, the operator
shall press the ALARM SILENCE button. A new alarm shall cause the
audibles to respond. To reset the system the operator shall press
the RESET button.
.7
Print a record of alarm on the system printer by Time, Alarm
zone or device number, alarm type, and the user specified
message. All restorations shall likewise be recorded, except the
user specified message shall not be repeated.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.8
2.3
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 7
Activation of a sprinkler supervisory condition shall
automatically:
.1
Display on the control panel LCD the zone or the
addressable device. During the SUPERVISORY condition the amber
SUPERVISORY LED shall light, the NORMAL LED shall go out, and the
BUZZER shall pulsate. The LCD shall indicate SUPERV. SHORT and
the zone/device number. The operator shall silence the BUZZER by
acknowledging all messages and pressing the TROUBLE SILENCE
button.
Sequence of Operation
.1
On activation of any alarm initiating device on the fire alarm
system, the system goes into alarm as follows:
.1
Signal all horns or speakers and activate strobes
throughout the building to sound at stage one alarm rate.
.2
Annunciate the location of the alarm initiating device on
all annunciators and control panel. All annunciators and control
panel shall display identical zone descriptions.
.3
Shut down all fans, etc. in the building as indicated.
.4
Unlock electrically locked doors.
.5
All magnetically held doors throughout the entire facility
shall be released.
.6
Signal elevators to home.
.7
Activate preaction sprinkler system from devices in the
preaction sprinkler zone.
.8
The alarm signal continues to sound throughout the facility
until:
.1
Tones are manually silenced; horns and speakers remain
silenced until a subsequent zone is activated.
.2
Alarm initiating device / devices are reset / cleared
and the system is reset.
.9
Transmit a signal to the Fire Department.
.10 Other auxiliary functions as specified.
.11 Stage two alarm activation via pullstation key switch
activation or 5 minute stage one alarm time out will cause all
audible and visual alarms to go into general evacuation rate.
.2
If the system is being tested by staff, all annunciators and
control panel shall display "TEST IN PROGRESS" in addition to the
initiating devices being tested.
2.4
Control Panel
.1
The control panel shall be modular in construction with multi
tasking microprocessor-based technology, distributed processing,
and include a watchdog circuit per individual module processor to
monitor the proper operation of every system processor. Systems
with one watchdog circuit for all the modules are not considered
equal. All components must be housed in an approved enclosure,
behind a cylinder locked, removable hinge door with a viewing
window. Opening of the panel door must not expose live components
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 8
or wiring. The door must be easily removable without tools to
prevent any obstruction to the operator during fire alarm
management procedures or during system maintenance procedures.
.2
The base system board must provide the number of addressable
loops as shown on the drawings plus 25% spare, signal circuits of
1.5 A each as shown on the drawings plus 25% spare, alarm relays,
trouble relays, programmable relays, communication network port,
alphanumeric LCD annunciator driver port, auxiliary power limited
24 VDC supply, communication active LED, programming port,
digitally controlled battery supervision circuit and charger,
etc.
.3
The system must be fully field programmable. Perform any
required logical sequence for fan and damper control. Provide 99
software timers accurate to one second for any required timing
functions. The timers may be individually programmed from one
second to four hours.
.4
The system software must fully integrate all of the system
functions including annunciation, alarm management sequence, fan
and damper control.
.5
The system must be capable of providing alarm indication in
degrade mode by activating the addressable loop alarm led.
.6
The total system one way response to an alarm shall be no more
than 2.5 seconds on a system configured to the maximum capacity.
.7
System communication between transponders if supplied must be in
DCLB via copper wires.
.8
The system addressable loops must be DCLB with loop isolation
between alarm zones. The addressable loop must not be loaded more
than 80% of full system capacity.
.9
The control panel shall have a two line by forty character
backlit supertwist (for any required viewing angle) alphanumeric
LCD display.
.10
The operator control panel must be intuitive in design. It must
be fully bi-lingual in English and French and must have all the
following standard indications and control buttons clearly
labelled in English and French. A programmable key may be used to
toggle the system prompts and printouts between the English and
French languages.
.11
Detection line circuit monitoring shall be provided by a
Conventional Zone Module. This module shall be system
interconnected by a card edge connector and shall be operated by
the control panel. Each circuit shall be capable of Class "A" or
Class "B" wiring. Each zone shall accommodate up to thirty (30)
ionization or photoelectric detectors, flame and beam detectors,
as well as any quantity of shorting type contact devices.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 9
.12
An output circuit for operation of DC audible devices, or city
tie, shall be provided by Controllable Signal Module. This module
shall be system interconnected by a card edge connector, capable
of operating with either Class "A" or Class "B" wiring, and shall
be operable by the control panel. The module shall be supervised
by the control unit for open and shorted circuits. Open and short
circuits shall report trouble only and respond with circuit
identification. The module shall contain two (2) programmable
open collector outputs capable of sourcing 250 ma at 40 VDC for
relay or LED activation.
.13
The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the
event of a complete power down condition. It shall return to an
on line state as an operating system performing all programmed
functions upon power restoration. Systems requiring battery
backed-up memory devices shall not be acceptable.
.14
Selectable history event logging shall be stored in flash memory
and displayed, printed or downloaded by classification for
selective event reports.
.1
Shall allow selection of events to be logged, including;
inputs, as alarms, troubles, supervisory, securities, status
changes and device alarm verification; outputs, as audible
control and output activation; actions, as reset, set
sensitivity, arm/disarm, override, password, set time and
acknowledge.
.2
Data format for downloading shall be compatible with the
data base handling program, allowing custom report generation to
track alarms, troubles and maintenance.
.3
Audible and visual indications shall be generated when
memory is 80% and 90% full to allow downloading of data. The
system shall be programmable circular logging, assuring that at
least the last 800 events will always be stored in non-volatile
memory.
.15
The system shall support intelligent analog smoke detection,
conventional smoke detection, manual station, water flow,
supervisory and status monitoring devices. The system shall also
be capable of supporting future amplifiers, future voice/visual
circuits and a firefighter's telephone system.
.16
The panel must be capable of measuring the sensitivity of
connected intelligent analog ionization and photoelectric smoke
detectors.
.1
The measurements shall be discrete voltage readings,
accurate to .01 VDC. The readings shall be dynamic, providing a
constant display of voltage shifts when in the sensitivity
voltage list mode.
.2
The control panel shall provide a display and a printed
list of these sensitivity measurements as a permanent record of
the required sensitivity testing.
.3
When programmed, any system connected, ionization or light
refraction style smoke detector shall be capable of automatic
sensitivity drift compensation up or down. This adjustment shall
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 10
keep the relationship between the sensing chamber voltage and the
programmed alarm threshold voltage constant throughout the life
of the detector to prevent false indications or failure to alarm
in the presence of smoke.
.4
The control panel shall place each detector in the system
in an alarm condition, transparent to the system user, every
twenty four hours as a dynamic check of the accuracy of the alarm
threshold setting. Upon reception of the alarm report, the system
detector shall be restored to it's pretest state.
.5
The system shall be capable of monitoring the state of
detectors and display a message when a detector is approaching
the limits of adjustment as a result of contaminants. A second
message shall be displayed when the detector reaches the limits
of adjustment due to these contaminants.
.6
The system shall be capable of recognizing that a detector
has been cleaned, initiating a series of tests to determine if
the cleaning was successful and display a detector cleaned
message, readjusting that detectors normal sensitivity setting
reference.
.17
The system shall recognize initiating of an alarm and indicate
the alarm condition in a degrade mode of operation, in the event
of processor failure or the loss of system communications to the
circuit interface panels.
.1
Each circuit interface panel shall be capable of operation
in its own degrade mode. In this mode, the system shall receive
an alarm from any intelligent analog or conventional initiating
device. It shall activate local indicating appliances and remote
or auxiliary connect circuits.
.2
The system shall indicate a trouble condition during
degrade mode operation and shall give a visual indication of an
alarm condition.
.3
Detector operation in the degrade mode shall continue at
the alarm threshold previously programmed. Systems returning
detectors to a common default value in degrade mode shall not be
acceptable.
.18
The system shall be capable of reporting alarms from devices
whether programmed or not. Alarm reports from these devices shall
activate indicating appliance circuits.
.19
The system shall perform time based control functions including
automatic changes of specified smoke detector sensitivity
settings.
.1
Time based functions shall be controlled by specifying time
periods or actual dates. It also shall provide the ability to
control these functions on an exception basis using a holiday
schedule.
.20
The system shall provide a one person field test of either the
complete system or a specified area, maintaining full function of
areas not under test.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 11
.1
Field test shall be usable in a silent or audible mode.
When in the audible mode, the signals shall audibly annunciate
alarms, troubles and device types.
.2
All field test activity shall be logged to the system
printer and historical memory.
.21
The system shall be provided with eight levels of password
protection with up to forty passwords.
.22
Provide a cost savings software verification Compare program.
The program shall instruct the technician as to what software
changes have been made from one software revision to another and
what points require verification.
.23
The system must be capable of reading and displaying at the
control panel the sensitivity of remote intelligent/analog
ionization and photoelectric detection devices. Individual
intelligent/analog detection device alarm threshold must be
adjustable form the control panel.
.24
The detection system must remain 100% operational and capable of
responding to an alarm condition while in either routine operator
maintenance mode or during programming by the manufacturer.
.25
Dynamic supervision of system electronics, wiring, detection
devices and software must be provided by the control system.
Failure of system hardware or wiring must be indicated by type
and location on the alphanumeric display.
.26
The control mode must permit the arming and disarming of
individual detection or output devices. Status of these devices
must be displayed upon command from the control panel.
.27
The address, type of device and sensitivity setting of each
addressable device must be field setable by a simple programming
device and stored in the addressable device in non-volatile
memory. Loss of both A/C power and batteries in the control panel
will not affect the system device programming.
.28
The system must be programmed in the field only via laptop
computer. Burning of EPROMs is not acceptable. System programming
must be password protected. The final system program must be
available on hardcopy and included in the owner's manuals.
.29
The printer or alphanumeric display must be capable of listing
upon request:
.1
Alarms and troubles with time, date and location.
.2
Status of output functions.
.3
Sensitivity of intelligent /analog smoke detectors.
.4
Detection device number, type and location.
.5
Status of remote relays.
.6
Acknowledgement time and date.
.7
Signal silence time and date.
.8
Reset time and date.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.9
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 12
Battery voltage, A/C voltage and battery charge current.
.30
The system must be capable of:
.1
Counting the number of intelligent/analog devices within a
"zone" which are in alarm.
.2
Counting "zones" which are in alarm.
.3
Counting the number of intelligent/analog detectors which
are in alarm on the system.
.4
Differentiating among types of intelligent/analog detectors
such as smoke detectors, manual stations, water-flow switches,
thermal detectors, cross zoning,etc...
.31
Provide a suitable dot matrix printer (located at security desk)
to log all system activity, print reports, etc.
2.5
Power Supply
.1
120 VAC, 60 Hz input, 24 VDC output standby power from gel cell
batteries sized as per NBC-90 requirements.
.2
System to include system power supplies, including necessary
transformers, rectifiers, regulators, filters and surge
protection required for system operation. The system devices
shall display normal and alarm conditions consistently whether
operating from normal power or reserve (standby) power.
.3
The Power Supply/Chargers, shall provide 24 Vdc operating and
emergency power to the system. The power supply shall be of
switch mode design with a minimum efficiency of 80% with
transient protection (up to 6 KV) including the EMI filter, spark
gaps, transzorbs, and varistors. The power supply shall provide
required current outputs of fully regulated, power limited 24
Vdc. The power supply shall provide diagnostic LEDs to notify the
operator upon AC power and/or the control unit CPU failure. The
power supply shall have brown out, low battery, and system ground
fault features. It shall be capable of charging from 5 AH to 60
AH batteries of either gel electrolyte or nickel cadmium types.
Upon AC power failure, the power supply shall transfer the system
to battery back-up and power the system for 24 hours and then
drive all bells, horns and strobes for a minimum of 30 minutes
(or as required to meet code for the particular building
occupancy).
.4
The system shall have the capability of polling any system power
supply to determine battery voltages and current accurate to
within .01VDC.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.6
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 13
Data Gathering Panel (Main FACP)
.1
Where shown on drawings, DGPs shall be equipped with an 80
character backlit LCD display to annunciate all zones and system
condition. The DGPs shall be equipped with a power supply and
battery back-up capable of operating the system under normal
conditions for 24 hours and after 24 hours be capable of
operating all the horns, speakers and strobes for a minimum of 30
minutes. DGP to be complete with zone modules, loop modules,
relay modules, etc. as required. DGP to be capable of supporting
future amplifiers for signalling devices.
.2
Each DGP shall contain non-volatile EEPROM memory, and easy
load, edit or change field programmable software. Each DGP shall
have a RS-232 Printer/Programming port. Each DGP shall have
Reset, Alarm Silence, and Trouble Silence to be used during
degraded stand alone mode. The DGP shall enter stand alone mode
upon loss of communication with the network master. When in the
stand alone mode, the DGP shall be capable of performing all it's
preprogrammed Actions, Sequences, Time Controls, Guard Patrols
and fully support it's zone cards. The DGP shall have 4 Digit LED
Diagnostic display that shall display up to eleven internal
trouble conditions.
.1
The Data-Line Format shall be RS-485 @ 9600 BPS up to a
maximum of 7,000 ft. over a minimum #18 AWG twisted pair cable,
Class "A" or "B". All external connections of the slave
controller shall withstand 6 Kilovolts voltage transients to
chassis ground.
2.7
Alarm Signalling
.1
Provide a programmable tone module. It shall be field
programmable for any one of 9 tones. 1000 Hz, slow whoop, fast
whoop, slow siren, fast siren, beep, shutter, tone, pulsed at 120
bursts per minute, temporary code 3-3-3. System software shall
select alert or evacuation tones as required. Tone modules may be
used as primary or standby tones for other signal sources.
Provide a 4 bit frequency adjust switch to allow custom tone
frequencies defined by this project. Owner to select 1st stage /
2nd stage tones.
.2
Provide amplifiers sized for the speaker/horn load connected
plus 25% spare capacity; provide one amplifier for each speaker
circuit (total of 4 required). Each amplifier shall have a
suitable output to connect a strobe circuit in the related area.
.3
Provide standby amplifier programmed to automatically take over
the load on any failed amplifier.
.4
Provide all-call paging microphone located in main fire alarm
panel.
.5
Wire speakers and strobe as class B circuits.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.8
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 14
Detectors
.1
General
.1
Detectors shall be capable of full digital communications
using both broadcast and polling protocol. Each detector shall be
capable of performing independent fire detection algorithms. The
fire detection algorithm shall measure sensor signal dimensions,
time patterns and combine different fire parameters to increase
reliability and distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted
deceptive nuisance alarms. Signal patterns that are not typical
of fires shall be eliminated by digital filters. Devices not
capable of combining different fire parameters or employing
digital filters shall not be acceptable.
.1
Each detector shall have an integral microprocessor
capable of making alarm decisions based on fire parameter
information stored in the detector head. Distributed
intelligence shall improve response time by decreasing the
data flow between detector and analog loop controller.
.2
Detectors not capable of making independent alarm
decisions shall not be acceptable. Maximum total analog loop
response time for detectors shall be 0.5 seconds.
.3
Each detector shall have a separate means of
displaying communication and alarm status. A green LED shall
flash to confirm communication with the analog loop
controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status.
Both LEDs on steady shall indicate alarm-standalone mode
status.
.4
Both LEDs shall be visible through a full 360 degree
viewing angle.
.5
The detector shall be capable of identifying up to 32
diagnostic codes. This information shall be available for
system maintenance. The diagnostic code shall be stored at
the detector.
.6
Each detector shall be capable of transmitting
pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal,
trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible
to program control panel activity to each level.
.7
Each detector microprocessor shall contain an
Environmental Compensation algorithm which identifies and
sets ambient "Environmental Thresholds" approximately six
times an hour. The microprocessor shall continually monitor
the environmental impact of temperature, humidity, other
contaminates as well as detector aging. The process shall
employ digital compensation to adapt the detector to long
term environmental changes. The microprocessor shall monitor
the environmental compensation value and alert the system
operator when the detector approaches 50% and 100% of the
allowable environmental compensation value.
.8
Differential sensing algorithms shall maintain a
constant differential between selected detector sensitivity
and the "learned base line sensitivity". The base line
sensitivity information shall be permanently stored at the
detector approximately once every hour.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 15
.9
Each detector may be individually programmed to
operate at any one of five sensitivity settings.
.10 The intelligent analog device and the analog loop
controller shall provide increased reliability and inherent
survivability through intelligent analog conventional
operation. The device shall automatically change to stand
alone, conventional device operation in the event of a loop
controller polling communications failure. In the analog
conventional detector mode, the analog detector shall
continue to operate using sensitivity and environmental
compensation information, stored in its microprocessor at
the time of communications failure. The analog loop
controller shall monitor the loop and activate a loop alarm
if a detector reaches its alarm sensitivity threshold.
.11 Each device shall be capable of automatic electronic
addressing and/or custom addressing without the use of DIP
or rotary switches. Devices using DIP or rotary switches for
addressing, either in the base or on the detector shall not
be acceptable.
.12 It shall be possible to program the analog devices
into a minimum of 16 groups with a minimum of 32 devices per
group. It shall also be possible to link groups to program
activities.
.13 The intelligent analog detectors shall be suitable for
mounting on any detector mounting base.
2.9
Heat Detectors
.1
Fixed Temperature Heat Detectors
.1
The intelligent heat detector shall have a thermistor
heat sensor and operate at a fixed temperature. It shall
continually monitor the temperature of the air in its
surroundings to minimize thermal lag to the time required to
process an alarm.
.2
The integral micro-processor shall determine if an
alarm condition exists and initiate an alarm based on the
analysis of the data. Systems using central intelligence for
alarm decisions shall not be acceptable.
.3
The heat detector shall have a nominal rating of 135°F
(57°C). 190° detectors to be provided in the Boiler Room or
where indicated on plans.
.4
The heat detector shall have a minimum linear spacing
rating of 60 foot (21.3m) centers and be suitable for wall
mount applications.
.5
Heat detectors noted or specified as "WP" or moisture
proof shall be an epoxy sealed moisture proof type detector
c/w dedicated addressable monitor module SiGA-CT1/CT2.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.10
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 16
Ionization Smoke Detectors
.1
The intelligent analog ion detector shall utilize a unipolar
ionization smoke sensor to sense changes in air samples from its
surroundings. The integral microprocessor shall dynamically
examine values from the sensor and initiate an alarm based on the
analysis of data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm
decisions shall not be acceptable.
.2
The detector shall continually monitor any changes in
sensitivity due to the environmental affects of dirt, smoke,
temperature, aging and humidity. The information shall be stored
in the integral processor and transferred to the analog loop
controller for retrieval using a Laptop Computer.
.3
The ion smoke detector shall operate in constant air velocities
from 0 to 75 ft./min. (0-0.38 m/sec.) and with intermittent air
gusts up to 300 ft./min (1.52m/sec) for up to 1 hour and meet the
following standards:
.1
ULC Smoke Sensitivity Range 0.61 - 1.83 % Obscuration/ft
(305mm).
.4
The ion detector shall be suitable for operation in the
following environment: Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing Elevation : Up to 5000 ft.
(1,524 m)
.5
The ion detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a
minimum of 30 foot (9.1m) centers and be suitable for wall mount
applications.
.6
Each detector shall be capable of Intelligent
Analog-Conventional operation to provide inherent survivability
in the event of a communication failure with the Analog Loop
Controller.
2.11
Photoelectric Detector
.1
The intelligent analog photoelectric detector shall use a light
scattering type photo sensor to sense changes in air samples from
its surroundings. The integral microprocessor shall dynamically
examine values from the sensor and initiate an alarm based on the
analysis of data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm
decisions shall not be acceptable.
.2
The photo detector shall continually monitor any changes in
sensitivity due to the environmental affects of dirt, smoke,
temperature and humidity. The information shall be stored in the
integral processor and transferred to the analog loop controller
for retrieval using a Laptop Computer.
.3
The photoelectric smoke detector shall be suitable for area
protection and direct insertion into air ducts up to 3 feet
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 17
(0.91m) high and 3 feet (0.91m) wide with air velocities up to
5000 ft./min. (0-25.39 m/sec.) without requiring specific duct
detector housings or supply tubes and meet the following
standards:
.1
ULI Smoke Sensitivity Range 0.67 - 3.77 % Obscuration/ft
(305mm).
.2
ULC Smoke Sensitivity Range 0.67 - 3.77 % Obscuration/ft
(305mm).
.3
Provide a lamacoid nameplate which describes the new fan
system for all duct smoke detectors.
.4
The photo detector shall be suitable for operation in the
following environment: Temperature: 32 deg F to 120 deg F (0 deg
C to 49 deg C) Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing Elevation : no
limit
.5
The photo detector shall be rated for ceiling installation
at a minimum of 30 foot (9.1m) centers and be suitable for wall
mount applications.
.6
Each detector shall be capable of Intelligent
Analog-Conventional operation providing inherent survivability in
the event of a communication failure with the Analog Loop
Controller.
2.12
Detector Bases
.1
General
.1
Detector Bases shall be suitable for mounting on North
American 1 gang, 3-1/2" or 4" octagon box, 4" square box.
.2
Standard Base
.1
The base shall contain no electronics and shall support all
detector types.
.2
Removal of the respective detector shall not affect
communications with other detectors.
.3
Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the
base. Bases which must be removed to gain access to the terminals
shall not be acceptable.
.4
The standard detector base shall be capable of supporting
one Red Remote Alarm Indicator.
.3
Relay Base
.1
The relay base shall support all detector types and have
the following minimum requirements:
.1
The relay shall be a bi-stable type and selectable for
normally open or normally closed operation.
.2
The position of the contact shall be supervised.
.3
The relay operation shall be exercised by the detector
processor on power up.
.4
The relay shall automatically de-energize when a
detector is removed.
.5
The operation of the relay base shall be controlled by
its respective detector processor.
.6
Form "C" Relay contacts shall have a minimum rating of
1 amp. @ 24 vdc and be listed for "pilot duty".
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 18
.2
Each detector shall be capable of Intelligent Analog
Conventional operation providing inherent survivability in the
event of a communication failure with the Analog Loop Controller.
This operation shall ensure the operation of the relay. Relay
bases not controlled by the detector micro-processor shall not be
acceptable.
.3
Removal of the respective detector shall not affect
communications with other detectors.
.4
Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the
base. Bases which must be removed to gain access to the terminals
shall not be acceptable.
.4
2.13
Isolator Base
.1
The isolator base shall support all detector types and have
the following minimum requirements:
.1
The operation of the isolator base shall be controlled
by its respective detector processor. Isolators which are
not controlled by a detector processor shall not be
accepted.
.2
The isolator shall operate within a minimum of 23
msec. of a short circuit condition on the communication
line.
.3
Following a short circuit condition, each
isolator/detector shall be capable of performing an internal
self-test procedure to re-establish normal operation.
Isolator/detectors not capable of performing independent
self tests shall not be acceptable.
.2
When connected in Class A configuration the Loop Controller
shall identify an isolated circuit condition and provide
communications to all non isolated analog devices. Loop wiring
shall be Class 'A', T-tapping is allowed between isolator bases /
modules only. Isolator bases to be provided when a loop is used
between floors, between areas which have fire separations. Do not
exceed 12 devices on a branch without an isolator.
.3
Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the
base. Bases which must be removed to gain access to the terminals
shall not be acceptable.
.4
Show isolator base locations on a floor plan as part of
shop drawings. Fire separations are to be shown on these floor
plans as well.
.5
The Loop Controller shall support up to 96 isolator bases.
Modules
.1
Single Input Module
.1
The intelligent Single Input Module shall be capable of a
minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation.
.2
The personality of the module shall be programmable at site
to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a
personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop Controller.
Single function modules or modules requiring Eprom, ROM or PROM
changes or DIP switch/jumper changes shall not be acceptable.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 19
.3
The single input module shall support the following circuit
types:
.1
Alarm Latching, Manual Station, Conventional Heat,
Waterflow
.2
Delayed Waterflow
.3
Non-Latching Monitor
.4
Supervisory
.4
Input circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and
ground faults.
.5
The input module shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs
mounted behind finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to
confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall
flash to display alarm status. The module shall be capable of
storing up to 24 diagnostic codes.
.6
Terminal connections shall be accessible from the room side
of the assembly. Devices which must be removed to gain access to
the wiring terminals shall not be acceptable.
.7
The single input module shall be suitable for mounting on
North American 2 1/2" (64mm) deep 1 gang, 1 1/2" (38mm) deep 4"
square box with 1 gang cover.
.8
The input module shall be suitable for operation in the
following environment:
.1
Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
.2
Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing
.9
It shall be possible to address each module without the use
of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for
addressing shall not be acceptable.
.2
Dual Input Module
.1
The intelligent Dual Input Module shall provide two (2)
supervised input circuits capable of a minimum of 4
personalities, each with a distinct operation.
.2
The personality of the module shall be programmable at site
to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a
personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop Controller.
Single function modules or modules requiring Eprom, ROM or PROM
changes or DIP switch/jumper changes shall not be acceptable.
.3
The dual input module shall support the following circuit
types:
.1
Alarm Latching, Manual Station, Conventional Heat,
Waterflow
.2
Delayed Waterflow
.3
Non-Latching Monitor
.4
Supervisory
.4
Input circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and
ground faults.
.5
The dual input module shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic
LEDs mounted behind finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash
to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED
shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be capable
of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes.
.6
The dual input module shall be suitable for mounting on
North American, 2 1/2" (64mm) deep 1 gang, 1 1/2" (38mm) deep 4"
square box with 1 gang cover.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 20
.7
Terminal connections shall be accessible from the room side
of the assembly. Devices which must be removed to gain access to
the wiring terminals shall not be acceptable.
.8
The input module shall be suitable for operation in the
following environment:
.1
Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
.2
Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing
.9
It shall be possible to address each module without the use
of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for
addressing shall not be acceptable.
.3
Single Input Signal Module
.1
The intelligent Single Input Riser/Signal Module shall
provide one supervised output circuit. The output circuit shall
be suitable for any of the following operations:
.1
24 vdc, polarized audible and visible signal
appliances
.2
The personality of the module shall be programmable at
site to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using
a personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop
Controller. Single function modules or modules requiring
Eprom, ROM or PROM changes or DIP switch/jumper changes
shall not be acceptable.
.3
Circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground
faults.
.4
The signal module shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic
LEDs mounted behind finished cover plate. A green LED shall
flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A
red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module
shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes.
.5
The signal module shall be suitable for mounting on
North American 2 1/2" (64mm) deep, 2 gang or 1 1/2" (38mm)
deep, 4" square boxes.
.6
Terminal connections shall be accessible from the room
side of the assembly. Devices which must be removed to gain
access to the wiring terminals shall not be acceptable.
.7
The signal module shall be suitable for operation in
the following environment:
.1
Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
.2
Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing
.8
It shall be possible to address each module without
the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP
switches for addressing shall not be acceptable.
.4
Control Relay Module
.1
The intelligent micro-processor based Control Relay Module
shall provide one form "C" dry relay contact rated at 2 amps. @
24 Vdc. to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The
control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing
systems. Provide auxiliary relays (wired for fail safe operation)
where amp rating of Control Relay Module is exceeded.
.2
The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the
system firmware.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 21
.3
The control relay module shall have a minimum of 2
diagnostic LEDs mounted behind finished cover plate. A green LED
shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A
red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be
capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes.
.4
The control relay module shall be suitable for mounting on
North American; 2 1/2" (64mm) deep, 1 gang, 1 1/2" (38mm) deep,
4" square box with 1 gang cover.
.5
The module shall be suitable for operation in the following
environment:
.1
Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
.2
Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing
.6
Terminal connections shall be accessible from the room side
of the assembly. Devices which must be removed to gain access to
the wiring terminals shall not be acceptable.
.7
It shall be possible to address each module without the use
of DIP switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall
not be acceptable.
.5
Universal Class A/B Module
.1
The intelligent Universal Class A/B Module shall be capable
of a minimum of 15 distinct operations.
.2
The personality of the module shall be programmable at site
to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a
personality code downloaded from the ZAS-2, Analog Loop
Controller. Single function modules or modules requiring Eprom,
ROM or PROM changes or DIP switch/jumper changes shall not be
acceptable.
.3
The Universal Class A/B module shall support the following
circuit types:
.1
Two Class B or one Class A Initiating Device Circuits
(IDC) capable of delayed waterflow alarm operation.
.2
One Class A or B Indicating Device (Signal) Appliance
Circuit (IAC)
.3
One Class A or B Circuit for 2 wire Smoke Detectors
(Verified or non-verified).
.4
One Form "C" (NO/NC) Dry Output Contact Relay
.4
Input/Output circuit wiring shall be supervised for open
and ground faults.
.5
The universal Class A/B module shall have a minimum of 2
diagnostic LEDs mounted behind finished cover plate. A green LED
shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A
red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be
capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes.
.6
The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American
2 1/2" (64mm) deep, 2 gang or 1 1/2" (38mm) deep, 4" square
boxes.
.7
Terminal connections shall be accessible from the room side
of the assembly. Devices which must be removed to gain access to
the wiring terminals shall not be acceptable.
.8
The universal Class A/B module shall be suitable for
operation in the following environment:
.1
Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
.2
Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 22
.9
It shall be possible to address each module without the use
of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for
addressing shall not be acceptable.
2.14
Fire Alarm Stations
.1
Intelligent Two Stage Fire Alarm Station
.1
Provide intelligent single action, two stage non-coded,
fully addressable fire alarm stations. The fire alarm station
shall be of metal construction, semi-flush mounting in finished
portions of the building and surface mounting in unfinished
areas. Provide a locked test feature. Finish the station in red
with silver "PULL IN CASE OF FIRE" lettering.
.2
The intelligent fire alarm station shall have a minimum of
2 diagnostic LEDs. A green LED shall flash to confirm
communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to
display alarm status. The fire alarm station shall be capable of
storing up to 24 diagnostic codes.
.3
The module shall be suitable for mounting on a North
American 1 1/2" (38mm) deep, 4" square box with 1/2" (13mm)
raised cover.
.4
It shall be possible to address each module without the use
of DIP switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall
not be acceptable.
.5
Provide tamper resistant covers for all manual alarm
stations located in resident wings B, C, D and E.
.2
Duct Detector Mounting Plate
.1
Provide a mounting plate assembly suitable for mounting a
detector for direct insertion into a duct 3 feet (0.91m) high and
3 feet (0.91m) wide. Mounting plate shall be code gauge steel
with corrosion resistant red enamel finish.
.2
The duct detector mounting plate shall support an
intelligent analog photoelectric detector (SIGA-PS), and a
standard detector base. Locate duct detector according to NFPA 72
recommendations.
.3
Remote Alarm LED
.1
Provide a Remote LED Alarm indicator (SIGA-LED) as
indicated on plans. LED shall have a 180 degree viewing angle and
mount on a standard single gang box.
.2
Finish shall be high impact white plastic and clearly
marked as an alarm device.
.3
Provide lamacoid to identify fan system or room name and
number as required at each remote indicating light.
2.15
Signal Paging Devices
.1
Use 8 inch eight ohm cone type loudspeakers with matching
transformers parallel connected to supervised 70 volt signal/page
circuits. Provide input power taps 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2 and factory set
to 1 watt. Provide axial sensitivity of 85 db at 10 feet for a 2
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 23
watt input over a frequency range of 50 to 13000 Hz. Provide a
flat white baked enamel finish. Coat the speaker backboxes with a
resonance damping material. Flush mounted speakers to be Type 1,
surface mounted speakers to be Type 2.
.2
Use eight ohm re-entrant horn speakers with matching
transformers parallel connected to supervised 70 volt signal/page
circuits. Provide input power taps at 1, 2, 4, 7.5 Watts. Provide
axial sensitivity of 88 db at 10 feet for a 2 Watt input over a
frequency rage of 400 to 4000 Hz. Mount flush or surface as shown
on the plans.
.3
Strobes: shall be ULC listed and operate on supervised alarm
circuits at 20 to 24V DC. Strobe shall have a red filter.
.4
End of Line Devices
.1
Provide high impact plastic red end of line plates with
screw terminations as required for all conventional circuits &
bell circuits.
2.16
As-Built Riser Diagram
.1
Remote alarm system riser diagram: Refer to Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install systems in accordance with CAN/ULC-S524, DFC-410(M),
manufacturer's requirements, authorities having jurisdiction,
etc.
.2
Install main control panel, annunciators, etc. and connect to AC
power supply as indicated on drawings.
.3
Locate and install manual alarm stations and connect to alarm
circuit wiring.
.4
Locate and install detectors and connect to alarm circuit
wiring. Do not mount detectors within 1 m of air outlets.
Maintain at least 600 mm radius clear space on ceiling, below and
around detectors. Locate duct type detectors in straight portions
of ducts (co-ordinate with Division 15).
.5
Connect alarm circuits to main control panel or DGP's.
.6
Connect signalling circuits to main control panel.
.7
Install end-of-line devices where required.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 24
.8
Install remote annunciator panels and connect to annunciator
circuit wiring.
.9
Locate and install door releasing devices.
.10
Locate and install relay units to control fan shut down, etc.
.11
Locate and install intelligent modules as required.
.12
Fire Suppression System: wire alarm switches, supervisory
switches, solenoids, etc. and connect to control panel.
.13
Connect sprinkler switches.
.14
Connect to Building Management System (alarm/trouble).
3.2
Verification, Data and Testing
.1
System Verification
.1
Upon completion of all wiring and installation of all
equipment, devices, etc., do complete verification of the fire
alarm system. Verification shall be in accordance with current
edition of Standard CAN/ULC-S537 "The Verification of Fire Alarm
Systems" and following requirements. Even if permitted by Code
and recognized standards and regulations, grade of work shall in
no case be lower than specified in the project specifications.
Verify all new initiating and signal/ solenoid zones and
circuits, etc. Verify that every component installed, is working
and functions as intended.
.2
Manufacturer with assistance of electrical contractor shall
do a complete verification of system to ULC S-537 to ensure:
.1
That system is installed as per plans and
specifications and is operative and acceptable to all
authorities having jurisdiction.
.2
That system is installed as per recommendations of
manufacturer.
.3
That system is electrically supervised, including all
zone lamps. To accomplish this, manufacturer with assistance
of electrical contractor shall:
.1
remove each and every device from its applicable
circuit by disconnecting circuit wiring
.2
verify presence of the applicable trouble signal
and indications at control panel and remote
annunciators.
.4
That all devices are operative. Check each switch,
device, etc. for proper operation.
.5
That all system functions are operating as intended,
including:
.1
all main control circuits,
.2
all remote annunciator circuits,
.3
all manual and automatic initiating devices,
.4
all audible and visual alarm signals,
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 25
.5
all ancillary controls, including fan shutdown,
door release, etc.
.6
All existing systems functions (such as alarm
signals, ancillary controls, etc.) that are not
modified, but are required to operate from any new
zones added, shall be verified for correct operation.
.7
When fire alarm system is verified, Contractor
shall measure and record all loop or circuit resistance
values at the fire alarm panel when end-of-line
resistor is shorted. Contractor shall highlight all
values which exceed the manufacturer's recommendations
and report them to the Consultant for action to correct
this deficiency.
.3
Any necessary changes required to conform to the above
shall be completed by the electrical contractor with technical
assistance provided by the system manufacturer.
.4
During the period of this inspection, the electrical
contractor shall assist the manufacturer with the services of
electricians.
.5
To assist the electrical contractor in preparing his bid,
the manufacturer shall indicate in his tender the number of hours
required to complete this inspection.
.6
Upon completion of the above inspection, including any
changes required, the manufacturer shall submit the following
documentation to the Consultant.
.1
Certification of Verification
.2
A complete report of all equipment verified,
including:
.1
sprinkler system switches
.2
automatic detectors
.3
alarm signals
.4
annunciators
.5
door hold open devices
.6
fan shutdown
.7
the number and type of devices connected to each
circuit
.7
For each piece of equipment verified, the following
information shall be included in the report:
.1
Catalogue number and type of device
.2
Location of device
.3
Zoning or circuit devices including ancillary devices
.4
Supervision test results
.5
Operation of device
.6
Inspection date
.7
Serial number of every smoke detector
.8
Sensitivity reading of every smoke detector, including
duct detectors
.9
Record the time delay of all sprinkler flow switches
.10 Zone circuit loop resistance
.11 Fire alarm system supplier shall verify that alarm
descriptions match and are consistent at each of following
reporting locations:
.1
Fire alarm control panel
.2
Fire alarm remote annunciators
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 26
.8
Report shall also indicate operation of ancillary functions
such as remote alarm indicators, door release, fan shutdown, etc.
which are required to be activated. Operation shall be verified
by actual observation of the entire function (e.g. bells ringing,
checking to ensure proper fans shut down, etc.). Observing a
change of state in the fire alarm control panel (e.g. observing
relay function) is not considered complete verification of the
entire function. Verification shall include actual field checking
of proper operation of ancillary devices and equipment. Complete
fire alarm system verification report shall be submitted to
Consultant, Owner and authorities having jurisdiction minimum of
one week before City of Winnipeg Acceptance Inspections.
.9
All costs necessary for this verification shall be included
in electrical trade's tender price.
.10 Upon completion of this inspection, manufacturer shall
demonstrate the operation of system to Owners.
.11 Verify identification of all terminals (markers,
directories and diagrams) in interconnecting wires and cables,
certifying their correctness. Upon completion of verification,
submit all documentation to Consultant, including mylar sepia of
as-built system riser block diagram and all tub or cabinet
directories. Indicate on all documentation submitted that in fact
it has been verified.
.12 Any errors in verification report shall be just cause for
complete reverification of all verification work performed by
Contractor, at discretion of Consultant. Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs associated with system reverification.
.13 Verify number of detectors on each zone and include
verification report quantity of detectors on each zone.
.14 Sprinkler Flow Switches: Check and calibrate time delay of
all sprinkler flow switches such that time delay is between 25
and 30 seconds. Record 'final setting' time delay of every flow
switch in verification report.
.2
Fire Alarm System Equipment Data
.1
Supply complete manufacturer's data, information and
instructions to aid the Owner to troubleshoot, repair, maintain
and service the equipment and system. Include all of the
following in each of the Maintenance/Operating Manuals:
.1
engineering specifications data
.2
user manual complete with explanation of equipment
capabilities
.3
specific sequence of operation and events
.4
control schematics
.5
schematics of electronic operation
.6
theory of electronic modules
.7
electrical values of all electronic components
.8
assembly drawings and parts list, stating part number
and manufacturer
.9
as-built system wiring diagrams showing location of
all panels
.10 test procedure for systems, panels and individual
modules
.11 colour code of wire
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Fire Alarm Systems
(Addressable,
Two Stage)
Section 16723
Page 27
.12 block diagram of each panel identifying all zone
locations and wire numbers
.13 mylar drawings and prints of verified system
"as-builts". All mylar drawings to be 'DILAR FILM',
blackline (dry erasable), reverse reading (reverse print).
.14 Mylar drawings and prints of all new and altered fire
alarm control panels showing the detailed point to point
panel wiring, detailing all functions, wire numbers and
colour coding.
.15 Floor plan drawings (as-builts)indicating:
.1
Locations of all fire alarm devices, panels, etc.
.2
Location of all magnetic holders and ancillary
devices connected to fire alarm control panel.
.3
All conduit runs, junction boxes.
.4
Quantity of wires in each conduit run.
.5
Zone wiring identification at each junction box
and fire alarm device.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Pathway
Section 16746
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Firestopping Requirements
Section 07270
.2
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.3
Installation of Cables in Trenches
and in Ducts
Section 16106
.4
Direct Buried Underground Cable Ducts
Section 16107
.5
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings, and
Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.6
Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and
Cabinets
Section 16131
.7
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and
Fittings
Section 16132
1.2
References
.1
1.3
Latest edition of the following:
.1
EIA/TIA-569; Commercial Building Standards for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (refer to CSA standards
CAN/CSA T530-M90, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.214-M90)
.2
EIA/TIA-607;Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications (refer to CSA standard
CAN/CSA T527)
.3
NBC National Building Code of Canada
.4
CAN/CSA-C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code Part One
.5
CAN/CSA-C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code Part One Section 60
"Electrical Communication Systems".
.6
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.0-M91 General Requirements - Canadian
Electrical Code, Part Two.
.7
NRC-CNRC National Building & Fire Codes of Canada
.8
IEEE STD 1100 - 1992 IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering
& Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment "Emerald Book"
Description of System
.1
System to include:
.1
The communications horizontal cabling pathway shall consist
of a cable tray system.
.2
The Voice Communications backbone cabling pathway shall
consist of a cable tray system.
.3
The Data Communications backbone cabling pathway shall
consist of a cable tray system.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Pathway
Section 16746
Page 2
.4
All backboards, cable support hardware, clamps, bonding
clamps, and grounding to provide a complete system as specified.
1.4
Standards
.1
1.5
The equipment and installation shall comply with the following
current requirements:
.1
National Building Code
.2
Manitoba Building Code
.3
Canadian Electrical Code
.4
EIA/TIA and CSA Telecommunications Building Wiring
Standards
.5
Manitoba Fire Code
.6
Local and Municipal By-laws
.7
Authorities having jurisdiction
Submittals
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals.
.2
Include:
.1
Cable Tray
.2
Grounding termination connectors.
.3
Grounding bus bars
.3
This information is to be revised to "as-built" after
construction is completed. Insert as part of the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
.1
Provide Operation and Maintenance data for Voice and Data
Communications Pathway for incorporation into manual specified in
Section 01300 - Submittals.
.2
Include:
.1
Technical data - illustrated parts lists with parts
catalogue numbers.
.2
Copy of approved shop drawings with corrections completed
and marks removed except for reviewed stamps.
.3
Complete Record Drawings.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Pathway
Section 16746
Page 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Equipment and materials to be CSA or ULC certified. Where there
is no alternative to supplying equipment which is not CSA or ULC
certified, obtain special approval from local Electrical
Inspection Department or authority having jurisdiction.
.2
Submit for Contract Administrator's approval, a duplicate list
of shop drawings for this project prior to placing of orders
for same.
2.2
Equipment Backboards
.1
2.3
Equipment backboards shall be 19mm3/4in plywood backing, located
as shown on drawings.
Cable Tray
.1
Trough type Cable Tray:
.1
Cable Tray and fittings: to EEMAC F5-1-1977.
.2
Ladder type, Class C1 to CSA C22.2 No. 126 - M1980,
230mm9in rung spacing.
.3
Single stacked cable tray unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
.4
Aluminum ladder, solid or tubular with 9.5mm x 38mm3/8in x
1.5in sides, 6.4mm x 25mm1/4in x 1in rungs and width as indicated
on drawings.
.5
Fittings: manufactured accessories for approved cable tray.
Corner clamps, splice clamps, end plates, side clips, side clips
with 9.5mm3/8in pins (on both sides between suspension rods)
where required.
.6
Solid aluminum pan located on all horizontal cable tray
including fittings.
.7
Cable tray to be suspended using 16mm5/8in threaded rods or
larger as required, with double locknuts below the tray and
single lock nuts above.
.8
Cable Tray shall be isolated from the building structure
with insulated threaded couplings.
.9
Equipment racks shall not be used to support the cable
trays.
.10 Finish: painted with gray enamel.
.11 Acceptable Manufacturers: Newton, Chatsworth.
.2
Ladder Type Cable Tray:
.1
Cable Tray and fittings: to EEMAC F5-1-1977.
.2
Ladder type, Class C1 to CSA C22.2 No. 126 - M1980,
230mm9in rung spacing.
.3
Single stacked cable tray unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Pathway
Section 16746
Page 4
.4
Extruded aluminum tray with depth of 100mm4in and width as
indicated on drawings.
.5
Horizontal elbows, end plates, drop outs, vertical risers
and drops, tees, wyes, expansion joints and reducers where
required.
.6
Fittings: manufactured accessories for approved cable tray.
Radii on fittings: 600mm24in minimum.
.7
Provide conduit to tray adaptors for the termination of all
conduits terminating at the cable tray.
.8
Cable tray to be c/w 100mm4in high center barrier.
.9
Cable tray to be suspended using 13mm1/2in threaded rods or
larger as required, with double locknuts below the tray and
single lock nuts above.
.10 Finish: natural aluminum.
.11 Acceptable Manufacturers:. Burndy, Canadian Strut, Pilgrim,
Pursley, Unistrut, Newton, Chatsworth.
2.4
EMT Conduit
.1
Refer to Section 16111.
.2
Minimum trade size shall be 19mm3/4 in.
.3
Flexible conduit shall only be utilized for connections from
modular furniture to junction boxes.
.4
The use of 90 degree Condulets is not allowed.
2.5
PVC Underground Conduit
.1
Refer to Section 16111.
.2
PVC conduit shall be heavy duty rigid spec schedule 40 type with
6.4mm1/4in wall.
2.6
Outlet Boxes
.1
Spider Outlet Boxes:
.1
Flush wall mounted 1, 2, 4, or 6 gang outlet boxes c/w
knock outs on top and bottom of each gang.
.2
Minimum depth: 70mm2-3/4in.
.3
Accepts standard type duplex outlets.
.4
Refer to detail sheets for faceplate configurations.
.5
Acceptable manufacturer: Spider Mfg.
.2
Electro-Galvanized Outlet Boxes:
.1
Flush wall mounted electro-galvanized steel device box
100mm4in square x 65mm2-1/2in deep.
.2
Single or two gang raised plaster rings with squared
corners as required.
.3
Accepts standard type duplex outlet.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.4
Voice and Data
Communications
Pathway
Section 16746
Page 5
Refer to detail sheets for faceplate configurations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Communications Pathway
.1
3.2
All communication pathways shall maintain the following
distances from the equipment listed:
.1
motors or transformers 1.2m4ft
.2
wire in conduit and/or cables >300V 1.0m3ft
.3
wire in conduit and/or cables <300V 300mm12in
Equipment Backboards
.1
3.3
Equipment backboards shall be rigidly secured and painted with a
ASA #61 industrial gray nonconductive fire-retardant overcoat.
Cable Trays
.1
Refer to Section 16114.
.2
Refer to Canadian Electrical Code Section 12.
.3
Remove sharp burrs or projections to prevent damage to cables or
injury to personnel.
.4
Provide additional offsets, bends, etc. as required to adjust
cable tray routing and height to avoid conflict with ducts,
pipes, beams, etc.
.5
Support cable tray on 1.5m5ft centers and within 760mm30in from
a connection fitting or end.
.6
Support cable tray at connection points and at end points
.7
Each Cable tray section (or 3m10ft interval maximum) shall be
grounded with a #3/0 AWG RW90 insulated green copper conductor
installed within the cable tray.
.8
For double stacked cable trays the ground conductor shall be
layed in the upper tray. An additional #3/0 AWG RW90 insulated
green copper conductor jumper shall be installed from the upper
cable tray down to the lower cable tray at each interval.
.9
Within the Communications Cabling Wiring Closets the cable tray
deck shall be located 150mm6in back from the equipment rack
centreline. Clearance of cable tray above finished floor as shown
on drawings.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Pathway
Section 16746
Page 6
.10
The cable tray shall be installed so that there is a minimum of
300mm12in clearance above the cable tray.
.11
Provide a barrier separation in the cable tray as shown on the
detail sheets.
.12
Arrange for opening in walls and floors for width and depth of
cable tray to pass through.
.13
Provide and install acceptable firestopping of floors and walls
after cables have been installed.
3.4
Conduits
.1
Refer to Canadian Electrical Code Section 12.
.2
Refer to Section 16111.
.3
Conduit sleeves shall be installed with acceptable fire stop to
meet local fire codes.
.4
Conduit sleeves shall extend a minimum of 100mm4in above the
finished floor.
.5
Spare sleeves with no cables installed within them shall be
fitted with an acceptable firestop.
.6
Raceways shall enter Communication Cabling Wiring Closets at a
minimum height of 2.4m8ft AFF.
.7
Conduit runs shall not contain more than two (2) 90 degree bends
between pull points or pull boxes.
.8
Conduits shall have long sweep bends.
.9
Continuous conduit runs shall not exceed 30m100ft without a pull
point or pull box.
.10
Conduits shall be reamed to eliminate sharp edges.
.11
Conduit couplings and connectors shall be steel type.
.12
Steel connectors shall be terminated with an insulated bushing.
.13
Pull boxes shall be installed in such a manner that the conduits
that enter the pull box shall be aligned at opposite ends from
each other, the cable shall not have a bend within the pull box.
.14
Conduit runs shall remain clear of areas in which flammable
material may be stored. Conduits shall not be installed adjacent
to sources of heat.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Pathway
Section 16746
Page 7
.15
All conduits shall be left with a nylon pull cord with a minimum
test rating of 90kg200lbs.
.16
Provide one 20mm3/4in conduit stubbed up to accessible ceiling
space from a single gang communications outlet.
.17
Provide two 20mm3/4in conduits stubbed up to accessible ceiling
space from a two gang communications outlet.
.18
Provide four 20mm3/4in conduits stubbed up to accessible ceiling
space from a four gang communications outlet.
.19
Conduits stubbed up from communications outlet shall be routed
to the nearest point of the cable tray. Conduits shall terminate
onto the cable tray with conduit to tray adaptors.
.20
Conduit fill shall be as per cable manufacturers
recommendations, but shall in no case exceed the maximum fill
allowed by code.
3.5
PVC Underground Conduit
.1
The use of 90 degree corners is not allowed. Use two 45 degree
fittings spaced apart to provide a 90 degree corner. The bending
radius shall be 410mm16in minimum.
.2
Layout underground PVC conduit below the building structure with
long sweeping bends around structure piles.
.3
Underground PVC conduit shall be installed with watertight
sealant between each section.
3.6
Outlet Boxes
.1
Refer to Section 16132.
.2
Refer to detail sheets for faceplate configurations.
.3
Fill boxes with paper, sponges, foam, or similar approved
material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove
upon completion of Work.
.4
Information outlet boxes shall not be placed back to back when
servicing adjacent rooms, there shall be a minimum of 200mm8in
offset between boxes.
.5
Mount communication outlet boxes at the same height as the
electrical power outlets unless noted otherwise. Communication
outlets shall be mounted adjacent (within 4in.) to power
outlets.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Installation of Cables in Trenches
and in Ducts
Section 16106
.3
Direct Buried Underground Cable Ducts
Section 16107
.4
Pole Lines and Hardware
Section 16108
.5
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings, and
Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.6
Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes
and Cabinets
Section 16131
.7
Voice and Data Communications Pathway
Section 16746
1.2
References
.1
Latest edition of the following:
.1
EIA/TIA-568-A; Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard (refer to CSA standard CAN/CSA T529-M91,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 214-M90).
.2
EIA/TIA-569; Commercial Building Standards for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (refer to CSA standards
CAN/CSA T530-M90).
.3
EIA/TIA-570 Residential and Light Commercial
Telecommunications Wiring Standard.
.4
EIA-TIA-606; The Administration Standard for the
Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Building (refer
to CSA standard CAN/CSA T528-93).
.5
EIA/TIA-607; Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications (refer to CSA standard
CAN/CSA T527-94).
.6
EIA/TIA TSB 67 Transmission Performance Specifications for
Field Testing of Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems.
.7
EIA/TIA TSB 72 Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling
Guidelines.
.8
EIA/TIA TSB 75 Cabling practices for Open Offices.
.9
NBC National Building Code of Canada.
.10 CAN/CSA-C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code Part One.
.11 CAN/CSA-C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code Part One Section 60
"Electrical Communication Systems".
.12 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 0-M91 General Requirements - Canadian
Electrical Code, Part Two.
.13 CSA C22.2 No. 154-1975 Data Processing Equipment.
.14 NRC-CNRC National Building & Fire Codes of Canada.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 2
.15 IEEE STD 1100 - 1992 IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering
& Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment "Emerald Book".
.16 ISO/IEC 11801 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises.
.17 ANSI X3T9.5 Requirements for UTP at 100Mbps.
.18 TBITS-6.9; Canadian Open Systems Application Criteria
(COSAC) "Profile for the Telecommunications Wiring System in
Government Owned and Leased Buildings", Treasury Board
Information Technology Standards.
1.3
Description of System
.1
System to include:
.1
A centralized network for the Voice Communications
cabling system.
.2
A Category 6 centralized network for the Data
Communications cabling system.
.3
Information outlets, c/w faceplates, recessed
enclosures, located in the Work area for connection to
communications devices.
.4
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) enhanced Category 3
copper cable for the Voice Communications horizontal cabling
system.
.5
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) enhanced Category 3
copper cable for the Voice Communications backbone cabling
system.
.6
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) enhanced Category 6
copper cable for the Data Communications horizontal cabling
system.
.7
All patch panels, troughs, labeling, clamps, bonding
clamps, and grounding to provide a complete system as
specified.
.8
All connector cables, splices, and miscellaneous
material to provide a complete system as specified.
.9
Wiring connections to the Local Telephone Service
Provider shall originate at the demarcation point. The cross
connect and disconnect links shall be provided by Voice and
Data Contractor.
1.4
System Performance
.1
The Category 6 System shall provide the following:
.1
Worst case channel performance requirements at 200 MHz
shall be:
.1
NEXT power sum rated: 37.1dB
.2
Attenuation: 21.7dB
.3
power sum rated ACR: 15.4dB
.4
ELFEXT power sum rated: 20.2dB
.5
Return loss: 12dB
.6
Propogation delay: 548ns
.7
Delay skew: 50ns
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.5
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 3
Standards
.1
1.6
The equipment and installation shall comply with the following
current requirements:
.1
National Building Code
.2
Manitoba Building Code
.3
Canadian Electrical Code
.4
EIA/TIA and CSA Telecommunications Building Wiring
Standards
.5
Manitoba Fire Code
.6
Local and Municipal By-laws
.7
Authorities having jurisdiction
.8
Equipment to be as supplied by:
.1
AMP
.2
Systimax
Approved Voice and Data Subcontractor
.1
Voice and Data Communications Cabling System Subcontractors
shall adhere to the following:
.1
Subcontractor shall install only approved product.
.2
Equipment manufacturer must be supported by at least three
certified local installers.
.3
Subcontractor shall be certified by the equipment
manufacturer they represent.
.4
Subcontractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this
Work and shall have direct experience on recent systems of
similar type and size.
.5
Subcontractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment
necessary for successful installation and testing of UTP and
Optical Fiber Voice and Data Communications Cabling Systems and
shall have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of
such tools and equipment.
.6
Subcontractor shall not contract any portion of the Work
out to other Contractors.
.2
The following list of Voice and Data Subcontractors are approved
for this project:
.1
Kingston Electric Ltd. att: Brian Allen 861 Cockburn St. S.
Winnipeg, Manitoba R3L 2N6 Phone: (204) 477-1405 Fax: (204)
474-0853
.2
Len Andrews Enterprises Inc. att: Len Andrews 538 Templeton
Ave. Winnipeg, Manitoba R2V 3S4 Phone: (204) 338-5174 Fax: (204)
338-5199
.3
McCaine Electric Ltd. att: Brian Hogg 630 Erin St.
Winnipeg, Manitoba R3G 2V9 Phone: (204) 786-2435 Fax: (204)
783-2180
.4
Saltech Computer Cabling Services att: Ray Saltel 833
Dugald Road Winnipeg, Manitoba R2J 0G7 Phone: (204) 237-1127 Fax:
(204) 237-4887
.5
Static Electric Ltd. att: Richard Robertson 936 Logan Ave.
Winnipeg, Manitoba R3E 1P1 Phone: (204) 783-3236 Fax: (204)
786-4823
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
.6
Tri-Star Electric att: Peter
Winnipeg, Manitoba R3B 2V5 Phone:
783-3818
.7
Wescan Electric att: Charlie
Winnipeg, Manitoba R3E 1P6 Phone:
783-2750.
1.7
Section 16747
Page 4
Thiessen 203-356 Furby St.
(204) 788-4006 Fax: (204)
Deeborn, 1049 Logan Avenue,
(204) 786-3384 Fax: (204)
Submittals
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals.
.2
Include:
.1
Technical data sheet supplied by cable manufacturer for the
cables which are to be used. The data sheets shall include:
.1
Mutual Capacitance
.2
Impedance
.3
DC Resistance
.4
Attenuation
.5
Near End Crosstalk
.6
ACR
.7
Delay Skew
.8
ELFEXT
.2
Information outlets c/w faceplates.
.3
Backboards, patch panels, troughs, equipment racks, wall
mounted equipment racks, wire management panels.
.4
Fiber Optic interconnection units, connectors, couplings.
.5
Grounding termination connectors.
.6
All test equipment.
.7
Instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, operation, and installation of
products.
.3
This information is to be revised to "as-built" after
construction is completed. Insert as part of the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
1.8
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
.1
Provide Operation and Maintenance data for the Voice and Data
Communications Cabling System for incorporation into manual
specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.
.2
Include:
.1
Instructions for complete Voice and Data Communications
Cabling System to permit effective operation and maintenance.
.2
Technical data - illustrated parts lists with parts
catalogue numbers.
.3
Copy of approved shop drawings with corrections completed
and marks removed except for reviewed stamps.
.4
Vendor's list of recommended spare parts for system.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 5
.5
Provide name, address and telephone number of the
Contractors service representative to be contacted during the
warranty period.
.6
Provide name, address and telephone number of the Vendor's
service representative to be contacted during the warranty
period.
.7
Complete records of all Administration labeling data.
Administrative labeling to be in electronic database format on
3-1/2" disk, and included on hardcopy of Record Drawings.
.8
A table of all test results to be included in hardcopy and
3½" diskette.
.9
Complete Record Drawings.
1.9
Manufacturers Warranty
.1
1.10
Warranty all passive equipment, materials, installation and
workmanship for one(1) year. The warranty must assure the support
of all premise standards applications as listed in EIA/TIA
standards.
Training
.1
Contractor shall provide two 4 hour on-site training sessions,
together with vendor's representative, for Voice and Data
Communications Cabling System to operational personal in use and
maintenance of system. Contractor shall provide all equipment and
personal necessary to video tape training session and submit two
copies to the City of Winnipeg. Training sessions shall be
provided at a time convenient to the City of Winnipeg.
.2
The Contractor shall provide a technician to assist the City of
Winnipeg in cross connecting the voice and data services
throughout the facility. Contractor shall also perform cross
connecting of the station assignments between the City of
Winnipeg's service demarcation.
1.11
Co-ordination with Local Telephone Utility
.1
Contractor shall provide and install all cross connects and
patch cords required at demarcation. Co-ordinate all cross
connects with local telephone utility.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Equipment and materials to be CSA or ULC certified. Where there
is no alternative to supplying equipment which is not CSA or ULC
certified, obtain special approval from local Electrical
Inspection Department or authority having jurisdiction.
.2
All cabling and termination hardware shall be of one
manufacturer.
.3
Submit for Contract Administrator's approval, a duplicate list
of shop drawings for this project as specified prior to placing
of orders for same.
2.2
Approved Manufacturers
.1
2.3
The following is a list of approved manufacturers for the voice
and data cabling system. Additional approved manufacturers for
miscellaneous hardware shall be as noted in specifications.
.1
AMP
.2
Systimax
Equipment Racks
.1
Equipment racks shall meet ANSI/EIA-310.
.2
Constructed of lightweight steel, charcoal gray or black in
color.
.3
Complete with steel mounting hardware.
.4
Rack hardware must provide vertical wire management on both
sides of the equipment rack.
.5
Rack hardware shall be provided with a top cable trough to
facilitate cable management.
.6
Equipment rack frames shall meet the following specifications:
.1
dimensions: 7ft x 20.3in x 3in with 18-5/16in center
mounting.
.2
footprint: 20.3in length x 15in depth.
.3
hole pattern: 5/8in - 5/8in - 1/2in spacing.
.4
screw size: 10-24 thread, 1/2in length.
.7
Each equipment rack or cabinet designated with space for active
electronics shall be provided with a surge suppressor power bar.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Tripp-Lite #IBR-12
.8
Additional approved manufacturer: Cabletalk, DL Custom, Hubbell.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.4
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 7
Wall Mounted Equipment Racks
.1
Wall mounted equipment racks shall meet ANSI/EIA-310.
.2
Constructed of lightweight steel, charcoal gray or black in
color.
.3
Complete with steel mounting hardware.
.4
Rack hardware must provide vertical wire management on both
sides of the wall mounted equipment rack.
.5
Wall mounted equipment rack frames shall meet the following
specifications:
.1
dimensions: 48in x 20.3in x 6in deep with 18-5/16in center
mounting.
.2
hole pattern: 5/8in - 5/8in - 1/2in spacing.
.3
screw size: 10-24 thread, 1/2in length.
.6
Each equipment rack or cabinet designated with space for active
electronics shall be provided with a surge suppressor power bar.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Tripp-Lite #IBR-12
.7
Additional approved manufacturers: Cabletalk, DL Custom,
Hubbell.
2.5
Wall Mounted Equipment Cabinets
.1
Wall mounted equipment cabinets shall meet ANSI/EIA-310.
.2
Constructed of lightweight steel, charcoal gray or black in
color.
.3
Complete with steel mounting hardware.
.4
Cabinet hardware must provide vertical wire management on wall
mounted equipment cabinet.
.5
Front lockable hinged Lexan door.
.6
Lockable hinged body for rear cabling access.
.7
Removable top and bottom covers.
.8
Wall mounted equipment cabinet frames shall meet the following
specifications:
.1
Dimensions: 36.75in x 24in x 18in deep (min) with 18-5/16in
centre mounting.
.2
Hole pattern: 5/8in - 5/8in - 1/2in spacing.
.3
Screw size: 10-24 thread, 1/2in length.
.9
Cabinets shall be wall mounted on 19mm equipment backboard.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 8
.10
Each equipment rack or cabinet designated with space for active
electronics shall be provided with a surge suppressor power bar.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Tripp-Lite #IBR-12
.11
Additional acceptable Manufacturers: Rittal, CableTalk.
2.6
Wall Mounted Equipment Brackets
.1
Wall mounted equipment brackets shall meet ANSI/EIA-310.
.2
Constructed of lightweight steel, charcoal gray or black in
color.
.3
Brackets shall be c/w bottom or side hinge.
.4
Depth: 8 in. minimum.
.5
Each bracket shall provide adequate mounting space for one patch
panel and two wire management panels, one above and one below
each patch panel.
.6
Provide vertical cable management troughs on each side of
equipment brackets for patch cable management. Vertical cable
troughs to be Panduit type G slotted wall duct 4 in. wide by 5
in. deep. Mount trough on unistrut to bring face of trough 1 in.
out beyond face of patch panels mounted on wall brackets.
Vertical trough to extend the height of the wall mounted
brackets.
.7
Provide vertical cable management troughs in the center of each
column of equipment brackets for horizontal and backbone cable
management. Vertical cable troughs to be Panduit type G slotted
wall duct 4 in. wide by 5 in. deep. Provide number of cable
troughs to meet cable manufacturers percent fill recommendations.
Vertical trough to extend from the top of the wall mounted
brackets up to the ceiling space.
.8
Additional acceptable Manufacturers: Ortronics.
2.7
Wire Management
.1
Provide a horizontal wire management panel between patch panels
or above and below a patch panel for patch cables.
.2
Horizontal wire management panels shall be 2 rack units high
with 5 finger retaining rings minimum.
.3
Allow for an additional fifteen (15) horizontal wire management
panels for active electronics patch cables. Locations to be
determined on Site.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.4
2.8
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 9
Provide one cable support bar, 5" deep min., on rear of
equipment rack or cabinet for each patch panel mounted on the
equipment rack or cabinet.
Faceplate and Patch Panel Icons
.1
The following icon descriptions and colors shall be utilized
throughout the voice and data networking systems at all
workstations and patch panels.
.1
Telephone - "Phone", gray
.2
Fax - "Fax", gray
.3
Modem - "Modem", gray
.4
Data LAN - "Data", blue
.2
Provide blank icons for all unused ports.
2.9
Faceplates
.1
Faceplates shall accept dual port installation kits.
.2
Faceplates shall accept a minimum of four workstation jacks as
specified.
.3
Faceplates shall be iconable.
.4
Faceplates shall be provided with integral administrative
labeling strips.
2.10
Modular Furniture Faceplates
.1
Faceplate shall accept a minimum of 3 workstation jacks as
specified.
.2
Faceplate shall be iconable.
.3
Faceplate provided shall suit the modular furniture supplied by
the City of Winnipeg. Contractor to co-ordinate on Site.
2.11
Category 6 Workstation Jacks
.1
Jacks shall incorporate insulation displacement connections
specified for 24 AWG wire.
.2
Jacks shall be 8 position, 8 conductor modular type.
.3
All unused jack locations shall be installed with blank inserts.
.4
The connecting hardware for the enhanced Category 56 cabling
system channel shall meet the electrical characteristics of the
cabling system as specified in Clause 1.4 System Performance. The
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 10
channel shall meet the requirements specified with the connecting
hardware provided.
.5
2.12
Jacks shall be an unshielded T568A wiring configuration.
Category 3 Patch Panels
.1
Patch Panels shall be Category 3, 8-position 8-conductor modular
jack on face to 110 terminations on rear of panel. Wiring
configuration to terminate 2 pairs per port on telephone backbone
cabling system.
.2
All patch panels shall be CSA or ULC approved and shall be of
one manufacturer.
.3
Designation strips shall be provided for each jack. All cables
shall be terminated in numerical sequence and labeled as per
approved labelling scheme.
2.13
Category 6 Patch Panels
.1
Patch Panels shall be 8-position, 8-conductor modular jack on
face to 110 terminations on rear of panel. Wiring patterns to be
T568A.
.2
All patch panels shall be CSA or ULC approved and shall be of
one manufacturer.
.3
Termination blocks shall have the following characteristics:
.1
Type: all plastic insulants.
.2
Termination type: insulation displacement, dry, gas tight.
.3
Wire Size supported: 24AWG
.4
Retermination rate: greater than 200.
.5
Wire insertion force (24AWG): 59-127 Newtons.
.6
Wire retention force: (24AWG): 8lbs Horizontal. 1.8 lbs
Vertical.
.7
Insulation resistance: 100M ohms
.8
Dielectric strength: 2.0kV at 60 Hz.
.9
The patch panels for the enhanced Category 56 cabling
system channel shall meet the electrical characteristics of the
cabling system as specified in Clause 1.4 System Performance. The
channel shall meet the requirements specified with the patch
panels provided.
.4
Designation strips shall be provided for each jack. All cables
shall be terminated in numerical sequence and labeled as per
approved labelling scheme.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.14
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 11
Category 6 Patch Cables
.1
Shall meet EIA/TIA 568A standards.
.2
24 AWG stranded tinned copper, insulated with high density
plyethylene data grade cordage. The cord shall be jacketed in
flame retardant PVC.
.3
Shall be four pair configuration and terminate with eight pin
modular plug.
.4
Capable of high data rates to support voice, data, and video
applications.
.5
DC resistance per lead: 94 ohms/100m maximum.
.6
DC resistance unbalanced: 5% maximum.
.7
Mutual capacitance: 6.6nF/100m maximum.
.8
Characteristic Impedance: 100 ohms ±15% @ 1 to 100 MHz.
.9
The patch cables for the enhanced Category 56 cabling system
channel shall meet the electrical characteristics of the cabling
system as specified in Clause 1.4 System Performance. The channel
shall meet the requirements specified with the Category 5 patch
cables provided.
2.15
Horizontal Cabling
.1
Horizontal cabling shall consist of the following:
.1
four pair 100 ohm unshielded twisted pair (UTP).
.1
CSA or ULC certified.
.2
The horizontal cable for the enhanced Category 56
cabling system channel shall meet the electrical
characteristics of the cabling system as specified in Clause
1.4 System Performance. The channel shall meet the
requirements specified with the horizontal cable provided.
.3
24AWG solid copper conductor.
.4
insulation shall meet FT-4 fire rating.
.5
DC resistance: 9.38 ohms/100m maximum.
.6
DC resistance unbalanced: 5% maximum.
.7
Mutual capacitance: 5.6nF/100m maximum.
.8
Capacitance Unbalance (pair to ground): 330pF/100m.
.9
Characteristic Impedance: 100 ohms ± 15% at 1 to
100MHz.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.16
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 12
Backbone Cabling
.1
Voice backbone cabling shall consist of 25 pair 100 ohm
unshielded twisted pair (UTP).
.1
meet Category 3 specifications and CSA or ULC
certified.
.2
24AWG solid copper conductor
.3
insulated with suitable plastic dielectric material,
FT-4 rated
.4
When mixing multiple dissimilar signals the 25 pair
Category 3 cable must support distances up to 100m.
.5
DC resistance 9.4 ohms/100m maximum.
.6
Mutual capacitance: 5.6pF/100m.
.7
Characteristic Impedance: 100 ohms ± 15% at 1 to
100MHz
.8
Worst Pair Attenuation dB/100m:
.9
.2
MHz
dB
1.00
2.6
4.00
5.6
8.00
8.5
10.00
9.7
16.00
13.1
Worst Pair Near End Crosstalk (NEXT) dB at 100m:
MHz
dB
1.00
41
4.00
32
8.00
27
10.00
26
16.00
23
Data backbone cabling shall consist of:
.1
Category 6 UTP 4-pair cable as specified in Clause
2.19 Horizontal Cabling.
.2
Multimode Optical Fiber:
.1
CSA or ULC certified.
.2
Insulation shall meet FT-4 rating.
.3
Core diameter: 62.5 micron ± 3 micron.
.4
Cladding diameter: 125 micron ± 2 micron .
.5
Colored Fiber diameter: 900 micron ± 15 micron .
.6
Numerical Aperture: 0.275 ± 0.015.
.7
Buffering diameter: 890mm ± 50mm.
.8
Proof strength: 100,000 psi minimum.
.9
Fiber loss:
.1
3.5 dB/km at 850nm maximum.
.2
1.0 dB/km at 1300nm maximum.
.10 Bandwidth:
.1
200MHz at 850nm minimum.
.2
600MHz at 1300 nm minimum.
.11 Minimum bending radius of 20x cable diameter
during installation and 10x cable diameter after
installation minimum or as per manufacturers
recommendations.
.12 Distribution sytle
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.17
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 13
Grounding
.1
Provide a #3/0 AWG RW-90 insulated green copper ground from each
communications wiring closet back to the building main electrical
ground.
.2
Provide grounding bus bar in each wiring closet to terminate
ground conductors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Equipment
.1
Provide a minimum of 1m clearance between exposed live parts of
equipment and cross connect fields.
.2
Racks and cabinets shall be secured and grounded to
communications ground with a #2 RW90 insulated green copper
ground.
.3
Racks and cabinets shall be located so as to provide 800mm
clearance in front and behind each rack or cabinet as measured
from the outermost point of the rack, cabinet, or equipment which
is mounted within the rack or cabinet.
.4
Wall mounted equipment, racks, cabinets or brackets shall be
mounted on 19mm3/4" backboard 2.1m7 ft. to the top AFF.
.5
Equipment shall be mounted on backboards, racks, or cabinets a
minimum of 300mm12in AFF.
.6
Equipment shall be mounted to provide a minimum clearance of
300mm12in from end walls.
.7
Equipment connected directly to a cross connect shall be
connected with cables not more than 3m/10ft in length.
.8
Install the surge suppressor power bar on the rack designated
for active electronics as directed on Site.
3.2
Connectors and Faceplates
.1
Modular jacks shall be mounted with the contacts up.
.2
Four pair 100 ohms UTP cable:
.1
Terminate each four pair 100 ohms UTP cable directly to an
8 position, 8 conductor modular jack assembly at the Work area.
.2
Terminate all 8 position, 8 conductor modular jacks as per
T568A pin assignment.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
3.3
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 14
UTP Patch Cables
.1
Patch cables shall not exceed a combined length of 6m/20ft in a
channel.
.2
Provide all patch cables required to cross connect and connect
all patch panels and active electronics, and telephone cross
connects throughout the communications system including the
telephone demarcation field.
.3
Provide 3m patch cables for all workstations.
.4
Install patch cables in an organized manner, neatly laced within
the wire managment provided.
3.4
Horizontal Cabling
.1
Horizontal cabling shall be installed in a star topology.
.2
Cables shall be "combed" within cable tray in an organized
manner.
.3
Bridged taps shall not be used within the horizontal cabling
system.
.4
Hard splices shall not be used within a twisted pair horizontal
cabling system.
.5
Equipment shall not be connected directly to horizontal cables.
.6
Ensure minimum cable bend radius and maximum pulling tension, as
recommended by the cable manufacturer, is not exceeded. Minimum
bend radii for UTP cable is four (4) times the cable diameter,
manufacturers recommendations may be greater.
.7
Cables shall be bundled with Velcro cable straps. No tyraps are
permitted. Velcro cable straps are for bundling only, Velcro
cable straps shall not support the weight of the cable.
.8
When terminating cable in connecting hardware insure that the
amount of untwisted wire of UTP cable at the termination does not
exceed 13mm.
.9
Ensure cable is mounted, terminated, and managed to meet
manufacturers specifications.
.10
Horizontal cabling shall not exceed a distance of 90 meters from
cross connect to information outlet.
.11
Provide 3m10ft coil of slack in the Telecommunications Closet in
the cable tray above the equipment rack.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 15
.12
UTP cable at the information outlet shall be provided with
300mm12in coil of slack in the cable tray prior to entering
conduit stub.
.13
All horizontal cabling shall maintain the following distances
from EMI producing equipment:
.1
1.2m48in: motors or transformers
.2
1.0m40in: conduit and/or cables used for electrical power
distribution with voltages greater than 300V.
.3
300mm12in: conduit and/or cables used for electrical power
distribution with voltages less than 300V.
.4
300mm12in: fluorescent lighting.
.5
When horizontal cabling is required to cross fluorescent
lighting, conduit and/or cables used for power they shall cross
perpendicular to each other.
.14
When a building lightning protection system is utilized the
communications cabling shall not be installed closer than 1.8m6ft
from any lightning protection system conductors.
.15
All horizontal cabling that penetrates fire rated barriers must
be provided with fire stop to meet local fire codes.
3.5
UTP Backbone Cabling
.1
Backbone cabling shall be installed in a star topology.
.2
Install cables individually.
.3
Cables shall be "combed" within cable tray in an organized
manner.
.4
Bridged taps shall not be used within the backbone cabling
system.
.5
Ensure minimum cable bend radius and maximum pulling tension, as
recommended by the cable manufacturer, is not exceeded.
.6
When a building lightning protection system is utilized the
communications cabling shall not be installed closer than 1.8m6ft
from any lightning protection system conductors.
3.6
Administration
.1
Labeling shall be as per EIA/TIA 606 standards.
.2
All administrative labeling shall be typewritten with electronic
label maker printed on self-adhesive ribbon or on integral
labeling strip provided with equipment. Clean area where label
will be applied with alcohol or equivalent cleaner to remove dirt
and grease.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.3
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 16
Workstation and Horizontal Patch Panel labeling:
.1
R1-1000/2000
R
1
1000
2000
R - Rack, C - Cabinet
Rack or Cabinet #
sequential cable identification number
room number or workstation location
.2
Provide icons as specified on workstation devices and patch
panels.
.4
Backbone Patch Panel labeling:
.1
D1000-R1/C2
D
1000
R
1
C
2
D - data backbone, T - telephone backbone
sequential cable identification number
Head end; R - rack, C - cabinet
Head end rack or cabinet identification
Intermediate end; R - rack, C - cabinet
Intermediate end rack or cabinet identification
.2
Provide icons as specified on workstation devices and patch
panels.
.5
All horizontal and backbone cabling shall be provided with cable
labeling identification at both ends. Provide clear plastic cover
over cable labeling.
.6
All administrative labeling shall be recorded on as-built
drawings and included in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
.7
The use of colored backboards, connections, covers, or labels
are an approved method of color coding for the cross connect
fields.
3.7
Testing
.1
UTP Cabling:
.1
Testing shall be made in accordance with EIA/TIA TSB67 and
EIA/TIA-568A Annex A.
.2
Test kit must have been calibrated/re-calibrated within one
year prior to test results submitted. Provide a dated paper copy
of the calibration/re-calibration report. Include serial
number(s), firmware version and date of manufacturer. An
accredited laboratory that is traceable to NIST must have
completed the calibration.
.3
Only special adapters and/or special patch cables or OEM of
test kit are allowed to be used to perform a Channel Link test.
.4
Test results must show a "headroom" figure for each cable.
.5
Test reports must be from software/firmware that is the
latest version.
.6
Test kit must test for stray noise on the cable prior to
performing test.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Voice and Data
Communications
Cabling
Section 16747
Page 17
.7
The following tests shall be performed and recorded on all
the individual Voice and Data Communications cables from both
directions using a level 2 tester at 100MHz sweeps.
.1
Continuity or wiremap testing consisting of:
.1
Open/short testing.
.2
Polarity testing.
.3
Pair transposition testing.
.2
Signal Attenuation test.
.3
Near End Crosstalk (NEXT) at both Telecommunications
Closet and information outlet.
.4
DC loop resistance test.
.5
length in meters
.8
Tests shall be performed on the individual links. Link test
to TSB 67.
.9
Cables not complying with EIA/TIA 568A Category 5 standards
for 100MHz or passing TSB 67 test guidelines shall be identified
to the Contract Administrator for corrective action which may
include replacement at no additional expense to the City of
Winnipeg.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Intercom System
Section 16761
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.3
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
.4
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
.5
CCTV System
Section 16920
1.2
Care, Operation and Start-up
.1
1.3
Provide instructions in accordance with Section 16010.
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Include riser diagram, talk paths of complete intercom system.
1.4
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
Provide data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified
in Section 16010.
.2
Include description of system operation.
.3
Include parts list using component identification numbers
standard to electronics industry.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Intercom System
Section 16761
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Conduits: type EMT, size as indicated, to Section 16.
.2
Communication conductors: type LVT, size as indicated, to
Section 16010.
2.2
Central Exchange
.1
2.3
The Central Intercommunications Exchange shall be provided with
all the necessary components to connect and control slave and
master stations. The exchange shall be TOA #N-8000EX or approved
equal.
Master Station "Type A" (Handsets)
.1
The master station shall be TOA #N-8000MS speakerphone type
master. It shall require 24vDC supplied by the central exchange
and consume no more than 2.4W.
.2
Communication shall be loadspeaking voice-actuated, or voice
actuated with handset.
.3
Calling shall be by pretone and call LED illumination.
.4
Mounting shall be desk or surface wall mount.
2.4
Slave Station
.1
The slave station shall be TOA #N-8031MS open-voice type master.
It shall require 24vDC supplied by the central exchange and
consume no more than 10MA.
.2
Communication shall be loadspeaking voice-actuated.
.3
Calling shall be by pretone and call LED illumination.
.4
Mounting shall be flush wall mount with a stainless steel front
panel.
.5
Provide phone numbers in glazed frames adjacent to station to
indicate department master phone numbers.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.5
Intercom System
Section 16761
Page 3
Weatherproof Slave Station
.1
The slave station shall be TOA #N8050DSWP.
.2
Communication shall be loudspeaking voice-actuated.
.3
Mounting shall be flush, weatherproof.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install equipment and wiring as indicated and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Interconnect system components.
.3
Program as required.
.4
Exterior station located at parking lot, connects to CCTV camera
when activated.
3.2
Tests
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Conduct intelligibility performance test and submit test results
to Consultant.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Electric Heating
Section 16800
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
All drawings and all sections of the specifications shall apply
to and form an integral part of this section.
Requirements Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Provisions
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.3
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
.4
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes
and Fittings
Section 16132
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Electric Heaters
.1
Provide, install, wire and connect all convection type baseboard
and fan forced wall heaters c/w thermostats sized and positioned
as indicated on the drawings and schedules. All heaters shall be
rated for specified voltage, constructed of minimum 18 ga. steel,
as manufactured by Canadian Chromalox Company Ltd., Westcan or
approved equal.
.2
Remote thermostats shall be: low voltage (24 Volts) T87F3145 c/w
wall plate, sub-base, covering ring and clear key, lock cover
for non and tamperproof locations.
.3
Provide also heavy-duty ventilated plastic guards on remote
thermostats located in public areas such as entrances, washrooms,
corridors and other unsupervised areas. Plastic guards to be
Honeywell clear TG500A c/w lock and two keys.
.4
All heaters with 3 phase power and all heaters in excess of 4000
watts shall be c/w built-in contactor controlled by thermostat.
All units in excess of 240 volts shall be c/w built-in contactor
and control transformer.
.5
All heaters mounted on wall shall be above baseboard unless
otherwise noted.
.6
Provide built-in relays and control transformers in either the
heater or on a separate matching blank heater section.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.7
Electric Heating
Section 16800
Page 2
Unless specified, provide control transformers controlling more
than one relay and narrow type heaters shall be mounted in a
separate matching enclosure adjacent to the heater.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Electric Heaters and Cables
.1
Install wire and connect all convection type, baseboard and fan
forced wall heaters c/w thermostats positioned as indicated on
the drawings.
.2
Where remote thermostats are indicated in public areas such as
entrances, washrooms, corridors, and other unsupervised areas
install heavy-duty ventilated plastic guards.
.3
Make power and control connections.
.4
Install relays, transformers and thermostats.
.5
Interconnect heater relays to be controlled from one common
thermostat.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Motor Starters
to 600 V
Section 16811
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
.2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings
and Conduit Fittings
Section 16111
.3
Wires and Cables
Section 16122
.4
Motor Control Centre
Section 16820
1.2
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals.
.2
Indicate:
.1
Mounting method and dimensions.
.2
Starter size and type.
.3
Layout of identified internal and front panel components.
.4
Enclosure types.
.5
Wiring diagram for each type of starter.
.6
Interconnection diagrams.
1.3
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for motor starters for
incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 Submittals.
.2
Include operation and maintenance data for each type and style
of starter.
1.4
Maintenance Materials
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Provide listed spare parts for each different size and type of
starter:
.1
4 contacts, stationary.
.2
4 contacts, movable.
.3
2 contacts, auxiliary.
.4
2 control transformers.
.5
2 operating coils.
.6
2 fuses.
.7
10 indicating lamps.
.8
1 HOA kit.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Motor Starters
to 600 V
Section 16811
Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
2.2
Starters: EEMAC E14-1.
.1
Half size starters not acceptable.
.2
Provide NEMA rated starters only; IEC rated starters are
not acceptable.
Manual Motor Starters
.1
Single and Three phase manual motor starters of size, type,
rating, and enclosure type as indicated, with components as
follows:
.1
Switching mechanism, quick make and break.
.2
Overload heaters, manual reset, trip indicating handle.
.2
Accessories:
.1
Toggle switch labelled as indicated.
.2
Indicating light: type and colour as indicated.
.3
Locking tab to permit padlocking in "ON" or "OFF" position.
.4
Flush mounted type in public areas or as indicated.
2.3
Full Voltage Magnetic Starters
.1
Magnetic of size, type, rating and enclosure type as indicated
with components as follows:
.1
Contactor solenoid operated, rapid action type.
.2
Motor overload protective device in each phase, manually
reset from outside enclosure.
.3
Power and control terminals.
.4
Wiring and schematic diagram inside starter enclosure in
visible location.
.5
Identify each wire and terminal for external connections,
within starter, with permanent number marking identical to
diagram.
.6
Control transformer.
.7
Starters to be two speed where required; type to match
requirement of motor provided by Division 15.
.2
Accessories:
.1
Pushbuttons and Selector switches: labelled as indicated.
.2
Indicating lights: type and color as indicated.
.3
2-N/O and 2-N/C spare auxiliary contacts unless otherwise
indicated.
.4
HOA selector switch.
.5
Two speed single winding starters shall have individual Red
run pilot lights for LOW and HIGH speed run indication.
.6
An adjustable 20 sec. - 3 min. time delay relay (set at 30
sec.) shall be installed in two speed starters. It shall function
only during the transition from HIGH SPEED to LOW SPEED where the
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Motor Starters
to 600 V
Section 16811
Page 3
motor will be in a de-energized state for a period of 30 seconds
after initiation of this switching.
.7
Provide and install time delay relay (to sequence starting
after power failure) adjustable 0 - 120 seconds for motors 15
horsepower and larger.
2.4
Control Transformer
.1
Single phase, dry type, control transformer with primary voltage
as indicated and 120V secondary, complete with secondary fuse,
installed in starter as indicated.
.2
Size control transformer for control circuit load plus 20% spare
capacity.
2.5
Finishes
.1
2.6
Apply finishes to enclosure in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical - General Provisions.
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section
16010 - Electrical - General Provisions.
.2
Manual starter designation label, white plate, black letters,
size 1, engraved as indicated.
.3
Magnetic starter designation label, white plate, black letters,
size 4 engraved as indicated.
2.7
Manufacturers
.1
Acceptable manufacturers: Allen Bradley Canada Ltd.; Cutler
Hammer Canada Ltd.; "System 89" Siemens Electric Limited;
Square D.
.2
All manufacturers shall provide their industrial quality product
line; commercial quality starters are not acceptable.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Motor Starters
to 600 V
Section 16811
Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install starters, connect power and control as indicated.
.2
Ensure correct fuses and overload devices elements installed.
.3
All starters for two speed motors to be provided with six pole
disconnect switches and wired with six conductors. Refer to motor
schedule and drawings for two speed motors.
3.2
Tests
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements and manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Operate switches, contactors to verify correct functioning.
.3
Perform starting and stopping sequences of contactors and
relays.
.4
Check that sequence controls, interlocking with other separate
related starters, equipment, control devices, operate as
indicated.
.5
Ensure motor rotation corresponds with the direction required by
the driven equipment.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
.1
The Work includes furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and documentation required for a complete and working
Integrated Security Management System as specified in this
section and as provided by Johnson Controls. This scope of Work
shall cover the requirements for the access control, alarm
monitoring and integrated systems as issued by:
.1
The City of Winnipeg.
.2
It shall cover the operational specifications, software and
hardware for a new Integrated Security Management System to be
installed at the USERS office/facilities at:
.1
700 Assiniboine Avenue
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
General Terms and Conditions included in the Contract Documents.
.2
Division 16.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Design and operation of the system shall conform to the
following referenced codes, regulations, and standards as
applicable:
.1
Canadian Electrical Code (CEC)
.2
NFPA 70
.3
UL 294 and UL 1076 as required where applicable
.4
FCC Rules and Regulations
.5
Part 15 Class A or B as applicable
.6
Applicable Local laws, regulations and other codes
.7
CE mark, as and where applicable
.8
C-Tick mark, as and where applicable
.9
Degrees of protection provided by the controller enclosure:
.1
NEMA 250: minimum Type 2
.2
IEC 529: minimum IP 21
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.4
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 2
GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
.1
The Security Management System (SMS) shall be capable of
integrating multiple building functions including access control,
alarm management, intrusion detection, video imaging and badging,
database partitioning, interfacing to closed circuit television
monitors (CCTV) and digital video recording (DVR) matrix
switches, and interfacing with intercom equipment. It shall also
be capable of controlling elevators, as well as allowing
cardholder information and queries from external system databases
(MIS interface). For this project the card access is integrated
with CCTV and Intercom.
.2
The system shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories listed
for UL 294 Access Control Systems, and UL 1076 Proprietary
Burglar Alarm Systems. PC's and all controllers furnished on the
job shall carry the UL 294 and UL 1076 labels as required.
Bidders shall state their product is found on UL's certification
website and shall provide the corresponding URL.
.3
The system shall be modular in nature, and will permit expansion
in both capacity and functionality through the addition of
controllers, card readers, workstations, or by increasing the
number of cards and sensors.
.4
The system shall incorporate the necessary hardware, software,
and firmware to collect, transmit, and process alarm, tamper and
trouble conditions, access requests, and advisories in accordance
with the security procedures of the facility. The system shall
control the flow of authorized personnel traffic through the
secured areas of the facility.
.5
The user interface at the host computer (server) and at the
operator workstation shall be a mouse driven graphical user
interface (GUI) allowing the user to open and Work on multiple
windows simultaneously.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
Contractor shall submit all items in accordance with the
requirements of the Submittals sections and shall include, but
not be limited to, the following:
.1
Model numbers from all furnished job components.
.2
Manufacturers catalog data sheets for all components.
.3
Input power requirements for all SMS components.
.4
Complete engineered drawings indicating:
.1
Manufacturer model numbers and specifications.
.2
Dimensions, layouts and installation details.
.3
Point-to-point wiring diagrams for all SMS devices.
.4
Termination details for all SMS devices.
.5
Single-line system architecture drawings representing
the entire SMS.
.6
Interfaces with all sub-systems.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 3
.2
Owner Acceptance Form with a check box associated with each card
reader and input point. A check mark in the box will indicate
that each point has been correctly installed and that
communication between the controller and the server has been
established. This form shall be completed prior to Owner
acceptance of the system.
.3
Six (6) sets of the Manufacturer's User and Installation
Manuals.
.4
Course outlines for each of the end user training programs. The
course outlines shall include the course duration, and a brief
description of the subject matter.
1.6
ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS
.1
The following abbreviations and acronyms are used in this
document:
AC
ADA
ASCII
AV
BPI
BPS
CCTV
CE
CPU
DVR
FASC-N
FCC
FDA
ID
IEC
In-X-It
I/O
ISO
LED
NEC
NEMA
NFPA
ODBC
OPC
PIN
RFQ
SEIWG
SMS
SPDT
UDF
UL
URL
WAN
Alternating Current
Americans with Disabilities Act
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Audio Visual
Bits Per Inch
Bits Per Second
Closed Circuit Television
European Conformity
Central Processing Unit
Digital Video Recorder
Federal Agency Smart Credential Number
Federal Communications Commission
Food and Drug Administration
Identification
International Electrotechnical Commission
Entry/Exit
Input/Output
International Organization for Standardization
Light Emitting Diode
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association
Open Database Connectivity
OLE for Process Control
Personal Identification Number
Request for Quotation
Security Equipment Integration Working Group
Security Management System
Single Pole, Double Throw
User Defined Field
Underwriters Laboratories
Uniform Resource Location
Wide Area Network
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
1.7
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 4
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
.1
The following terms are defined for the purposes of this
specification:
.1
Access Group: A logical group of card readers (terminals)
which may be connected to one or more controllers and that
represent a collection of readers for which a particular
cardholder may have access privileges.
.2
Access Mode: The mode of operation in which the SMS shall
only annunciate tamper and trouble conditions at a monitored
point. Alarm conditions shall not be annunciated in this mode.
This is referred to as "alarm shunting."
.3
Acknowledge: The action taken by an SMS operator to
indicate that he/she is aware of a specific alarm or tamper
state.
.4
Advisory: A message provided by the SMS to the operator to
inform him/her of a condition as reported by the SMS.
.5
Alarm: A change of state as detected by the SMS indicating
that it has detected a condition that its sensors were designed
to identify.
.6
Audit Trail: A sequential record of system activity used to
reconstruct and review a series of system events.
.7
Badge: The physical card, carried by the cardholder used to
gain access through a portal by presentation to a card reader.
.8
Boolean: An expression that results in a value of either
TRUE or FALSE.
.9
Cardholder: A person who is a member of the cardholder
database who may have been issued a valid badge.
.10 Card Reader: A device usually located at access points,
designed to decode the information contained on or within a badge
for the purposes of making an access decision or for identity
verification.
.11 CK7xx: This term refers to Cardkey CK7xx series controllers
CK705, CK720, and CK721.
.12 Clear: The action taken by an SMS operator to remove an
alarm from the alarms queue after it has been acknowledged and,
if required, responded to.
.13 Controller: - This term refers to Cardkey CK7xx series
(CK705, CK720, and CK721) network panels or S321, S320, D6xx
series (D620, D620-TIU, and D600 AP), and P900 serial panels.
These connect to terminals and communicate with the Server. S320
and D6xx series panels are also called "legacy" panels.
.14 Disable: A system command that intentionally places a
device or system out of service, typically for maintenance.
.15 Download: Refers to the transfer of system configuration
information from the server to the memory of the controllers.
This includes information such as badge records and access
rights.
.16 Dry Contact: A voltage free electrical contact.
.17 Elevator/Cabinet Control: Elevators and cabinets are
readers associated with a set of output points and an optional
set of input points. The field controller interfaces with
elevators and cabinets using output points to enable car-call
buttons or unlock cabinet doors and input points to monitor their
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 5
status. The controller may grant access to a floor or cabinet
door when a badge is presented at a reader installed in the
elevator cab. The elevator/cabinet access control allows the
operator to assign cardholder access to various elevators,
floors, cabinets, and doors in a facility using access group
definition.
.18 Events: Events are sequences of system commands or actions
that may be activated at a pre-defined time or on an as-needed
basis. Events can be activated and deactivated either manually or
automatically.
.19 Facility Code: A coded number, in addition to the
individual card number stored within each card key, which
uniquely identifies the facility at which the card is valid. This
feature prevents cards from one facility being used at another
facility with a similar access control system.
.20 Guard Tour: A sequence of transactions that, when performed
within a specified time frame, ensures that your facility is
being properly monitored by security personnel. The main purpose
of a tour is to confirm and record that an area has been
physically visited. It provides real time monitoring of guard
activities - reporting if a guard arrives early or late to
designated tour stations. Guard Tour stations can either be
readers or input points. Tours can be selected randomly or may be
specified at regular time intervals.
.21 Input Point: Electrical contacts that open or close to
inform the system of a change of state.
.22 Legacy: Refers to S320 and D6xx series (D620, D620-TIU, and
D600 AP) controllers.
.23 Line Supervision: The process of monitoring an electrical
circuit via electrical and software systems to verify the
electrical integrity of the supervised circuit.
.24 Loop: A number of terminals connected in series in a
continuous circuit that starts and ends at the controller.
.25 Monitoring: The process of maintaining a vigilant watch
over a system element or point and taking appropriate action in
response to system activity.
.26 Offline: A condition in which a controller is not in
communication with the server. In the offline mode, the
controller continues to make access decisions and process alarms
according to the information stored at its local database.
.27 Output Point: Control external devices such as signals,
relays, LEDs, control modules, etc.
.28 Panel: See Controller.
.29 Password: A combination of numbers and/or letters unique to
each SMS operator.
.30 Polling: Terminals are interrogated at regular intervals by
the controller to establish and verify communications with other
equipment and exchange data if necessary.
.31 Port: A connection that provides a means of communication
between devices.
.32 Priority: The relative importance of system events.
.33 Reset: A command or feedback signal that indicates that a
monitored point has returned to its normal state having
previously been at the alarm or trouble state.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 6
.34 Secure Mode: The normal state of an alarm input point. A
change of state in this mode shall indicate an alarm, or that it
has transferred to the trouble or tamper state.
.35 Secured Area: A physical location within the facility to
which access is controlled by one or more card readers.
.36 Server: The main computer in the system. The server runs
the SMS software, stores database information, and communicates
with the field controllers and operator workstation terminals.
.37 Service: The process that performs specific system
functions and operates in the background without user
intervention.
.38 Soft Alarm: Soft alarms and their addresses are created by
the system during installation rather than hardwired to an actual
input point.
.39 Tamper: A condition within the circuitry of a monitored
point, which indicates that the electrical integrity of that
sensing circuit has been compromised.
.40 Terminal: Terminals provide additional reader interfaces,
input points or output points to the SMS.
.41 Time Zone: A user-defined period made up of days of the
week and hours of the day during which events such as Valid Card
Grants and Input/Output linking events may occur.
.42 Transaction: Indicate some form of system activity. It may
include items such as access requests and general system
messages.
.43 Trouble: A condition within the circuitry of a monitored
point, which indicates that an equipment malfunction, single
break, single fault and/or a wire-to-wire short exists.
.44 User-Definable: An attribute of an SMS function, which may
be easily tailored by an operator without extensive computer
programming knowledge or experience.
.45 Workstation: A personal computer connected to the main
Security Management System (SMS) server computer via local area
network connections for the purpose of operating the system and
responding to alarms.
1.8
OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
System Capabilities
.1
General
.1
The SMS shall operate in client-server architecture.
Any SMS software and firmware required for the following
system functions shall be fully tested with the existing SMS
application software. Custom software including "ladder
logic programming" and other custom application programming
intended to provide the following features are unacceptable.
.2
Database Management
.1
The system shall create and maintain a master database
of all cardholder records and system activity for all
connected points.
.1
Multiple data bases shall be able to be created,
each with its own password protection.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.3
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 7
Audit Trail
.1
The SMS shall maintain an audit trail file of operator
activity, and provide the ability to generate a report by
operator, time and date, and type of activity. The system
shall allow the operator to direct the audit trail report to
screen, printer, or file. The audit trail feature shall
record operator activity associated with:
- Users
- Partitions
- Badges, badge layouts, badge fields, badge IDs, badge
encoding, automatic badge numbers, setup
- Cardholders
- Field devices such as panels, terminals, terminal
groups, input points and groups, output points and groups
- Access groups
- Holidays, time zones, panel holidays and panel time
zones
- Access templates
- Companies and Departments
- Soft alarms
- Site Parameters
- Workstations
- Maps and map icon sets
- User Defined Fields
- Events
- Panel card event
- Alarms, alarm filters, alarm history, alarm response
text, alarm colors, and alarm instructions
- Message forwarding
- Permission groups
- Panel relays
- Reports
- MIS Interface
- Image recall filters
- Counters
- BACnet elements such as action interlocks and BACnet
sources
- Guard Tour definition, station definition and guard
tour history transactions
- Loop configuration
- Enterprise Sites and Enterprise Parameters
- Elevator parameters, including configuration, floor
masks, floor groups
- Cabinet parameters, including configuration, door
masks, door groups
- Area and area control layouts
- Muster zones and muster history transactions
- Connections
- CCTV elements, including server, switch, tour, alarm,
macro, system auxiliary, monitor, sequence, camera, preset,
pattern, and camera auxiliary
- Enable codes
- P900 elements such as flags, counters, trigger events,
trigger links, system parameters, sequence files
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 8
- Air Crew PIN Number
- Remote Server
- Message filters and message filter groups
- Local Site
- Service Startup Configuration
- Application
- Panel Card Format
- Security Level Range
- Audit
- Transaction History
- Redundancy
- Intercom exchanges and stations
Audio Visual (AV) elements such as site, camera,
monitor, preset, input to camera, dry contact
- Request Approvers
- FASC-N CCC
Input Point Monitoring
.1
The SMS shall collect and process status information
from all monitored points.
Alarm Annunciation
.1
The SMS shall audibly and visually annunciate all
alarms, advisories, and tamper and trouble conditions.
Input Point Supervision
.1
The SMS shall electrically supervise all 2-state and
4-state input point circuits as specified or shown on the
drawings.
Reports
.1
The SMS shall fully integrate with a dynamic report
writer module allowing users to create custom reports. The
dynamic report writer shall be Seagate Crystal Reports
Writer 9.0 professional version with the following features:
.1
Mouse-driven graphical user interface with the
ability to select from a list of database fields.
.2
User-definable reports that can be saved and
re-run as required, without redefining the report
fields and format each time the report is run.
.2
The SMS report feature shall provide access to all
data in the system from entire databases to specific system
transactions or configurations. Reports shall be reviewed on
screen or printed.
Online Help System
.1
The SMS shall provide online help, which shall be
available at anytime from any active screen by pressing
<F1>.
Operator Access
.1
The SMS shall provide operator password controls to be
assigned to individual users. The system administrator shall
be able to define a number of parameters to set up strong
passwords, passwords that are hard to break such as password
validation, maximum consecutive invalid logins, minimum
length, number of letters (uppercase and lowercase) or
numerals required in a password. The SMS shall provide added
security by requiring operators to enter their password when
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.10
.11
.12
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 9
performing certain system-critical functions. Stored
passwords shall be encrypted.
.2
The system administrator shall assign the operator
with menu permissions that define the system elements to
which the operator can access. In addition, the SMS shall
assign message filters to define which messages (alarms or
transactions) the operator can see.
Alarm Input Point Reporting Delay
.1
The SMS shall allow the operator to apply an input
point reporting delay period from 0-60 seconds for each
input point terminal. The default setting for each input
point reporting delay shall be zero seconds.
Alarm Input Point Suppression
.1
The SMS shall provide an alarm input point suppression
facility such that the operator may define a time zone
suppression period for each individual input point. Alarm
conditions for suppressed input points shall not be recorded
or archived by the system, however trouble conditions will
be recorded.
Alarm Graphics (Maps)
.1
The alarm graphics portion of the SMS shall provide
dynamic color alarm graphic maps with the following
functions:
.1
User-definable graphic maps to depict
input/output point conditions, reader status, and
sub-map attachments in the system.
.2
The SMS shall support the importing of image
formats produced with any graphic drawing program in
TIF, BMP, JPEG, WMF, PCX or EPS format. Vector file
formats are not acceptable.
.3
The SMS map program shall support the importing
of most image file format graphics to produce custom
icons for all map attachments (input, output, reader,
etc.).
.4
The map display window shall have Home, Previous
and Up level buttons for rapid movement among map
levels. It shall also provide map selection and size
adjustment lists.
.5
The SMS software shall be capable of storing a
number of graphic maps. The quantity shall be limited
by available hard disk storage space only.
.6
The SMS shall provide a palette that includes the
following categories of pre-defined alarm map icons:
.1
Input - a user-defined alarm input point
located anywhere in the system. The input point
icon flashes, changes color and the computer's
internal sounder beeps when an alarm condition
exits. Users can respond by either clicking on the
icon or moving directly to the alarm queue window.
Each alarm input icon has a pop-up box to indicate
its current state (open, short, alarm/active,
secure, suppressed, unknown).
.2
Output - a user-defined output point located
anywhere in the SMS. Clicking on the icon will set
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.13
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 10
or reset the output point. In addition, it can
display its current status (set, reset, unknown).
.3
Map layer - indicates that lower level maps
associated with the top layer map exist in the
system. Operators will navigate through the map
layers by clicking on the up and down icons.
.4
Intercom Station - when a call request is
received for a station, the intercom icon will
flash on the map, and the user can select to
connect or disconnect the call. In addition, the
map can display the following intercom states
Station Idle, Station Busy, Station Connected,
Station Call Request, or Status Unknown.
.5
Reader Terminals - will display one of the
following icons: unlocked, unknown, up and down.
.6
Panels - a system panel controlled by the
SMS. Panel icons will indicate a status of either
up, down, or unknown.
.7
I/O Terminals - I/O terminal icons will
indicate a status of either up, down, or unknown.
.8
Events - Events can be manually activated
from a map rather than by trigger conditions.
.9
Loop Tamper - loop tamper alarms icons will
indicate a status of set, secure or unknown.
.10 Cameras - When cameras are associated with
input points and the input point is on the map,
the user can click a camera icon to open AV Player
to display live or stored video.
.11 AV Dry Contact - AV dry contact alarm icons
will indicate a status of secure, alarmed or
unknown.
Alarm Handling
.1
The alarm handling portion of the system, which
consists of the point contacts and the alarm monitoring
window, shall provide the following functions:
.2
Alarm monitoring window - displays the total number of
alarms in the queue and the number of alarms pending, and
can be sorted by column. Users can select highlighted alarm
inputs to directly access map layer.
.3
User-definable alarm message/instructions description
- allows the user to assign an alarm message/instruction to
input points and other applications.
.4
Alarm message "pick list" - all alarm message names
and associated descriptions appear in the form of a pick
list from which the user may select an appropriate alarm
name and message.
.5
Alarm input points - the system supports up to 17,000
alarm-input points.
.6
Alarm input point maintenance - allows the operator to
'Add', 'Edit', or 'Delete' an alarm input point. The
'Delete' option requires user confirmation. All maintenance
functions are logged to the audit trail and archived to the
hard disk of the server.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.14
.15
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 11
.7
The system shall support both 2-state and 4-state
alarm input point monitoring as called for in this
specification or as shown on the drawings.
.8
Alarm priority - an alarm priority queue from 0-255.
Individual wave sound assignment will be based on alarm
priority.
.9
Alarm pop-up - alarm inputs that are designated, as
"pop-up" by the operator shall take priority over any active
non-alarm window. If the operator is viewing a non-alarm
window when a pop-up alarm occurs, the alarm queue window
shall be automatically placed on top of all other windows to
allow the operator to respond to the alarm condition.
.10 Alarm instruction display - a window containing up to
ten lines of user-defined instructions, which indicate to
the operator how to respond to the selected alarm.
.11 Alarm condition history display - a window displaying
the alarm history, together with a time and date stamp of
each condition.
.12 Alarm response entry - a window in which the operator
may enter free-form text (up to 255 characters) describing
how he/she responded to a given alarm.
.13 The operator shall be able to select from a list of
predefined response descriptions.
.14 The alarm instruction display, alarm condition history
display, and the alarm response entry box shall all be part
of one summary window. Separate windows or applications to
support any of these three functions are unacceptable.
.15 Alarm colors - the operator shall be able to recognize
specific alarms by the color assigned to each. Color
assignment is based on alarm priority and alarm state.
Security Threat Level Alert
.1
The SMS shall allow the user to configure badge and
terminal security levels (0 to 99) by color and range.
Security levels shall be mapped to a five-color
"Red-Orange-Yellow-Blue-Green" system, each of which can be
set a numeric value range. In the event of a security
breach, an authorized operator shall be able to quickly
change access privileges, including overrides, to
efficiently set/reset the status of all readers to the
required security level.
Event Processing
.1
Panel Card Events: The SMS shall allow the user to
define panel card events, executed by the cardholder at a
keypad card reader. The user can define any of the following
data for each event:
.1
Alphanumeric event name (numeric identifier only
is unacceptable)
.2
Access code to control the triggering of the
event (card activated event)
.3
Event trigger type (card only, card + PIN, card +
PIN + code, card + code, void card)
.4
Event privilege level (0-7)
.5
Duration of the event execution (0-1440 minutes)
.6
Input point group to be suppressed or not
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.16
.17
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 12
.7
Output point group to be activated or not
.8
Door strike operation enabled/disable
.9
Reset panel alarm relay
.2
Host Events (Triggers): The SMS shall provide the
operator with a scrolling list of event sequence triggers,
which may be combined with the event sequence logical
operators listed below to program a custom sequence of
events. The SMS shall be delivered with this functionality,
regardless of whether or not these features are implemented
by the user upon initial installation.
.3
Host Events (Actions): The SMS shall provide a
scrolling list of event sequence actions, and shall allow
the user to attach one or more actions to the event sequence
triggers to program a custom sequence of events.
.4
Logical Operators for Trigger Conditions: The SMS
shall provide a scrolling list of the following logical
operators for event trigger conditions:
.1
= (Equal to)
.2
! (Not equal to)
.3
(Greater than)
.4
< (Less than)
.5
>= (Greater than or equal to)
.6
<= (Less than or equal to)
.5
Logical Operators for Triggers: The SMS shall the
provide the following event trigger logical operators to
allow the user to attach one or more of the logical
operators with one or more of the event triggers and card
actions listed above to program a custom sequence of events.
.6
And
.7
Or
Time Zones
.1
The SMS shall provide the capability for the user to
define time zones with the following identification and
configuration parameters.
.1
Alphanumeric name.
.2
Alphanumeric description.
.3
Allowance for up to eight periods, four active
and four inactive, during each day of the week and each
of three different holiday types.
.4
Any day of the year may be designated as a
holiday; each defined as one of three holiday types.
Communications
.1
Pertaining to network-based communications between the
server and S321/CK7xx series controllers:
.1
Communications between the server and the CK7xx
series controllers can optionally support a redundant
network path. Thus, the loss of communications on the
primary network path automatically causes
communications to be established via the other path
without operator intervention.
.2
Should the controllers lose communication with
the server, the controllers shall continue to control
access and monitor inputs for all connected points.
Local history of all transactions shall be buffered at
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 13
the controller and automatically uploaded to the server
for alarm reporting and long-term historical storage
once communications is re-established.
.3
The Contractor shall be responsible for the
design of a system that will compensate for all signal
level losses in the trunk wiring. This shall include
any power supplies for the field devices and any signal
level converters or repeaters for the proper
amplification of electrical signals.
.2
Pertaining to serial communications between the server
and Legacy (D620, D620-TIU, D600 AP, and S320) controllers:
.1
Communications between the server and the Legacy
controllers can optionally support a redundant
communications path via a bi-directional polling
methodology. Thus, the loss of communications on the
primary ("forward") polling path automatically causes
communications to be established via the other
("reverse") path without operator intervention.
.2
Should the Legacy controllers lose communications
with the server, the controllers shall continue to
control access and monitor inputs for all connected
points. Local history of all transactions shall be
buffered at the controller and automatically uploaded
to the server for alarm reporting and long-term
historical storage once communications is
re-established.
.3
The Contractor shall be responsible for the
design of a system that will compensate for all signal
level losses in the trunk wiring. This shall include
any power supplies for the field devices and any signal
level converters or repeaters for the proper
amplification of electrical signals.
.3
Pertaining to communication modes, the SMS shall
communicate with controllers that provide reader interfaces,
input points, or output relays. Communication shall be
bi-directional, some messages shall be sent from the server
to the field controllers, other messages shall be sent from
the controllers to the server, and then can be distributed
within the system (e.g. workstations). The SMS shall provide
the following three operating modes:
.1
Local - All access decisions shall be made by the
controllers. This eliminates the need for panels to
communicate with the server every time an access
request is presented at a reader. Local mode provides
the best overall system capability; however, access
will be denied to those badges not stored in the
controller memory.
.2
Central - This mode is useful when assigning
access restrictions on a global scale (throughout the
entire system). All access requests shall be forwarded
to the server for an access grant or deny decision.
Central mode has the most impact on system performance
(the slowest), and should be used only when necessary.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.18
.19
.20
.21
.22
.23
.24
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 14
.3
Shared - Access decisions shall be made either at
the controller level or by the server. Controllers will
first search for a badge in their memory, as in Local
mode. If a badge's record is not found at the
controller level, the access request is then forwarded
to the server, as in Central mode. Shared mode is
useful when a controller's badge capacity is exceeded.
User-defined Cardholder Database Fields
.1
The SMS shall support an unlimited number of
user-defined data fields, which may be used to store
information for each cardholder. Each field may be
alphanumeric text, numeric, date, and Boolean. The SMS shall
provide standard menu items, which allow the operator to
define these cardholder database fields at anytime. The SMS
shall remain online while user-defined cardholder database
fields are added or edited. It shall be possible, using
standard SMS system menu commands to report on all
user-defined cardholder fields.
Event and Transaction History
.1
The SMS shall maintain a record of all alarms, card
transactions, and system exceptions, and provide a means for
users to access this information. This log can either be
viewed in real-time or by printed report.
Message Filtering/Routing
.1
The SMS shall provide the capacity to control the
types of messages transmitted to local workstations and
remote servers, thereby reducing the amount of network
traffic by only providing filters that only allow a subset
of messages to pass a specific criteria. Filtering shall be
applied based on the operator logged on to the workstation.
Filtering criteria shall include alarm or message type and
subtype, Site name, operator name, partition, item name,
query string and priority.
Anti-Passback Control
.1
The SMS shall provide the capability to prevent more
than one person from gaining access to a controlled area by
recognizing when a cardholder with access privileges
attempts to pass their card back to another person. If so
programmed, an alarm may be generated if the cardholder
violates the anti-passback rules. It shall be possible to
define which readers are subject to anti-passback rules on
an individual basis.
Anti-Tailgate Control
.1
The SMS shall provide the capability to prevent more
than one person accessing a controlled area because of a
single card transaction.
In-X-It (entry/exit) Control
.1
The SMS shall support the capability to control a
card's entry into or exit from an area based on the previous
transaction status of the card. An alarm may be generated if
the cardholder violates the In-X-It conditions.
Duress Processing
.1
The SMS shall permit cardholders to force a soft alarm
to indicate that they are requesting access to an area under
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.25
.26
.27
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 15
force or duress. In the event of such a situation, the
cardholder will be granted access and an alarm will be
generated.
Cardholder Definition
.1
The SMS shall allow cardholders to be defined by any
of the following identification and operating parameters:
.1
Cardholder name (first, middle, last)
.2
Cardholder type (regular or visitor)
.3
Cardholder ID
.4
Cardholder address
.5
Cardholder phone number and extension number
.6
Validation period using start and void dates
.7
Department and Company fields from selection list
of user-defined departments and companies
.8
Web access permissions
.9
Email address
.10 Cardholder journal (user-entered notes associated
with the cardholder)
.11 Unlimited number of user-defined cardholder
fields. The SMS shall use these fields in filtering
reports
.2
The Cardholder application shall select automatically
the name of a newly added cardholder in the list of
cardholders; the application shall also allow the display of
cardholder badge transaction history.
Badge Definition
.1
The SMS shall allow cardholders to be defined by any
of the following badge identification and operating
parameters on a per badge basis:
.1
Badge number assignment
.2
Badge type (access or identification)
.3
Issue level (0-255), only (1) per badge
.4
Badge facility code
.5
Reason for issuing a badge (damaged, lost, new,
not returned, reissue, returned, stolen, temporary,
visitor)
.6
Badge purpose (to specify the badge's intention)
.7
Validation period using start and void date and
time
.8
Executive privilege enabled or disabled
.9
Active/Disable badge toggle button
.10 Trace enabled or disabled
.11 Override enabled or disabled
.12 PIN code (4 or 5 digits)
.13 Badge event privilege level (0-7)
.14 Security level (0-99)
.15 Special access privileges (to satisfy
requirements for assisted access according to ADA)
.16 Assign a minimum number of 10 badges per
Cardholder
.17 Assign 32 Access Groups and Time zones per badge
Image Recall
.1
The SMS shall allow the system to display a
cardholder's picture whenever he/she badges at a specific
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.28
.29
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 16
terminal or group of terminals. When a cardholder badges at
a terminal under one of the following filtering conditions,
the cardholder image linked to the badge number shall be
displayed, along with their name, date/time, badge number,
terminal, user-defined fields, and the transaction message.
The SMS shall allow the display to pop-up in front of other
windows whenever a badge meets one or all of the following
defined filtering criteria:
- Access Grant
- Access Deny
- Invalid Card
- Invalid Issue Level
- Invalid PIN
- Anti-Passback On
- Invalid Card Timezone
- Invalid Reader
Real-time System Activity Window
.1
The SMS shall provide a real time system activity
monitor window, which can be displayed on any operator
workstation terminal screen whenever the SMS server is
online. This window shall have the capability to toggle the
display on and off, as well as to selectively display the
following items at the operator's discretion:
- Alarms
- Access grant
- Access denied
- Badge Trace
- Audit trail
- Panel
- Host
- Elevator
- Cabinet
- Area
- Mustering
- Guard Tour
.2
The SMS shall provide color configuration capabilities
for each of the above transaction types to help operators
recognize a specific type of transaction. In addition, in
transactions associated with cardholders, the real time
system shall display cardholder information including image
and badge transaction history.
System Status Display
.1
The SMS shall provide a dynamic system summary display
that graphically indicates the following status information,
filtered by panel or terminal. All status display
information shall be summarized in a single window:
- Status Unknown
- Panel or Terminal Up
- Panel or Terminal Down
- Terminal Mixed States
- Input Secure
- Input Alarmed
- Input Open
- Input Shorted
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.30
.31
.32
.33
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 17
- Input Suppressed
- Output Reset
- Output Set
- Door Unlocked
- Panel version mismatch
- Muster Operable
- Muster Degraded
- Muster Inoperable
Control Points
.1
The SMS shall allow input points to be defined as
control points when used in input/output linking and event
processing sequences of operation. Control points shall not
enter the alarm queue and shall not require that an operator
acknowledge them when they change state. The control point
activity will, however, be automatically logged to the
history file.
Workstation Control
.1
The SMS shall allow workstations to be assigned a
name, and to have the following capabilities:
.1
Be identified as either workstation only, or
workstation/video badging.
.2
Have a time zone to define the period to be in
use.
.3
Assign message filtering to define the messages
that can be transmitted to the workstation.
.4
Have an enable/disable toggle button to allow or
deny operator login at the workstation.
Real-time Printer
.1
The SMS shall have the ability to print either to a
network-accessible printer or to an LPT port. The toggle
button may be either enabled or disabled to allow real time
printing, and the following print parameters may be
independently defined:
- Alarms
- Access grant
- Access denied
- Badge Trace
- Audit trail
- Panel
- Host
- Elevator
- Cabinet
- Area
- Mustering
- Guard Tour
Elevator Control (Not used on this project)
.1
The server shall have the ability to control
compatible elevators using a CK7xx series controller. This
feature shall allow up to 16 elevators per controller, and a
maximum of 128 floors. History of elevator activity shall be
maintained in electronic or printed form. The SMS shall
provide two types of elevator interfaces:
.1
Low Level Interface: Low level interface
elevators have readers associated with a set of output
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.34
.35
.36
.37
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 18
points and an optional set of input points. The field
panel shall work with the elevator manufacturer's
control system using output points to enable car-call
buttons, and input points to monitor car-call buttons.
The panel shall grant access to a floor by enabling the
corresponding car-call button when a badge is presented
at a reader installed in the elevator cab. The SMS
shall provide a D620-ECG elevator mode that if
selected, causes a modification in the badging sequence
and in the elevator input and output points behavior.
.2
High Level Interface: The SMS shall allow the
CK7xx controllers to communicate with High Level
Interface elevator control equipment via a serial
protocol. The SMS shall support the KONE group
controller with up to eight elevators, with each
elevator supporting up to 64 floors. The KONE group
controller can be connected at either 1200 or 9600
baud.
Current Loop Configuration
.1
The SMS shall allow communication with legacy, P900,
and S321 panels via a current loop configuration. The loop
system shall support up to 32 loops with up to 16 legacy
panels per loop, up to sixty-four P900 panels per loop, and
up to thirty S321 panels per loop.
Mustering
.1
This feature shall provide the capability of tracking
personnel movement in the event of an emergency. During the
emergency, all personnel that had logged into a risk area
are expected to evacuate and are required to badge at a
reader outside the risk area. This will allow for real-time
monitoring, printed or on-screen, as to who may be still in
the hazard area. This information can be used to direct
search and rescue operations. One or more areas within a
plant or facility can be designated as Muster Zones.
Area Control
.1
This feature shall be used to control the number of
personnel/cardholders that are allowed within a controlled
area, thereby allowing large facilities to manage specific
areas more easily. For example, a controlled substance room
can be monitored, and the system will be able to report and
display in real time how many and which cardholders are
within the area at any given time.
Air Crew PIN
.1
The SMS shall allow the definition of air crew
personal identification numbers (PIN) to be used at PIN
readers connected to D600 AP panels and CK7xx panels version
2.3 and higher. Once the Air Crew PIN numbers are defined, a
system administrator shall enable or disable the Air Crew
PIN feature. When this feature is enabled, entering the
assigned Air Crew PIN number shall allow access at the door.
Air Crew PIN numbers shall be assigned to a group of people
or shall be assigned individually to an Air Crew member with
different access needs. Presenting a badge shall not be
required when using the Air Crew PIN Number feature.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.38
.39
.40
.41
.42
.43
.44
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 19
Cotag P900 Mark I and Mark II Controller Support
.1
The features and functionality will be based on the
Mark I configuration, meaning that the limits on badges will
be limited to the maximum count of the Mark I controller or
30,000 badges with the badge upgrade memory expansion. There
are three types of I/O Modules that are applicable: 1) 8
Input and 4 Output; 2) 8 Input and 8 Output; 3) 16 Input.
Smart Download Feature
.1
This feature shall allow the customer to set the
download time for changes that have been made to access and
terminal groups, as well as cardholders and badges changes.
There are three choices:
.1
Start download after the system has been idle for
"x" minutes after the last change.
.2
Download will occur at set time every day.
.3
Download to be performed manually.
.2
In each case, changes made to the cardholder data are
downloaded from the server immediately.
Temporary Access Feature
.1
This feature shall allow the customer to define
"temporary access" to any valid access group for each
individual badge. Temporary access shall be defined on a
selected date and time, which shall grant the cardholder
permission for limited access within the normal time zone.
Temporary access shall be based on the following parameters:
.2
Start - specifies the date and time when permission
for access shall be granted. If this is not specified then
access is granted immediately.
.3
Void - specifies the stopping date and time when
permission for access expires.
Enhanced local global entry/exit synchronization
.1
The SMS Entry-Exit Enforcement application shall be
expanded to include system wide readers. This feature shall
allow synchronization of badge status across multiple
panels. This feature is not recommended for medium and large
systems, unless using panels CK7xx of version 2.5 or higher.
Special Access
.1
The SMS shall provide special access that allows
setting up a door's access time to be different, to satisfy
the requirements for assisted access according to ADA
(Americans with Disabilities Act). The system shall provide
up to three special access flags, and then assign them to a
cardholder that requires special access at a door.
Additionally, the SMS shall provide the activation of an ADA
relay in conjunction with the granting of assisted access.
Port Configuration
.1
The SMS shall allow changing default port values that
are assigned to system applications during software
installation. Some of these values must match the values
configured at the panel.
Email Settings
.1
The SMS shall allow setting e-mail accounts that shall
be used to send e-mail messages as event actions, and where
automatic error return could be sent.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.45
.46
.47
.48
.49
.50
.51
.52
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 20
External Event Triggers
.1
The SMS shall allow external inputs to be used as
event trigger conditions. These external inputs can be in
the form of an RS232 serial message or a TCP/IP message; an
ASCII file or a database write. These inputs shall allow
external software or hardware systems to send a message to
the SMS, which will trigger a Host event that will in turn
generate an alarm or other event action.
Localization (Optional)
.1
The SMS shall provide an internationalized framework
to assist companies and users to work effectively in their
native language. All text in the SMS menus, dialogs, and
prompts shall appear in the language selected.
Dial-up Panels
.1
The SMS shall support communications with dial-up
panels (CK720 and CK705) using WAN connections and RRAS
interface service.
Dual Ethernet interface
.1
The SMS shall provide an alternate panel connection to
configure panels (CK720 or CK705 version 2.5 or higher) that
have a second network connection through a Dual Ethernet
interface. Dual Ethernet allows the alternate connection to
take over the communications if the primary connection
fails.
Exempt from Archiving to Flash
.1
The SMS shall provide the option of not saving the
following databases to Flash during a Write-Flash operation
(available for panels CK7xx version 2.5 and higher):
.1
Badge
.2
Access Groups (including elevator access groups)
.3
Configuration: (including the Panel Configuration
databases such as Elevator Configuration, Terminal,
Input, Output, Time Zones, Holidays, Soft Alarms, and
Card Events)
Input Suppression Messages
.1
The SMS shall allow input points that enter
suppression to be reported as being suppressed (available
for panels CK7xx version 2.5 and higher). When the input is
no longer suppressed, the current input point state is
reported.
Custom Card Formats
.1
The SMS shall support up to eight custom card formats
that can be downloaded to all S321 and CK7xx panels of
version 2.2 or higher. Upon selection, custom card files
shall be stored in a separate database table. Once the
selected card formats have been compiled, they will be
available for selection.
PIN Plus 1 Duress
.1
The SMS shall provide this option (available for S321
and CK7xx panels version 2.2 and higher) to enable a duress
alarm to be generated when a cardholder adds 1 to the last
digit of the PIN code. When this option is enabled, the 9
does not create a duress alarm. If the last digit of the PIN
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.53
.54
.55
.56
.57
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 21
code is a 9, then the user substitutes a 0 for the 9 and
this will trigger the duress alarm.
Star Feature
.1
The SMS shall provide the Star Feature (available for
S321 and CK7xx panels version 2.2 and higher) to enable
cardholders to press the star (*) key at the keypad plus a
feature number, to activate some of the panel's functions
that are normally invoked from keypads that contain the A,
B, C or D keys. The (#) key acts as the Enter key, it
wraps-up the previously entered keys and starts the
processing of the key sequence. It also clears the keypad
buffer for the next command to be entered. The (*) key
starts the feature selection process. Once pressed, the
cardholder can activate one of the following features: 0 =
Local Override, followed by number of minutes 1 = Enable
event, followed by event number 2 = Disable event, followed
by event number * = Clear the keypad buffer (works
independently of the Star Feature setting)
BQT Reader with LCD
.1
When used with panels CK7xx 2.5 and higher, the SMS
shall enable the LCD display of the following messages
(arranged from highest to lowest initial priority). :
- Reader Offline
- Access Granted
- Access Denied
- Enter PIN Code
- Enter Shunt Time
- Shunt Time Warning
- Present Card
No Green Light On Aux Access
.1
The SMS shall provide this option to disable the green
light displayed on AUX access. Requires S300-DIN-RDR2S
(connected to CK7xx 2.5 and higher), with firmware revision
Q or above.)
Deny if Door Open
.1
The SMS shall provide the option of generating access
denied messages when cardholders swipe their badges at
opened doors (available for panels CK7xx version 2.5 and
higher).
Override Reset Threat Level
.1
The SMS shall allow each reader terminal defined for a
CK7xx (version 2.4 or higher) or S321 panel to be configured
with an Override Reset Threat Level ranging between 0 and
99. A value of 0 disables the "Override Reset" feature; a
value between 1 and 99 invokes the following behavior:
.2
Whenever a terminal's Security Level reaches or
exceeds the terminal's Override Reset Threat Level, all time
zone based overrides, host initiated overrides and
cardholder overrides are immediately disabled. Subsequent
attempts to invoke host initiated overrides or cardholder
overrides will be denied.
.3
Once a terminal's Security Level drops below the
terminal's Override Reset Threat Level, the time zone based
override is restored immediately. Host initiated overrides
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.58
.59
.60
.61
.62
.63
.64
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 22
and cardholder overrides are not automatically restored, but
subsequent attempts to invoke host initiated overrides or
cardholder overrides will be granted, provided the
configuration allows these overrides.
Smart Card Management
.1
The SMS shall support the Federal Government smart
card encoding protocol. All encoded badges shall include
FASC-N (Federal Agency Smart Credential Number) data fields.
Auto Badge Management
.1
The SMS shall allow the control and management of
badge numbers within a defined pool. Once the pool of
numbers is defined, the operator can automatically assign
the next available number to the badge.
Service Startup Configuration
.1
The SMS shall allow enabling or disabling any of the
services at the start of communications, as well as set up
recovery actions to take place if a service fails. If the
Auto Start flag is enabled for a particular service, that
service will start automatically and can be stopped or
restarted using the Service Control or the Service Monitor
application. If the Auto Start flag is disabled, the service
will not start automatically and will not display in Service
Control. By managing the SMS services, you can reduce system
load by running only the required services.
Manual Controls
.1
The SMS shall allow some system functions to be
operated manually from a workstation. Operators with the
appropriate permissions can manually control doors, output
devices, and panel relays. For example, an operator can
unlock all doors at once, manually trigger an event, or
allow a guard to manually control access to a specific door
during off business hours.
N-Man Rule
.1
The SMS shall provide additional security measures for
specific access-controlled readers using the N-Man rule
function. The N-Man Rule is based in a team of cardholders
who must present their badge as a group within a defined
period of time in order to gain access at an N-Man Rule
defined reader. For this option to work, the terminals are
required to operate in Central mode. The SMS shall enable
visitors to gain access at an N-Man rule defined reader, as
long as their sponsor presents the badge after the visitor.
Database Maintenance
.1
The SMS shall provide several functions to help
customers maintain their database.
Visitor Definition
.1
The SMS shall allow an easier and faster way to enter
visitor and badge information, by allowing authorized
operators to enter visitor and badge data using a single
user interface. Prior to a visitor's arrival, the operator
shall be able to enter the appropriate visitor data into the
system, shall assign a visitor sponsor, shall enter the date
and time period of the scheduled visit, and shall assign
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.65
.66
.67
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 23
access privileges using Access Templates, subsequently and
from the same screen, the visitor badge shall be printed
Badge Resync
.1
Facilities that use entry and exit terminals require
cardholders to enter and exit an area in sequence. That is,
when cardholders badge in at an entry terminal, they must
badge out at the next badging. If, for example, they follow
another cardholder out without swiping their badge, their
badge will remain in the In state (out-of-sync). When they
attempt to badge back into the area, they will be denied
access. The SMS shall provide the capability of manually
adjusting the state of a badge to return it to a correct
state. The operator shall also be able to reconfigure the
badge as Undefined to clear the Entry/Exit status until the
next badging. The SMS shall allow badges to be resync by:
.1
Cardholders - to resync the status of badges that
belong to all or specific cardholders.
.2
Last Badging Terminal - to resync the status of
all badges last presented at the selected terminal.
.3
Last Badging Terminal Group - to resync the
status of all badges last presented at all terminals in
the selected terminal group.
Request Queue View
.1
The SMS shall provide a Request Queue database table
that contains requests originated from external sources,
such as Web Access requests. Since external requests involve
adding, deleting or modifying data in the SMS database, the
Request Queue shall be designed to provide additional
security measures in the request processing by checking all
records before they are allowed to enter the SMS.
.2
The Request Queue shall allow operators to intercept
requests for the purpose of reviewing, editing, and finally
letting request data enter the SMS database system. The
requests shall be packaged as XML documents and saved into
the SMS Request Queue table. The Request Queue View window
shall displays current requests or requests that were
archived in the Request Queue database table.
Web Access Option
.1
The Web Access feature shall enable users to perform
various security management tasks from any web-ready PC or
compatible PDA device. This feature shall support different
permission levels for each user, and requests can be
approved and/or validated prior to being implemented to
prevent unauthorized operations or changes to the SMS. Rules
shall be established to determine how requests are
submitted. If requests require approval, pre-defined
approvers shall approve or reject requests. If validation
shall be required, a user with the proper permissions shall
confirm the validity of the request before it can be fully
processed. Web Access features shall include:
- Visitor Requests
- Contractor Requests
- Cardholder Management
- Customizable User Interface
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.68
.69
.70
.71
.72
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 24
- Request Approval and Validation
- Badge Activities
- Guard Services
- Emergency Access Disable
MIS Interface Option
.1
This option shall provide the capability for the SMS
to receive cardholder information from an external source
(such as a Human Resources or MIS system). Using the MIS
interface and standard ODBC protocols, cardholders and their
badges shall be added, modified or deleted from the SMS
database, cardholder information can be queried using
"wildcards", and data imported from ASCII files. Such
import/export sessions can occur in either batch or
real-time mode.
Intercom Interface
.1
Intercom calls shall be monitored and connected to
from the Intercom Call Monitor and shall be used to
automatically trigger host actions, such as CCTV activities.
When incoming call requests are displayed, the operator
shall be able to select a call request from the list, and
connect the master intercom station to the selected station.
Intercom calls shall also be monitored and responded to from
the real-time map system. The SMS shall support
multi-exchange station calling. A call request can be
forwarded to multiple master stations.
Database Partitioning Option
.1
Multi-tenant building control shall be supported via
database partitioning. Each tenant may be provided with
their own user partition capable of controlling and
monitoring their own cards, doors, alarms, etc. Building
owners still retain overall control and can override tenant
commands if necessary. Building owners are free to lease
workstation "seats" on the security system thereby
generating additional revenue while enhancing tenant
satisfaction. In a campus environment, each building can be
configured as a separate partition with several operations
per partition. Each partition shall appear to the user as a
separate security system without incurring an additional
cost.
Guard Tour Option
.1
This option shall provide the ability to monitor
security personnel by time frame and tour definition.
Selected tours may be either randomly selected or fixed.
Users shall be able to define up to 256 guard tours with a
maximum of three guards per tour.
FDA CFR Part 11 Compliance
.1
The SMS shall provide features designed to assist
facilities that may be subject to FDA Title 21, Code of
Federal Regulation (CFR) Part 11 concerning electronic
records and signatures. The SMS shall allow customer to
define parameters to assure FDA Part 11 compliance. The
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 25
following are general Part 11 requirements applicable to the
SMS:
.1
Audit Trail - The SMS shall provide valuable
time-stamped reports to monitor day-to-day operator
activity, such as how the hardware is controlled, when
alarms are acknowledged, when cardholder records are
changed, and more.
.2
Authorized Users - The SMS software shall limit
system access only to authorized individuals.
Authorized users shall be identified by their unique
combination of user name and password. The passwords
for these individuals shall be configured to change
periodically and shall have a minimum password length.
Additionally, the software shall disable user access on
multiple invalid login attempts and shall provide for
automatic log off due to user inactivity.
.3
Record Validation - The SMS software shall
provide a tampering tool to detect unauthorized record
modifications. The SMS shall validate digital
signatures, pointing out discrepancies and correcting
discrepancies to ensure that records have a valid
digital signature.
.4
Record Persistence - All original records shall
be saved in the SMS database, even if records are
modified. The SMS shall generate detailed, time-stamped
audit trails reports, assuring that all record changes
maintain the original recorded information and thereby
protecting all previous data.
.5
Record Retention - Through software
configuration, a system administrator shall define
parameters to backup and retrieve records to ensure the
availability of all records for a specified period of
time.
.73 Video Imaging and Badging Integration Option (Not required
on this project)
.1
This option shall provide a visual identification of
every cardholder. Badge layouts shall be defined to include
a number of elements, such as company logos, cardholder
photographs, custom text, barcodes, fingerprints and
signatures. The captured and stored images can be viewed as
part of a cardholder's data record on a workstation.
.74 CCTV (not required on this project)
.1
This option shall provide controls to operate the
cameras and monitors forming part of the CCTV system.
Additionally, the system shall provide the controls to
define and run the following:
.1
Alarms, macros, and tours.
.2
Sequences from the monitors.
.3
Pan, tilt, zoom focus, iris, wiper, washer and
light controls for any given camera.
.4
Patterns, presets, and auxiliaries.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.75
.76
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 26
.2
The CCTV option shall provide for a single-seat
integrated security solution when used with the SMS and
shall support at a minimum the following CCTV protocols:
.1
General ASCII protocol
.2
American Dynamics switch: AD1024
.3
BetaTech switch: Ademco VideoBlox Switch
.4
Geutebruck - GST Interface: CPX 24/8; CPX 48/8;
VX 3 (Vicros III); KS 48 (Vicros II); and KS 40
switches.
.5
Panasonic SX850 switch, other models may be
supported if they are compatible with SX850 Protocol
Version 1.4 01.24/00.
.6
Pelco 9760, CM 6700 and CM 6800 switches.
.7
Philips Burle (Bosch) LTC 8100; LTC 8200; LTC
8300; LTC 8500; LTC 8600; LTC 8800 and LTC 8900 series
switches.
.8
Ultrak MaxPro-1000 switch.
.9
Vicon VPS1300; VPS1344; VPS1422 and VPS1466
switches.
.3
Integrate the CCTV system into the SMS c/w full PTZ
controls.
DVR Integration (AV) (not required on this project)
.1
This option shall provide seamless integration of the
SMS with approved Digital Video Recording (DVR) systems. The
integration shall allow authorized users to manage camera
functions, including frame rate and resolution, from a
single workstation, as well as to tie an event generated on
the system to live or recorded audio visual (AV) recording.
Audio and video may be accessed via a real time list, real
time graphical map, or alarm monitor screen.
.2
Depending on the DVR equipment, users shall be able to
search, retrieve, and download real time or archived AV
recording from any surveillance camera, from any place, at
any time. Query options shall include time/date, alarm
events, camera ID and DVR ID. The playback interface shall
have fast forward, rewind, go to first frame, go to last
frame, pause and stop controls. The AV integration shall
allow for Pan, tilt, zoom control, including presets.
.3
The system shall support at a minimum the following
DVR protocols:
.1
Nice protocol, version 8.0 (with alarm forwarding
and message filtering)
.2
Loronix protocol, versions 4.4 and 4.5
.3
Verint SmartSight
.4
Johnson Controls Digital Vision Network DVN 5000
series and DVN 3000 series.
Metasys BACnet Integration Option
.1
The BACnet integration option shall allow the SMS to
interface across the BACnet via TCP/IP to the Johnson
Controls Metasys Building Management System OPC server
supporting either M3 or M5 workstations. It shall further
allow the Metasys workstations to view and acknowledge
alarms, and control output functions from up to five M3 or
M5 workstations in real time. This shall allow the user to
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.77
.78
.79
1.9
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 27
elect the Johnson Controls Metasys workstation running the
M-Alarm graphics to view and interact with alarms generated
from the SMS.
.2
The BACnet integration shall require no special
hardware subset, but rather be a simple upgrade, via
software, to allow SMS users to enhance their workstation
operations by integrating BACnet communications with the
Metasys server.
Metasysr System Extended Architecture Option
.1
The Metasys System Extended Architecture option shall
allow the SMS to interface using web-based technology to the
Johnson Controls Metasys Building Management System. It
shall allow the Metasys workstations to view and acknowledge
certain SMS alarms, send access control commands, print
reports, and to create interlock events.
.2
The option shall require no special hardware subset,
but rather be a simple upgrade, via software.
Enterprise Option
.1
The Enterprise option shall allow customers with
multiple sites to communicate with each other to share
Cardholder/Badge information. Cardholders can be granted
access to doors at all assigned sites within the Enterprise
system. In the Enterprise Configuration, one SMS Site
becomes the SMS Central Site and all other SMS systems
within the enterprise become SMS Regional Sites. Each
regional Site synchronizes its data with the central Site.
Database replication shall be implemented using Microsoft
SQL Server database technologies.
Redundancy Option
.1
The SMS shall provide redundancy options that lessen
or eliminate the impact of system failure. If a failure
occurs, it shall be automatically detected, and the function
of the defective component shall be taken over by the
redundancy component. The two redundancy systems available
are:
.1
Cluster Redundancy: A high availability,
redundant computer system with failover and failback
capabilities using HP Proliant DL380 Packaged Cluster
to provide system duplication and backup functions.
.2
Remote Redundancy: A disaster recovery system
with failover and failback capabilities using NSI
Double-Take software to provide database mirroring and
backup functions.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
.1
The software shall have an installed capacity to accommodate the
following at a minimum:
.1
A central database on the server able to support up to
200,000 badges maximum.
.2
Unlimited number of access groups.
.3
Up to 16,000 2-state alarm input points, or up to 8,000
4-state alarm input points (or any combination in between).
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 28
.4
Up to 40 operator workstation terminals connected to a
server via an Ethernet TCP/IP network.
.5
Central online data storage of 500,000 historical
transactions, expandable (as system resources allow), with local
panel storage capability of up to 200,000 cardholders and 50,000
events.
.6
256 levels of alarm priority.
.7
A minimum of ten (10) individual badge numbers per
cardholder. Each badge shall be tracked separately.
.8
255 issue levels per card, only one of which shall be
active at any given time.
.9
Unlimited number of user-defined cardholder fields. The SMS
shall be capable of reporting on any or all of the fields. Each
field may be defined by the user as either alphanumeric text,
numeric, date, or Boolean.
.2
System Software
.1
The server operating system shall be Microsoft Windows 2003
Server or Microsoft Windows 2000 Server. It shall have
multi-tasking and multi-user capability, and support workstations
with Windows XP Professional or Windows 2000 Professional
operating systems.
.2
The system database shall be Windows SQL Server 2000 for
Windows 2003 Server or for Windows 2000 Server.
.3
The SMS software features shall be fully documented in the
form of a complete User's Manual including operation and
installation sections, and a detailed description of the major
SMS functions.
.3
The SMS shall be capable of partitioning (segmenting) the
database which must include, but is not limited to, the following
items:
- Cardholders
- Badges
- Time Zones
- Holidays
- Access Groups
- Panels
- Reader/Terminals
- Workstations
1.10
INTEGRATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Video imaging system integration. The SMS shall integrate with
the Johnson Controls, Inc. SMS Video Imaging and badging system
without the need for custom software development.
.1
The integration shall provide for a single database on the
SMS server, which shall store the cardholder data and image
fields.
.2
The communications between the video capture/badging
station and the SMS server shall be via Ethernet TCP/IP only.
Serial connections are unacceptable.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 29
.3
It shall be possible to operate the Video Imaging software
from the same qualified workstation operating with Microsoft
Windows 2000.
1.11
PRODUCT - GENERAL
.1
1.12
Manufacturers
.1
All access control hardware and software shall be of a
single manufacturer including server system, controllers, and
input and output terminal modules. Server system shall be
purchased directly from Johnson Controls or shall meet minimum
server requirements (as outlined below), and shall be approved by
Johnson Controls.
.2
Base bid shall be Johnson Controls, Inc. P2000 only. All
alternate manufacturers seeking approval shall submit the
following documentation to the Division Access Control and
Intrusion Detection System Engineer for review prior to bid. The
following information shall be submitted.
.1
Detailed bill of material for each piece of equipment
submitted as equal to that specified.
.2
Manufacturer's catalog cut sheet for each proposed
piece of equipment. The specification section, paragraph and
sub-section shall be typed on the front page of the catalog
cut sheet to aid in review. The exact model number proposed
shall be highlighted if more than one version of the product
is contained in the cut sheet.
.3
Line-by-line typewritten compliance/non-compliance
statement, comparing each requirement of the specification
against verifiable performance specifications of the
proposed product(s). This compliance statement shall be
signed by an executive officer of the proposing company.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
.1
The minimum system server/workstation requirements shall be a
standard name brand personal computer with sufficient capacity
for the intended purpose. The server computer shall ship factory
configured with all software pre-loaded and tested. All computer
hardware replacement components shall be available from multiple
third party sources. Unless otherwise approved by the
manufacturer, the minimum configuration for the server shall be
as defined below for a system capacity of five workstations, 128
Readers and 15,000 cards. One system PC/Printer will be provided
at 700 Assiniboine, 1 system PC/Printer will be provided at the
"PSB".
.1
Genuine Intel Pentium III CPU with a clock speed of 1 GHz
or greater
.2
1 GB RAM (additional RAM required if P2000 options are
included)
.3
3.5" floppy disk drive
.4
SCSI DAT drive - 4 GB minimum
.5
24X speed CD-ROM/DVD
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 30
.6
10 GB SCSI hard disk, 7200 RPM
.7
1024 x 768 resolution 64K color, video card with 4MB RAM
.8
17", flat screen, LCD
.9
Standard 101- type keyboard and optical mouse
.10 One network interface controller (10/100BaseT Network
Controller port) or equivalent.
.2
System printers shall be provided in the quantities specified or
as shown on the drawings. Printers shall be dot matrix, 180
characters per second, bi-directional printers.
.3
Controllers shall be Johnson Controls, Inc. CK721 v2.4+,
CK720/CK705 v2.0+, S321 v1.0 or approved substitutes with the
following functionality:
.1
The controller shall be a fully stand-alone processor
capable of making all access control decisions without the
involvement of the server computer based on a set of parameters
passed to the controller from the server.
.2
The controller shall support up to sixteen (16) card
readers in addition to either 256 input points or 128 input and
128 output points. It shall further support up to 12 facility
codes per reader, 40 unique holidays, 32 access group and time
zone pairs.
.3
Memory Requirements:
.1
Standard number of cards: 15,000 expandable to
200,000.
.2
Minimum number of historical transactions: 5,000
expandable to 50,000 at full card capacity.
.4
The controller shall require no firmware changes and shall
use flash memory modules to provide non-volatile storage of both
data and operational code.
.5
The CK7205 and CK705 controllers shall support the direct
connection of a standard dot matrix printer for local transaction
and report printing. The printer shall connect to the controller
via a built-in serial (RJ45) port.
.6
Each controller shall be provided with built-in hardware to
support hard-wired communications between the controller(s) and
readers of up to 4000 feet.
.7
Communications between the controller(s) and the server
shall be via Ethernet TC/IP at 10Mbps. CK720 and CK705 shall
provide an alternate communications path to the server via a
secondary IP address such that in the unlikely even the primary
IP address/network is down an alternate communications path may
be established. S321 controllers communicate via Ethernet
connection using a third party device.
.8
An alarm summary relay shall be built-in to the CK7xx
controller motherboard. If so programmed, the alarm relay shall
be activated whenever a connected alarm point transfers to the
alarm state and whenever soft alarms become active.
.9
A SPDT tamper switch shall be attached to the inner surface
of the controller enclosure. The tamper switch shall change state
whenever the enclosure door is opened to signal the SMS of the
condition. The tamper switch input shall be user programmable to
be suppressed, to be recognized as an input point, to be
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 31
processed by the alarm queue at the server computer, to printout
at an optional printer connected directly to the controller
(CK720 and CK705), and to activate the alarm summary relay
described above.
.10 The controller shall include a battery module to back-up
the controller's applications programs and database for 30 days
after the failure of the primary AC power service. The controller
database, the time clock, the transaction history, and all
operator entered parameters shall be backed-up by the battery.
.11 If required elsewhere in the drawings or Specification, the
controller(s) shall be furnished with an UPS battery
configuration instead of a standard AC linear power supply
configuration. The battery shall power the controller upon
failure of the primary AC service for a minimum of one hour.
.12 While on UPS service, the controller shall continue to
process event activity, card transactions, and record history
transactions.
.13 The controller shall provide built-in LED to indicate
whether the controller is properly communicating with the server
computer.
.4
1.13
Alarm monitoring and Output Control terminal boards. Intelligent
alarm monitoring and output control terminal boards shall be
Johnson Controls, Inc. plug-in modules to CK7xx series controller
with at least the following functionality:
.1
Sixteen two-state alarm input points.
.2
Eight four-state supervised alarm input points.
.3
Eight two-state alarm input points and eight SPDT output
relays.
.4
Eight four-state supervised alarm input points and eight
SPDT output relays.
CARDS AND CARD READERS
.1
.2
General
.1
All readers shall be configured with the reader
mounted separately, on the "secure" side of the door
only the reader head and pilot lights are mounted in
housing on the "entry" side of the door.
.2
Provide 2000 cards, proximity, photo ID type to
prox card II or approved equal.
electronics
such that
the reader
be H.I.D.
Wiegand Technology
.1
The reader housings shall be made of cast aluminum or
molded plastic.
.2
The reader shall contain one green and one red built-in
pilot light or LED to indicate valid and invalid card badging. A
single LED that changes color from red to green is also
acceptable.
.3
The reader shall be available in card only and card plus
PIN pad versions. Furnish and install in the style and quantities
as shown on the drawings.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 32
.4
The readers shall be manufacturer-certified for an ambient
operating environment of 32 to 115°F (0 to 46°C) and 10 to 90 %
RH, non-condensing. For installations in environments below 32°F,
a cold weather kit shall be installed in the reader to ensure
normal operation. The kit shall consist of a heating element
mounted inside the reader and a moisture seal gasket set to
prevent moisture from entering the reader housing.
.5
The cards shall be constructed of top quality, highly
durable and resilient PVC plastic or a PVC/Polyester composite
material for use with Wiegand readers.
.6
Cards shall be manufacturer-encoded using the Wiegand pulse
generating effect with a highly secure encryption algorithm. Each
card shall be encoded with a facility code unique to the security
system, an individual card number, and one of 255 issue level
numbers.
.7
The encoded information shall be highly secure from
alteration by external magnetic fields.
.8
Standard cards shall be available with a hot-stamped
facility code and card number. The cards shall be available from
the manufacturer without hot stamping, if requested by the Owner.
.9
Cards shall be ISO standard credit card size.
.10 Cards shall have the capability to be slot-punched at the
top and equipped with a strap clip to attach the card to the
user's clothing. NOTE: If using video badging, badges should be
printed before punching slots.
.3
Magnetic Stripe Technology (Not used on this project)
.1
The reader housings shall be made of cast aluminum or
molded plastic.
.2
The reader shall contain one green, and one red built-in
lamp or LED to indicate valid and invalid card badging or a
single multi-color LED.
.3
The reader shall be available as card only and card + PIN
versions. The readers shall be furnished and installed in the
style and quantities shown on the drawings.
.4
The readers shall be manufacturer-certified for an ambient
operating environment of 32 to 115°F (0 to 46°C) and 10 to 90 %
RH, non-condensing. For installations in environments below 32°F,
a cold weather kit shall be installed in the reader to ensure
normal operation. The kit shall consist of a heating element
mounted inside the reader and a moisture seal gasket set to
prevent moisture from entering the reader housing.
.5
The cards shall be constructed of top quality, durable, and
resilient PVC plastic or a PVC/Polyester composite laminated with
a magnetic stripe of high coercivity material (at least 2750
oersteds) designed for use with magnetic stripe readers.
.6
Each card shall be encoded with a facility code unique to
the security system, an individual card number, and one of 255
issue level numbers.
.7
Provide Magtek MT-75 magnetic stripe card encoder or
equivalent rated for 75 bpi.
.8
Standard cards shall be available permanently marked with
the card number and reference code. The cards shall be available
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 33
from the manufacturer without the markings, if requested by the
Owner.
.9
Cards shall be ISO 7810 standard credit card size.
.10 Cards shall have the capability to be slot-punched at one
end and equipped with a strap clip to attach the card to the
user's clothing. NOTE: If using video badging, badges should be
printed before punching slots.
.4
Proximity Technology
.1
Furnish and install the reader style as called for in this
Specification:
.1
Standard range Proximity 4000 reader (contact to 20
in.)
.2
The reader shall be integrated and contain all reader
electronics inside a single polycarbonate enclosure.
.3
The reader shall operate when mounted on a variety of
surfaces, including metal. Maximum read range degradation
when mounted on a metal surface shall be 50-percent.
.4
The reader shall contain an integral color LED and
audio tone to indicate if the card has been successfully
read.
.5
The reader shall be 8" x 8" x 2" maximum.
.6
To be H.I.D. #6005B (Wigand) or approved equal.
.7
Read range shall be dependent on model selected.
.8
The reader shall be rated for normal operation from -5
to 150°F.
.9
The proximity card shall be encased in sealed plastic
with a surface suitable to receive an adhesive backed photo
ID or shall be capable of direct printing.
.2
Long Range Proximity Readers (Used for exterior Gate
control)
.1
The reader shall be integrated and contain all reader
electronics inside a single weatherproof polycarbonate
enclosure.
.2
The reader shall operate when mounted on a variety of
surfaces including metal. Maximum read range degradation
when mounted on a metal surface shall be 50-percent.
.3
The reader shall contain an integral color LED and
audio tone to indicate if the card has been successfully
read.
.4
The reader shall be 12" x 12" x 2" maximum.
.5
Read range shall be a minimum of 20".
.6
The reader shall be rated for normal operation from -5
to 150°F. To be H.I.D. Maxi-Prox or approved equal.
.3
Mullion Style Proximity Readers (Not used on this project)
.1
The reader shall be integrated and contain all reader
electronics inside a single polycarbonate enclosure.
.2
The reader shall operate when mounted on a variety of
surfaces including metal. Maximum read range degradation
when mounted on a metal surface shall be 50-percent.
.3
The reader shall contain an integral color LED and
audio tone to indicate if the card has been successfully
read.
.4
The reader shall be 1.7" x 6" maximum.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 34
.5
Read range shall be up to 5".
.6
The reader shall be rated for normal operation from -5
to 150°F.
.7
The proximity card shall be encased in high impact
sealed plastic with a surface suitable to receive an
adhesive backed photo ID.
.4
Proximity Family Smart Card Readers (not used on this
project)
.1
All electronics shall be integrated and contained
inside a single polycarbonate enclosure.
.2
Reader shall operate when mounted on a variety of
surfaces including metal. Maximum read range on metal shall
be degraded to a point as specified by model selected.
.3
The reader shall contain an integral color LED and
audio tone to indicate a successful read.
.4
Reader size shall be no greater than 6" x 6" x 3".
.5
Technology of read shall be Johnson Controls specific,
26 or 34-bit with site code, user level and badge number
output in 2 wire Wiegand (D1/D0).
.6
Readers shall be personalized according to the
controller type the data is sent.
.7
Readers shall comply with ISO 14443 A or B as
specified by smart card use.
.8
Smart cards shall be dual use (insert or non-contact)
containing at least an 8K microprocessor.
1.14
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
1.15
SMS components shall be shipped to the job-site in original
manufacturer's shipping containers.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
All consoles, terminals, and controllers shall be factory wired
before shipment to the jobsite.
.2
Cabinet doors shall open a minimum of 170 degrees to avoid
blocking personnel movement. Each door shall be equipped with a
cylinder lock, a tamper switch and a piano-type hinge with welded
tamperproof pins.
.3
Provisions shall be made for field wiring to enter the cabinet
via standard knockouts at the top, bottom and sides of controller
cabinets.
.4
Each wire shall be identified at both ends with the wire
designation corresponding to the wire numbers shown on the wiring
diagrams.
.5
All exposed wiring within the cabinets, consoles, and terminals
shall be formed neatly with wires grouped in bundles using
non-metallic, flame-resistant wiring cleats or wire ties.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
.6
1.16
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 35
All ferrous metal Work shall be painted, in accordance with the
manufacturer's standards.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
.1
1.17
The Contractor shall be responsible for testing and
commissioning the installation in accordance with all applicable
documents in the Contract set.
.1
Testing shall be comprehensive and sufficient to
demonstrate compliance with each requirement.
.2
A proposed test plan shall be submitted to the Consultant
at time of shop drawings for approval before commencement of
final test.
.3
Final tests shall be conducted in the presence of the
Owner's representative.
TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION
.1
Operator training shall consist of a two-day course conducted
on-site by a factory trained professional instructor. Training
conducted by unqualified personnel is unacceptable.
.2
Training materials shall consist of the following:
.1
Formal course outline and agenda.
.2
Operator training student guide for each student.
.3
Hands-on practice with online equipment.
.4
Written examinations.
.3
The training course shall be for at least two continuous
business days.
.4
Additional video imaging training sessions shall be made
available to the Owner if necessary.
1.18
WARRANTY
.1
1.19
All equipment furnished under this Contract shall be warranted
for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of final Owner
acceptance of the system.
.1
Respond to service requests on-site, if required, within 3
hours, 365 days/year.
.2
Replace or repair defective components as required.
SERVICE CONTRACT PROPOSAL
.1
The bidder shall include an optional service Contract proposal
at the time of bid. The proposal shall include:
NOTE (Johnson Controls to deal directly with Owner for this
item).
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
P2000 Integrated
Security Management
System
Section 16902
Page 36
.1
Response to emergency service requests on-site, if
required.
.2
Replace or repair defective components, as required.
.3
Manufacturer's recommended preventive maintenance.
.4
Two-year and five-year Maintenance Contract, with price,
terms, and conditions shown for each year.
.5
The Service Contract shall be optional and the Owner shall
have the right to accept or reject the Contract, and accept only
the warranty service as described above, at no additional cost.
END
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Closed Circuit TV
(CCTV) System
Section 16920
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
All drawings and all sections of the specifications shall apply
to and form an integral part of this section.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Electrical General Requirements
Section 16010
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
2.2
Supply and install a closed circuit TV system with all conduit,
wire, outlets, and equipment as shown on the drawings and as
herein specified to provide a complete closed circuit TV system
in the building.
System Overview and Functions
.1
The system shall consist of a series of interior CCTV cameras,
exterior pan-tilt-zoom CCTV cameras, colour monitors, digital
video recorder c/w all accessories for a closed circuit TV
surveillance system.
.2
The system shall consist of the following components:
.1
Colour, solid state video cameras.
.2
Protective camera housing.
.3
Digital video recorder, 16 camera.
.4
Mini UPS APC # RS1500.
.5
Single 17" video monitors, 20" video monitors (flat
screen).
.6
Term. cabinets c/w individual camera transformers.
.7
Wiring installed in a dedicated conduit system.
2.3
CCTV Cameras
.1
Fixed Type/Dome Cameras
.1
Cameras shall be Panasonic #WV-CW244 or approved equal.
.1
80mm (3-1/8") diameter compact colour dome camera for
indoor use application.
.2
480-line horizontal resolution.
.3
Minimum illumination of 2.4 lx (0.24 fc).
.4
50dB signal to noise ratio.
.5
Built-in 2x variable-focal lens (3.8-8.0mm).
.6
Electronic shutter from 1/60 to 1/10,000 sec.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Closed Circuit TV
(CCTV) System
Section 16920
Page 2
.7
Built-in aperture level (sharp/soft)correction.
.8
Advanced digital adaptive Back-Light Compensation
(BLC) capability.
.9
Internal/Line-lock/VD2 synchronization (Line-lock: 24V
AC operation only).
.10 Vertical drive (VD2) sync capability with Panasonic
system products.
.11 Video monitor output jack for on the spot checking of
the lens angle setting.
.12 Can be installed in existing electronic junction box.
.13 24V AC/12V DC compatible power source operation to
suit the wide variety of applications.
.14 The 3-dimensional hinge (Pan, Tilt and Azimuth) allows
the camera to be rotated as well as moved horizontally and
vertically.
2.4
WEATHERPROOF AND VANDAL RESISTANT COLOUR DOME CAMERA
.1
To be Panasonic #WV-CW864A or approved equal.
.2
Pan/tilt/zoom.
.3
64 presets
.4
Zoom ratio X22, plus 10X digital.
2.5
CCTV Monitors (17")
.1
2.6
CCTV
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
monitors shall be Panasonic #WV-LD1500 or approved equal.
15" diagonal - Refer to Plans for Locations.
640 x 480 VGA.
3 channel video inputs (composite A/B or S-video).
Built-in Panasonic security data link connector.
1.5W speaker output.
Rack mount adapter, 19" rack.
120V, 73W.
NTSC, PAL
CCTV Monitor Mounts
.1
CCTV monitor mounts to be Pelco #MR4050 c/w all options and
accessories as required, or approved equal.
.1
Steel, black powder coat finish.
.2
150 lbs capacity.
.3
19" to 31" adjustable width.
.4
Mounting adapter.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
2.7
Closed Circuit TV
(CCTV) System
Section 16920
Page 3
Digital Disk Recorder (DVR)
.1
DVR to be Panasonic #WJ-HD316A or approved equal.
.1
General
.1
Power Source: 120V AC, 60 Hz.
.2
Power Consumption (approx.): 85W
.3
Ambient Operating Temperature: -10°C - +45°C (14°F 113°F)
.4
Ambient Operating Humidity: Less than 90%
.5
Standard Hard Disk Drive Unit: 1 bay (160GB)
.6
Drive Bay for additional HDD Unit: 1 bay (160GB)
(Provided)
.7
Dimensions (W x H x D): 420 x 88 x 350mm (16-9/16" x
3-7/16" x 13-3/4")
.8
Weight (approx.): 9.5 kg (20.9 lbs)
.2
Input/Output
.1
Video
.1
Video Input:
.1
1Vp-p/75 ohm, NTSC composite video signal
with automatic termination/looping through,
multiplexed control data, 8-input (1-8ch)*1 (BNC)
.2
1Vp-p/75 ohm, NTSC composite video signal
with automatic termination/looping through,
8-input (9-16ch)*2 (BNC)
.2
Cascade Input: 1Vp-p/75 ohm (BNC)
.3
Video Output:
.1
1Vp-p/75 ohm, NTSC composite video signal/
active looping through, 8-input (1-8ch)*1 (BNC)
.2
1Vp-p/75 ohm, NTSC composite video signal
with automatic termination/looping through,
8-input (9-16ch)*2 (BNC)
.4
Monitor Output: 1Vp-p/75 ohm, 2 terminals (BNC)
.5
Monitor Terminal (VGA): RGB output, 1 terminal
(D-sub 15-pin)
.6
S Video Output: Y=1Vp-p/75 ohm, C=0.286Vp-p, 1
terminal (S terminal)
.7
Video Output (front panel): 1Vp-p/75 ohm,
1 terminal (Pin jack)
.2
Audio
.1
Audio Input: -10dB, 10K ohm, 4 terminals (Pin
jack)
.2
Audio Output: -10dB, 600 ohm, unbalanced,
2 terminals (Pin jack)
.3
Others
.1
External Storage Terminal: High speed serial
interface (approx. 480 Mbps), 1 terminal
.2
Copy Terminal: High speed serial interface
(approx. 480 Mbps), 2 terminals
.3
Control Terminal: Emergency recording input, Disk
end status output, HDD emergency output, camera
emergency output, emergency output, power off output,
time adjustment input/output, sequence select
input/output, power inspection input, external storage
unit recording mode select (D-sub, 25-pin)
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
Closed Circuit TV
(CCTV) System
Section 16920
Page 4
.4
Alarm Connector: 1-8ch*3 alarm input, 9-16ch*4
alarm input 1-16ch*5 alarm output, alarm recover input,
alarm suspend input, (D-sub, 25-pin)
.5
RS485 Port: RS485 (4line/2line), 2 terminals
(RJ-11)
.6
Data: RS485, 2 terminals (RJ-11)
.7
Serial Port: RS232C, 1 terminal (D-sub, 9-pin)
.8
Network Interface Port: 10 Base-T/100Base-TX
(RJ-45)
2.8
System Controllers
.1
2.9
The system controller shall be Panasonic #WV-CU650 or approved
equal.
.1
The system controller enables the following functions:
.1
Camera selection
.2
Alarm (LED/Suspend/Recall/Reset)
.3
Setup menu
Power Supply
.1
To be Altronix #AL400/600 ULX c/w MOM5 or approved equal,
circuit quantity as required, plus 10% spare.
.2
Power supply to be sized 150% on each branch to accomodate
future expansion.
2.10
Equipment Rack
.1
Standard 19" rack c/w wire management on both sides. Refer to
Detail
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1
3.2
Locate, install, wire and connect all components and devices in
accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer.
Mounting of Equipment
.1
Mount equipment at heights as described in Section 16010.
.2
Mount equipment square and plumb with building lines. Install
devices flush and square with finished surfaces.
Project No. 674-2005
Alternate Emergency
Communication Centre
3.3
Closed Circuit TV
(CCTV) System
Section 16920
Page 5
Termination of Conductors
.1
3.4
Terminate conductors directly to the terminals of each device.
Identification
.1
Identify equipment as per Section 16010.
.2
Clearly identify zones on control panels, devices, etc.
.3
Identify wires and cables with wire markers to indicate zone
numbers. Identify wiring in each box, panel, cabinet etc. Coding
of identification to meet with the approval of the Contract
Administrator.
3.5
Wiring and Conduit
.1
Install wiring in an independent conduit system.
.2
Install device backboxes to form part of the conduit system.
Conduit to be sized to accommodate the wiring being installed.
3.6
Testing
.1
3.7
The complete system shall be tested in the presence of the
Contract Administrator and the City of Winnipeg's representative
on completion of the Work. Tests shall demonstrate that the CCTV
System will function in an acceptable manner.
Installation
.1
3.8
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
Tests
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010.
END
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement